*Physics Prelims (1-7).qxd

12/11/08

1:00 PM

Page 1

SCIENCE VISUAL RESOURCES

PHYSICS
An Illustrated Guide to Science

The Diagram Group

*Physics Prelims (1-7).qxd

12/11/08

1:00 PM

Page 2

Physics: An Illustrated Guide to Science
Copyright © 2006 The Diagram Group

Author:

Derek McMonagle BSc PhD CSci CChem FRSC

Editors:

Catherine Gaunt, Jamie Stokes

Design:

Anthony Atherton, Richard Hummerstone, Lee Lawrence,
Tim Noel-Johnson, Phil Richardson

Illustration:

Peter Wilkinson

Picture research:

Neil McKenna

Indexer:

Martin Hargreaves

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage or retrieval systems, without permission in writing from the publisher. For information contact:

Chelsea House
An imprint of Infobase Publishing
132 West 31st Street
New York NY 10001

For Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data, please contact the Publisher
ISBN 0-8160-6167-X

Chelsea House books are available at special discounts when purchased in bulk quantities for businesses, associations, institutions, or sales promotions. Please call our Special Sales Department in New York at 212/967-8800 or 800/322-8755.
You can find Chelsea House on the World Wide Web at http://www.chelseahouse.com Printed in China
CP Diagram 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
This book is printed on acid-free paper.

*Physics Prelims (1-7).qxd

12/11/08

1:00 PM

Page 3

Introduction
Physics is one of eight volumes in the Science Visual Resources

set. It contains five sections, a comprehensive glossary, a Web site guide, and an index.
Physics is a learning tool for students and teachers. Full-color

diagrams, graphs, charts, and maps on every page illustrate the essential elements of the subject, while parallel text provides key definitions and step-by-step explanations.
Forces and energy provides an overview of the fundamental forces and the basic forms of energy. This section discusses Newton’s laws of motion, gravity, simple machines, and the relationship between energy and forces. Conduction, convection, and radiation are also explained as well as energy changes.
Waves, sound, and light explores the transfer of energy through

waves. Superposition, interference, diffraction, reflection, and refraction are described in this section. The behavior of sound, light, and other electromagnetic waves is examined in detail. Other subjects covered in this section include seismic waves, noise and decibel ratings, the velocity of light, and the principles of lenses and other optical instruments.
Electricity is concerned with the phenomena associated with

electrons and protons that are stationary or moving. The theories of electrostatics, electric current, and electromagnetism are the principal themes of this section. Practical applications such as the generation of electricity, AC and DC electric motors, and radio and television are also considered.
Electronics focuses on systems that function by directing or

controlling the flow of electricity. The principles of electronic circuitry are the main theme of this section. There are expositions of Boolean algebra, combinational logic, and sequential logic, as well as detailed descriptions of electronic elements such as transistors, diodes, counting circuits, operational amplifiers, and rectifier circuits.
Units and measurements is a short section that gives details of the

international system of units and measurements (commonly known as SI units) used by physicists and other scientists.

*Physics Prelims (1-7).qxd

12/11/08

1:00 PM

Page 4

Contents
1 FORCES AND ENERGY
8 Newton’s first law of motion 9 Newton’s second law of motion 10 Newton’s third law of motion 11 Nature of forces
12 Adding forces
13 Turning effect of a force
14 Momentum
15 The gravitational force
16 Free fall and terminal velocity 17 Center of gravity and stability 18 Energy and forces
19 Simple machines 1
20 Simple machines 2
21 More complicated machines 1
22 More complicated machines 2
23 Lift pump and force pump
24 Distinction between heat and work
25 Heat and temperature

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45

Temperature scales
Thermal conduction 1
Thermal conduction 2
Thermal radiation 1
Thermal radiation 2
Convection 1
Convection 2
Energy changes 1
Energy changes 2
Energy production and distribution Reducing energy losses from houses
Energy from the Sun
Solar energy devices
A typical power station
Non-renewable energy sources Renewable energy sources
Alternative energy sources 1
Alternative energy sources 2
Alternative energy sources 3
Nuclear energy

2 WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
46
47
48
49

Describing waves
Huygen’s construction 1
Huygen’s construction 2
The principle of superposition 1
50 The principle of superposition 2

51 The principle of superposition 3
52 Stationary waves
53 Sound waves 1
54 Sound waves 2
55 Sound waves 3
56 Water waves

*Physics Prelims (1-7).qxd

57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

12/11/08

1:00 PM

Seismic waves 1
Seismic waves 2
Musical notes
Vibrating strings
Vibrating columns of air
Resonance
Scales
The human ear
Audio range
Infrasound and ultrasound Noise and decibel ratings Measurement of the speed of sound 1
Measurement of the speed of sound 2
Interference of two beams of light 1
Interference of two beams of light 2
Interference involving multiple reflections
Diffraction at a single slit
Diffraction at a double slit Diffraction grating
Resolving power
Polarization 1

Page 5

78 Polarization 2
79 Measurement of the velocity of light
80 Electromagnetic spectrum 1
81 Electromagnetic spectrum 2
82 Infrared
83 Absorption and scattering 84 Dispersion
85 Reflection 1
86 Reflection 2
87 Reflection 3
88 Reflection 4
89 Reflection 5
90 Refraction 1
91 Refraction 2
92 Refraction 3
93 The human eye
94 Defects of vision
95 Lenses 1
96 Lenses 2
97 Lenses 3
98 Color
99 Color mixing
100 Optical instruments 1
101 Optical instruments 2
102 Lasers

3 ELECTRICITY
103
104
105
106
107

Electric charge
The electroscope
Charging by induction
Applications of electrostatics 1
Applications of electrostatics 2

108
109
110
111

Applications of electrostatics 3
Applications of electrostatics 4
Problems created by electrostatic charge
Capacitance

*Physics Prelims (1-7).qxd

12/11/08

1:00 PM

112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137

Page 6

Practical capacitors
Color coding and size
Electric fields
Electric fields and Gauss’s theorem Electric current 1
Electric current 2
Electric current 3
Electric current 4
Electric current 5
Ohm’s law
Electric meters 1
Electric meters 2
Resistors 1
Resistors 2
Electromotive force
Applications of the
Wheatstone network 1
Applications of the
Wheatstone network 2
Electric power
Electric lighting
Electrolysis
Magnetic fields of magnets Magnetic fields due to an electric current 1
Magnetic fields due to an electric current 2
Magnetic field of Earth 1
Magnetic field of Earth 2
Forces in magnetic fields 1

138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159

Forces in magnetic fields 2
Electromagnets 1
Electromagnets 2
Electromagnetic
induction 1
Electromagnetic
induction 2
Generating electric power The DC electric motor
Transformer-induced
e.m.f.s 1
Transformer-induced
e.m.f.s 2
AC electric motors 1
AC electric motors 2
Electric power transmission 1
Electric power transmission 2
Transients: capacitor
Transients: inductor
Radio
Television
AC theory 1
AC theory 2
R.C. network 1: AC response R.C. network 2: AC response Electricity in the car

4 ELECTRONICS
160
161
162
163

Circuit symbols 1
Circuit symbols 2
Circuit symbols 3
Semiconductor diodes

164
165
166

Transistors
Integrated circuits
Logic gates and their truth tables

*Physics Prelims (1-7).qxd

167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174

12/11/08

1:00 PM

NAND equivalents
NOR equivalents
CMOS chips showing pin connections Boolean algebra
Combinational logic design 1
Combinational logic design 2
Sequential logic 1: the bistable Sequential logic 2: examples using the bistable Page 7

175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187

Clocked logic
Examples of clocked logic Counting circuits 1
Counting circuits 2
Operational amplifiers 1
Operational amplifiers 2
Operational amplifiers 3
Operational amplifiers 4
Operational amplifiers 5
Rectifier circuits
The microprocessor
Analog and digital signals
ASCII code

5 UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
188
189
190
191
192
193

Function and scaling
Motion in a straight line Instantaneous velocity 1
Instantaneous velocity 2
Instantaneous velocity and acceleration
Addition and subtraction of vectors 1

APPENDIXES
198
205
207

Key words
Internet resources
Index

194
195
196
197

Addition and subtraction of vectors 2
The international system of units: base units
The international system of units: derived units
The international system of units: symbols and conventions *01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 8

8
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words force friction gravity inertia mass Newton’s first law of motion 1 Effect of friction

Newton’s first law
● Newton’s

first law of motion states that an object will remain at rest or, if it is moving it will continue to move at a constant speed in the same direction, unless it is acted on by an external force. This might be a single force or the resultant of two or more unbalanced forces.

1 Effect of friction
● When

the engine of a car is switched off, the car will eventually come to rest because friction and air resistance act on the car to slow it down. If these forces were absent the car would continue with a constant speed in a straight line.

2 Absence of friction

2 Absence of friction
● In

space there is no air. Once a rocket has escaped the gravitational pull of
Earth it will continue to move with a constant speed in a straight line forever without needing any additional thrust from its engines.

3 Inertia

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● All

matter has an inbuilt opposition to being moved or, if it is moving, to having its motion changed. This property is called inertia.
● When the piece of card is flicked sharply it moves in the opposite direction to the flick but the coin remains where it is.
● The greater the mass of an object the greater its inertia. The greater its inertia, the more difficult it is to move when it is at rest and the more difficult it is to stop when it is in moving.
● Inertia provides a definition of mass.
The mass of a body is a measure of its inertia. 3 Inertia coin card

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 9

9

Newton’s second law of motion FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words acceleration momentum velocity 1 Equipment and method elastic band kept at constant extension

to ticker-timer Newton’s second law
● Newton’s

second law of motion states that an external resultant force changes the motion of an object in such a way that the rate of change of the object’s momentum is proportional to the force, and in the same direction.
● This law may be expressed mathematically in two ways:
Force is applied to trolley

Doubling the force

2 Typical result

3 Velocity/time graph

ticker-tape
40

1 Equipment and method
●

The paper strip attached to the trolley passes through a ticker-timer which places a dot on the paper at regular time intervals.
● Exert a steady force on the elastic band in the direction shown.

14

160

140
Distance (in cm)

force = mass x acceleration (F = ma) impulse = change of momentum

12

2 Typical result
●

120

30
80

60

3 Velocity/time graph
The trolley’s velocity (v) equals the distance traveled (d) divided by the time (t). v=d/t
● As the ticker-timer places dots on the paper at regular time intervals, the trolley’s velocity at any point equals the distance traveled per dot.
● The acceleration (a) of the trolley equals its velocity divided by time.
●

8

6

4
20

a=v/t
●

40

20

2

10
0

0

40
0
10
20
30 number of ticks Time (in equal units of time)

0
0

50
10
20
30
40
Time (in equal units of time)

The velocity time graph is a straight line indicating that acceleration is uniform. The trolley’s acceleration is given by the gradient of the graph.
● Study the effect of increased force by increasing the number of elastic bands used in the experiment. With increased force, the gradient of the graph increases, showing that the force is proportional to the acceleration. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

100

Velocity (in cm per tick)

10

As the trolley accelerates, the distance between adjacent dots on the tape increases. The distance traveled by the trolley can be plotted on a graph.

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 10

10
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words force momentum

Newton’s third law of motion 1 Example 1

Newton’s third law
● Newton’s

third law of motion states that when two objects, A and B, interact, the force exerted by A on B is equal in magnitude to the force exerted by B on A, but the forces act in opposite directions.

1 Example 1
● When

a person steps forward from rest their foot pushes backwards on Earth and Earth exerts an equal and opposite force forward on the person.
Two bodies and two forces are involved. ● The small force that a person exerts on Earth gives no noticeable acceleration to Earth because of its large mass. The equal force exerted on the person, who has a much smaller mass, causes them to accelerate.

2 Example 2
● When

a person steps out of a rowing boat they push backwards on the boat, and the boat pushes them forwards with an equal but opposite force.
● The friction between the boat and the water is slight and, as the person pushes on the boat, it starts to move backwards reducing the forward motion of the person, who will tend to fall in the water between boat and land. force exacted on the foot by the Earth

force exacted by the foot on the
Earth

2 Example 2

force exacted on the foot by the boat force exacted on the boat by the foot

3 Example 3

force exacted by the bullet on the gun

3 Example 3

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

a bullet is fired from a gun, equal and opposite forces are exerted on the bullet and the gun as the bullet passes down the barrel. Bullet and gun acquire equal momentum but in opposite directions. mass of bullet x bullet velocity = mass of gun x gun velocity
● Since the mass of the bullet is much less than that of the gun, the bullet will move forward at a much higher velocity than the gun will move backwards. force exacted by gun on the bullet

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 11

11

Nature of forces

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

1 Measuring force applied

mass scalar vector

force meter

F

Nature of forces is a vector, rather than a scalar, quantity—i.e. it has both magnitude and direction.
● Scalar quantities, such as mass and length, are added using normal arithmetic but vectors are added geometrically using the parallelogram law (page 12) which considers both their directions and their magnitudes.
● Force

2 Force applied to a trolley

1 Measuring force applied

F

●

The force applied to a trolley is measured using a force meter or a newton meter.

2 Force applied to a trolley
●

3 Opposing forces

When a force F is applied to the trolley it accelerates in the direction of the force. 3 Opposing forces
●

F

F

If equal forces are applied to the trolley but in opposite directions, the trolley will remain stationary or, if it is already in motion, it will continue in constant motion.

4 Vector nature of force
●

Equilibrium – no motion or constant motion

4 Vector nature of force
F

If forces are applied at an angle, the resulting motion is calculated using the parallelogram law.
● In this case, equal forces are applied at equal angles to the trolley's axle and the trolley moves in the direction shown. θ

θ

direction of motion

force

F

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

force

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 12

12
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words gravity parallel resultant Adding forces
1 Adding parallel forces
2N
3N
2N

2N

2N

1 Adding parallel forces

3N

2N

2N
3N

● Forces

2 Adding forces
● Extend

the spring by pulling two force meters in different directions. The force exerted by the upper force meter is 6 N, and by the lower force meter,
4 N.
● The spring can be extended by the same amount by pulling a single force meter in a horizontal direction by 8 N.

3 The parallelogram

4 Components of weight
© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Weight

is the force that an object exerts on the ground by virtue of being pulled down by gravity. The weight of an object can be resolved into two forces (C1 and C2)acting perpendicularly to each other.
● Cos ␪ = C2/F therefore C2 = F cos ␪
● Cos ␣ = C1/F therefore C1 = F cos α however cos ␣ = sin θ therefore
C1 = F sin θ.

zero resultant force
3N
resultant forces

parallel forces

2 Adding forces a b

c

+

d

b

f

+

c

h

e

i

g

+

First measurement

Second measurement

a stretched spring b fixed end c metal ring with circle drawn round to mark position d force meter reads 6 N

3 The parallelogram

e f g h i

+

force meter reads 4 N mark direction of 6 N mark direction of 4 N stretched spring with same extension force meter reads 8 N

A

A

+ k m
C

C l ● Remove

the equipment and draw a line 6 cm long representing the 6 N force between c and f, mark the end A.
● To represent the 4 N force draw a line
4 cm long between c and g. Mark end B.
● Complete the parallelogram by making a 4 cm arc centered on A and a 6 cm arc centered on B.
● The diagonal of the parallelogram is
8 cm long, the size of the resultant force in the experiment.

1N

+

are vector quantities, having both magnitude and direction. A force is often represented as an arrow, whose length represents the relative magnitude of the force, and direction indicates the direction in which the force acts.
● A resultant force is a single force that produces the same effect as two or more forces.
● Parallel forces act in either the same direction or in opposite directions.

5N

j
B

+
B
First measurement j 4 cm line to represent 4 N k 6 cm line to represent 6 N

Showing how the forces add l point of arc radius 4 cm centered on A m point of arc radius 6 cm centered on B

4 Components of weight o n

θ α θ

p
C2
θ

α

C1

Object, resting on a slope

F n object o weight down the plane p weight perpendicular to plane

F
Two components of weight
C2 = F cos θ
C1 = F sin θ

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 13

13

Turning effect of a force

Key words

1 The moment of a force a FORCES AND ENERGY

equilibrium lever moment torque x c b

60° l 60°

d

1 The moment of a force
● The

turning effect of a force around a point is called the moment or torque.
The moment of a force is the product of the force and its perpendicular distance from the turning point.
● When the crank is horizontal the moment = F x l.
● When the crank is 60˚ to the horizontal the perpendicular distance from the force to the turning point = x = l cos 60˚. The moment in this position is therefore = F x l cos 60˚.

a
Crank at 90° to chainwheel a chainwheel b crank c pedal d direction of footpush moment = F × l

b

F

Crank at 60° to horizontal
Moment =
F × x = F × l cos 60°

d c F

2 The law of moments d1 g

d2

d3 d1 e

d2

2 The law of moments law of moments (law of the lever) states that when a body is in equilibrium the sum of the clockwise moments about any point is equal to the sum of the anticlockwise moments about the same point.
● When the meter rule is horizontal m1d1 = m2d2. Therefore, if d1 is twice the distance d2, m1 must be half the weight of m2. A lighter person can counterbalance a heavier person on a seesaw by moving nearer to the pivot.
● Provided that a meter rule is uniform in shape and composition its mass can be thought of as being concentrated at its geometric center. When a meter rule is pivoted at its center, its weight acts at the pivot and produces no moments otherwise the weight of the rule must be taken into account in calculations on moments.
● The

h

i h m1

m2

m1

m1d1 = m2d2

m2

m3

m1d1 = m2d2 + m3d3

e meter rule f slotted mass hangers

g wire loops i pivot h slotted masses

3 Parallel forces in equilibrium j C1

C2

j bridge
W = weight of bridge
C1 = reaction of pillar 1
C2 = reaction at pillar 2 k pivot

k

C1

l

C2

W

3 Parallel forces in equilibrium W = C 1 + C2 pillar 1

pillar 2

l truck
W2 = weight of truck
M1 = clockwise moment of C1 about pivot M2 = anticlockwise moment of truck
M3 = anticlockwise moment of weight of bridge

● As

W2

M1
C1 + C 2 = W 1 + W 2
M1 = M 2 + M 3

W1

M2

M3

the truck moves across the bridge from pillar 1 towards pillar 2, the anticlockwise moments about the top of pillar 2 decrease and therefore the magnitude of C1 decreases.
● Conversely, the clockwise moments acting about the top of pillar 1 increase and therefore the magnitude of C2 increases.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

f

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 14

14
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words momentum Newton’s laws of motion vector velocity Momentum
1 Transferred momentum

Momentum a vector quantity is the product of an object’s mass and velocity. ● It is measured in kilogram meters per second, kgms-1 or Newton seconds.
● Following Newton’s laws of motion, a system’s total momentum is constant unless a net external force acts. This applies in cases of impact and disintegration. A

● Momentum,

B

Before: momentum to left + momentum to right = zero
After:
total momentum is zero

● The

momentum of pendulum A is transferred to pendulum B.

● If

the cars were traveling with equal momentum in opposite directions before impact they would remain at the point of impact as the net momentum would be zero.
● If one car had more momentum than the other the cars would continue to move after impact.

A

2 Collision of two cars

1 Transferred momentum

2 Collision of two cars

B

3 Rocket propulsion i j

g

f liquid hydrogen g liquid oxygen

f

h

Rate of change of rocket momentum + rate of change of momentum of ejected hot gases

h combustion chamber i nozzle j hot gasses

4 Conservation of momentum
3 Rocket propulsion

A

B

● The

momentum of the rocket moving in one direction is equal to the momentum of the exhaust gases moving in the opposite direction.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●

In momentum calculations, movement to the right is considered positive, movement to the left negative.
● When the spring is released the trolleys move apart as shown.
● Since momentum is conserved momentum of trolley A + momentum of trolley B = 0.
● Mass of trolley A = 2m; velocity = - vA.
Its momentum = - 2m x vA. Mass of trolley B = m; velocity vB. Its momentum = mvB.
As momentum is conserved,
- 2mvA + mvB = 0; 2mvA = mvB
Trolley A's velocity is half trolley B's.

Two mechanics trolleys that can be pushed apart by a compressed spring: mass of trolley A = 2 × mass of trolley B a trolley runway b point where trolleys physically separate

+ve

a

Spring is released by hitting with a hammer

b trolley B

Velocity

4 Conservation of momentum Time
0
trolley A

–ve
Trolleys move apart

Velocity-time graph

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 15

15

The gravitational force

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

1 Kepler’s laws sun Kepler’s laws orbit planet
The second law sun planet

t3

1 Kepler’s laws t2 A

B

The first law

t1

For equal time intervals t2–t1 and t4–t3 area A = area B

t4

2 Sun’s gravitational force

FE = 4π2 K mE
R12

The Sun attracts the planets with a force proportional to their mass and inversely proportional to the square of their distance from the Sun

Earth

R2

●

The Sun attracts the planets with a force proportional to their mass and inversely proportional to the square of their distance from the Sun.

3 Universal gravitation
● The

FM

K mM
R22

force of attraction, F, between two bodies of mass m1 and m2 which are distance R apart is given by

Mars

F = g m1 m2
R2
● g is the gravitational constant. Its value

3 Universal gravitation m1 2 Sun's gravitational force

F2–1

F1–2

is 6.67 x 10-11 N m2 kg-2. m2 4 Measuring G
●

R
F2–1 = – F1–2
= G m1m2
R2

In 1798 Cavendish measured the very small gravitational forces exerted on two large lead spheres by two small gold spheres 5 mm in diameter using a torsion balance. A calibrated wire is twisted with force (F). g is calculated by substituting values for F, m1, m2 and R in the formula
F = g m1 m2
R

4 Measuring G

where m1 is the mass of gold sphere m2 is the mass of lead sphere
R is the distance between the centers of m1 and m2

lead sphere

gold sphere gold sphere lead sphere

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

FM =

first law states that the orbit of each planet is an ellipse with the
Sun at one focus. The orbits of the planets are often shown as circular.
● Kepler’s second law (the law of area) states that the radius vector joining each planet to the Sun covers equal areas in equal times.

FE Sun
R1

4π2

● Kepler’s

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 16

16
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words acceleration action at a distance friction gravity gravitational field mass terminal velocity viscosity weight

Free fall and terminal velocity 1 Gravity: action at a distance
9.8 ms–2

1 kg

1 Gravity: action at a distance force of gravity acts through space and can cause an object which is not in contact with Earth to fall to the ground. ● Earth is surrounded by a gravitational field which exerts a force on any object within that field. The strength of a gravitational field is defined as the force acting on unit mass in the field.
● Measurements on Earth’s surface show that an object of mass 1 kg experiences a force of 9.8 N due to gravity; i.e. its weight is 9.8 N.
● The strength of Earth’s field is denoted by g and is 9.8 N kg-1. Since N
= kg ms-2, g can also be given as 9.8 m s-2, the acceleration due to gravity.
● The

9.8 N kg–1

1 kg

2 Free fall and terminal velocity in air air resistance

Velocity

2 Free fall and terminal velocity in air
● When

an object falls through the air the force of weight acts downwards, pulling it towards the ground while the force of air resistance acts in the opposite opposing this motion.
● Initially, the falling object speeds up however, as it does, air friction increases and reduces its acceleration.
Eventually, the upward force due to air friction is equal to the weight of the object and the resultant force is zero.
The object no longer accelerates but falls at a constant velocity called its terminal velocity.

Terminal velocity

acceleration

weight
Time

3 Free fall and terminal velocity in a liquid friction 3 Free fall and terminal velocity in a liquid moving through viscous liquids behave in exactly the same way.
● The ball bearing initially accelerates but as it does the friction acting on it from the oil increases. At some point the ball bearing reaches a constant velocity—its terminal velocity.

oil ball bearing

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Objects

weight

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 17

17

Center of gravity and stability FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words center of mass equilibrium 1 Center of gravity hole nail

1 Center of gravity

flat shape

●

centre of gravity centre of gravity plumb line

flat shape

2 Stability stable topples

center of gravity stable

unstable

center of gravity A body behaves as if its whole weight is concentrated at one point which is called the center of gravity. Since the force of gravity is effectively constant over the small volume of an object on
Earth, the center of gravity and center of mass are effectively the same point.
● In a regular flat shape, the center of gravity is at the geometric center of the shape.
● In an irregular flat shape the center of gravity is found by suspending the shape on a nail so that it can swing freely, and tying a plumb line (a thread with a weight attached) to the nail.
The shape hangs in such a way that its center of gravity is directly below the point from which it is suspended i.e. there is no moment in either direction. The position of the plumb line is marked and the process repeated, suspending the shape from a different place. The center of gravity is where the two lines intersect.

2 Stability
●

An object’s shape and position affects whether it topples over easily or not.
● An object will topple over if its center of gravity moves outside its base.
● Objects with broad bases are more stable than objects with narrow bases.

3 Equilibrium

3 Equilibrium
An object is in stable equilibrium if, when released after a small displacement (to the position marked with a dotted outline), it moves back to its original position.
● An object is in unstable equilibrium if, when released after a small displacement, it moves further away from its original position.
● An object is in neutral equilibrium if, when released after a small displacement, it remains in the new position.

Unstable equilibrium

weight center of gravity Neutral equilibrium

weight center of gravity weight center of gravity © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●

Stable equilibrium

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 18

18

Key words asymptote gradient gravitational potential tangent Energy and forces
1 Gravitational forces
10

8

gravitational potential energy, E, of an object of weight F newtons which is h meters above the ground is given by E = F x h. Rearranging this equation gives F = E

● The

Energy

1 Gravitational forces

F = ∆E
∆h

∆E

4

2

h

gradient of the graph at any point is the gradient of the tangent at that point. As the curve is uniform, a good approximation is obtained by taking values equidistant from the point and calculating the ratio of the change in energy, ∆E, to the change in distance,
∆h.
● As an object moves further away from
Earth, the attraction it experiences as a result of Earth’s gravitational field decreases. The curve is asymptotic and thus the force never actually becomes zero, but it becomes so small as to be insignificant.

6
Force
N

FORCES AND ENERGY

∆h

● The

0

Distance

0

The force of attraction on an object is calculated from the gradient of the energy-distance curve

3

4

5

6

The force-distance curve

2 Repulsive and attractive forces between atoms
40

40

Forces

20

●

20

equilibrium separation Force
10–9 N

10
0

Associated energy

30

r
10–10
1

2

3

4

5

10
Energy
10–19 J

2 Repulsive and attractive forces between atoms

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

2

r
Earth radii

30

As atoms move together, their outer electron shells exert a repulsive force on each other.
● At smaller separation distances. however, a force of attraction between atoms increases.
● The attractive and repulsive forces can be combined to give the net force for any separation distance.
● While the attractive force becomes zero for large separations, it decreases less rapidly than does the repulsive force, and there is a separation distance at which the attractive force operates after the repulsive force has become zero.
● At the equilibrium separation distance the repulsive force equals the attractive force and the atoms are stable. 1

0

10

10

20

20

30

30

40

40 repulsive force net force attractive force

1

2

3

r
10–1
4
5

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 19

19

Simple machines 1

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

1 First-order levers

Rowboat

force lever mechanical advantage effort effort load

load

moment work Simple machines machine is a device in which a force applied at one point gives an output force elsewhere.
● The work done by a machine, E, equals the force applied multiplied by the distance moved, E = F x d.
● The force ratio (mechanical advantage) of a machine is the ratio of the load to the effort.
●A

fulcrum

fulcrum
Scissors
effort

load

fulcrum

force ratio = load/effort
●

2 Second-order levers load distance ratio = distance moved by effort/distance moved by load fulcrum fulcrum

The distance ratio (velocity ratio) of a machine is the ratio of the distance moved by the effort to the distance moved by the load.

effort

load

effort

Nutcracker

●

Force multipliers have both a high force ratio and a high distance ratio.
● Distance multipliers have both a low force ratio and a low distance ratio.

Levers
●

effort
Wheelbarrow
fulcrum

3 Third-order levers
Tweezers
load load fulcrum fulcrum effort

These simple machines are all based on levers. Their action is based on the law of moments. A lever may act as a force multiplier or a distance multiplier. ● Crowbars, wheelbarrows, and nutcrackers are force multipliers. A small effort force is applied over a large distance to exert a large force on the load over a small distance.
● The forearm is a distance multiplier. A large effort force is applied over a small distance to exert a small force on the load over a large distance.

1 First-order levers
●

effort
Fishing rod effort 2 Second-order levers
●

load

A second order lever has the load between the effort and fulcrum.

3 Third-order levers
●

fulcrum

A first order lever has the fulcrum between the effort and load.

A third order lever has the effort between the fulcrum and load.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

load

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 20

20
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words efficiency force gear wheel pulley work

Simple machines 2
1 Pulley systems

1 Pulley systems simple pulley does not magnify the force applied but changes the direction that the force acts. Distance ratio is 1.
● In 2- and 4-pulley systems a small effort raises a large load. In a 2-pulley system for every 1 m by which the load is raised the effort is applied for 2 m, thus the distance ratio is 2. In a
4-pulley system the distance ratio is 4.
● If pulley systems were perfect machines they would be frictionless and no energy would be lost thus, using a 4-pulley system, a 40 N load would be raised 1 m by an effort of
10 N moving a distance of 4 m.
● The efficiency of a machine is the ratio of useful work done, or energy output, to the work or energy input.
●A

efficiency = work input x 100% work output

effort

force applied to load

effort

effort force applied to load

Simple pulley

2-pulley system

force applied to load
4-pulley system

2 Screw threads

screw

water trapped by screw thread
Raising water with a screw

pitch
Screw-thread with a screw

rotates in opposite direction to water flow

3 Water wheels

or rotates in same direction as water flow

efficiency = force ratio x 100% distance ratio
● The

efficiency of a machine is always less than 100% as not all of the energy input does useful work.

2 Screw threads
● In

a screw thread machine, the thread is usually turned by a handle. Distance ratio equals ratio of the circumference of the circle made by the effort to the pitch of the screw.

3 Water wheels
● Water

undershot water wheel

wheels are driven by flowing

water.
© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

overshot water wheel

4 Gear wheels

4 Gear wheels
● The

force ratio and distance ratio of a machine can be changed by gears.
● The 15 teeth gear makes two revolutions for each complete revolution of the 30 teeth gear.
● If the effort is applied to the smaller gear to drive the larger gear the distance ratio is 2.

15 teeth
30 teeth

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 21

21

More complicated machines 1

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

steam passing into cylinder– piston moving out

1 Newcomen engine

B
Pressure

b

condensation of steam
C

D piston moving in
Volume

c

Pressure-volume relation e h g i

f
Apparatus

2 Internal combustion

piston pivot 1 Newcomen engine valve opened to let steam in
A

d

a

condense ignite internal combustion engine

a load b pivot c cold water d piston e cylinder f boiler g valve to allow cold water to spray cylinder walls h valve to let steam into cylinder i pipe to drain water from cylinder

m

o

● Newcomen

built the first practical engine in the early eighteenth century.
Water is heated in the boiler, and turns to steam which is injected into the cylinder under high pressure, forcing the piston upwards. A spray of cold water is injected into the cylinder causing the steam to condense, drastically reducing pressure in the cylinder. The piston is forced down by atmospheric pressure. Movement is transferred to a load via a pivot.
● Pressure volume relation. The pressure in the cylinder rises A) as steam is injected into it and remains constant B) as the piston rises. When a spray of cold water is injected into the cylinder the pressure rapidly falls C) as the steam condenses and remains constant D) as the piston is forced down by atmospheric pressure.

n

2 Internal combustion a four-stroke internal combustion engine a mixture of air and petrol burns within the cylinder.
● During the induction stroke the inlet valve opens and the air-petrol mixture passes into the cylinder.
● During the compression stroke both inlet and outlet valves are closed and the air-petrol mixture is compressed.
● During the ignition stroke, still with both the inlet and outlet valves closed, the air-petrol mixture is ignited by an electrical discharge from a spark plug.
This causes a rapid increase in pressure within the cylinder as the airpetrol mixture is converted to exhaust gases. This increase in pressure forces the piston down.
● During the exhaust stroke the outlet valve opens allowing the exhaust gases to leave the cylinder.
● The pressure volume changes during the cycle are shown on the diagram.

k l Compression stroke: valves closed

Pressure

Induction stroke
(air and vaporized petrol mixture)

q r p t Volume
Pressure–volume relation for Otto cycle

s

Ignition stroke: valves closed

Exhaust stroke

k piston l cylinder m spark plug n inlet valve open o outlet valve closed p ignition q piston moves down r exhaust s intake t compression

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● In

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 22

22
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words area force hydraulic jack hydraulics piston

pressure valve More complicated machines 2
●

Liquids are almost incompressible and transmit pressure applied to them.
They are used in hydraulic machines.

1 Hydraulic jack the downstroke the valve from the fluid reservoir is closed and the valve into the jack cylinder is open. Fluid is forced from the pump cylinder to the jack cylinder by the pump piston. This forces up the jack piston.
● On the upstroke the valve leading to the jack cylinder closes. The pressure in the pump cylinder falls and atmospheric pressure forces the valve from the fluid reservoir to open.
Atmospheric pressure forces fluid into the pump cylinder.
● Pressure, force and area are related.

More complicated machines 2
1 Hydraulic jack a c

e

d

b

j

k

f

● On

g

h i a down stroke b up stroke c effort

d pivot e load f atmospheric pressure

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

i

e

pressure exerted by the pump piston equals that exerted on the jack piston. As the area of the jack piston is large, the force exerted on the jack piston is large. However, the pump piston moves down more than the jack piston moves up. The work done by the pump piston equals the work done on the jack piston.

car braking system consists of a master cylinder and a series of slave cylinders. ● When the brake pedal is depressed pressure is transferred from the master cylinder to each slave cylinder.
● In a disc brake, a pair of brake pads acts on a spinning disc attached to the wheel. ● In a drum brake a drum rotates about a pair of brake shoes, each fitted with a lining. g

a

● The

●A

j jack piston k pump piston

2 Car’s hydraulic braking system

pressure = force area 2 Car’s hydraulic braking system g fluid reservoir h release valve i fluid returns to reservoir

h

b

c

b

d

a front view of disc brake on car’s front wheel b pistons c pads d slave cylinder e steel disc fitted to front wheels f piston (master cylinder) g pivot h effort i foot pedal j side view of drum brake on car’s rear wheel k pivot l piston (slave cylinder) m return spring n drum fitted to rear wheels o brake shoe p brake shoe lining

f j o

p

k n m l *01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 23

23

Lift pump and force pump FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words piston valve

1 Lift pump
Upstroke

Downstroke

1 Lift pump
●A

spout

spout

valve closed valve open piston

barrel

barrel

valve open valve closed atmospheric pressure 2 Force pump

lift pump must first be primed by pouring water above the piston to prevent air leaking past it.
● On the upstroke the piston valve closes and the pressure in the barrel falls. Atmospheric pressure acting on the surface of the water forces water up the pipe through the open valve into the barrel. Water above the piston pours out of the barrel through the spout. ● On the downstroke the valve at the base of the barrel closes and the valve in the piston opens. Water passes from below the piston to above it. The barrel above the piston fills, ready for the next upstroke.
● Atmospheric pressure can only support a column of water 10 metres high so this is the maximum theoretical distance there can be between the bottom of the barrel and the surface of the water.

2 Force pump

Upstroke

Downstroke spout spout

valve open valve closed reservoir piston barrel

air

valve open atmospheric pressure piston barrel valve closed reservoir

air

atmospheric pressure the upstroke the valve leading to the reservoir closes and the valve at the bottom of the barrel opens. This reduces the pressure in the barrel.
Atmospheric pressure acting on the surface of the water forces water through the open valve.
● On the downstroke the valve at the bottom of the barrel closes and the valve leading to the reservoir opens.
Water is forced into the reservoir and ultimately out through the spout.
● During a downstroke the air in the reservoir is compressed while on an upstroke it expands. This helps to keep a steady flow of water.
● A force pump can raise water more than 10 metres provided the base of the barrel is less than 10 metres from the surface of the water.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● On

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 24

24
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words adiabatic change combustion energy filament internal energy work Distinction between heat and work
1 Work

insulated jacket

insulated jacket

Falling weight causes paddle to heat water

Falling weight drives dynamo to heat water

1 Work
● Work

is the amount of energy transferred from one form into others.
● A suspended weight has potential energy. When it falls, potential energy is transferred to kinetic energy. Kinetic energy does work, resulting in the water being heated.

2 Heat

2 Heat

insulated jacket

insulated jacket

filament lamp or fuel combustion both release heat energy which can heat water. Work is not done because the energy is not transferred from one form to others; it simply moves from a region of high temperature to a region of low temperature.

●A

3 Adiabatic work an adiabatic process no heat enters or escapes a closed system.
● The change in the internal energy of a system, ⌬U, equals the sum of the energy entering the system by heating,
⌬Q, and the energy entering the system through work being done on it, ⌬W.
● For an adiabatic process ⌬Q = 0 therefore ⌬U = ⌬W.
● Any work done is equal to the increase in internal energy.
● Heating: work done by falling weight heats the enclosed system.
● Increasing electrical charge: work done by falling weight charges the electrical cell.
● Magnetization: work done by falling weight magnetizes the iron.
● Compression of a gas: if a gas is compressed in a perfectly insulated cylinder, the work done on the gas equals the increase in internal energy of the gas and the temperature of the gas rises. If the gas is then allowed to expand adiabatically, work is done at the expense of the internal energy and the temperature of the gas falls.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● In

3 Adiabatic work insulated jacket

insulated jacket

Heating

Compression of a gas

insulated jacket lump of iron insulated jacket electrical cell
Increasing electrical charge

Magnetization

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 25

25

Heat and temperature
1 Zeroth Law: defining temperature

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

2 Triple point cell

boiling point gas law melting point resistance temperature thermal equilibrium

d a c

C

C

thermocouple triple point vapor Wheatstone bridge b

A

B

A

B

g

f e a

1 Zeroth law: defining temperature ● When

a hot body and cold body are brought in contact, energy exchange appears to stop after a period of time.
The bodies are said to be in thermal equilibrium, and temperature is the common property they have.

a

If A and B are each in thermal equilibrium with C then items A and B are in thermal equilibrium with each other

b water layer c vapor d seal-off

a insulating material

e water f ice g thermometer bulb

2 Triple point cell
●

3 Constant-volume gas thermometer

4 Resistance thermometer

The triple point of water is the temperature (273.16 K and a pressure of 610 Pa) at which ice, water and water vapor exist in equilibrium.

i

P

h

Q

●

l

h

G m S

o

j

o

n p h mercury i dead space

l mica spacers m silica tube n mica

j gas k capillary

P1V1/T1=P2V2/T2
T = 273.16 x PT /PTP

o dummy leads p platinum wire

4 Resistance thermometer
●

5 Thermocouple thermometer q r s t

r

To find an unknown temperature, T, firstly find the pressure of the gas at the triple point, PTP, by placing the thermometer bulb in a triple-point cell. The pressure, PT, at the unknown temperature is determined while keeping the volume of the gas constant. Using the universal gas law—

reference junction test junction copper wire potentiometer t

The electrical resistance of pure platinum wire increases significantly between the melting point of ice (R0) and the boiling point of water (R100).
The thermometer is connected to a
Wheatstone bridge circuit. If P equals
Q then the resistance of the platinum wire RT at unknown temperature T equals that of S.
T = 100 x (RT–R0)/(R100–RT)°C.

s

5 Thermocouple thermometer s

●

G q If two metals are joined in a circuit with their junctions at different temperatures, a small e.m.f. whose size is related to the temperature difference is produced.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

k

3 Constant-volume gas thermometer *01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 26

26
FORCES AND ENERGY

Temperature scales

Key words absolute zero
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Kelvin scale

1 Fahrenheit

2 Celsius

3 Kelvin

°F

°C

K

212 °F

100 °C

373.16 K

Boiling point

1 Fahrenheit
Fahrenheit was devised at the start of the eighteen century. On this scale the ice point is 32˚ and the steam point 212˚. These figures arose because Fahrenheit did not use the ice point and steam fixed points but chose an unspecified ice/salt mixture for the lower fixed point, to which he gave the value 0˚, and human body temperature which was given the value
96˚.
● The Fahrenheit scale is still sometimes used in the context of weather but is only of historical interest in science.
● The

Freezing point of water
32 °F

0 °C

273.16 K

–459.67 °F

–273 °C

0

2 Celsius
● In

1742 the Swedish astronomer
Anders Celsius proposed a temperature scale in which ice melted at 0˚ and water boiled at 100˚. The
Celsius scale is widely used, sometimes being referred to as the centigrade scale since there are 100 degrees between the fixed points.
Temperatures on this scale are given in
‘degrees Celsius’, ˚C.
● One disadvantage of the Celsius scale is that temperatures below the freezing point of ice are negative.

3 Kelvin

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● In

1848 the physicist William Thomson
(later Lord Kelvin) suggested a temperature scale which started at the lowest theoretically possible temperature, absolute zero. This is known as the absolute or Kelvin temperature scale. Degrees on this scale are called kelvins and are denoted by K (not ˚K). A kelvin is exactly the same size as a Celsius degree i.e. 1 K = 1 ˚C.

Fahrenheit to Celsius and vice versa
5
°C = (°F –32) × —
9

9
°F = (°C × —) + 32
5

Kelvin to Celsius
1 K = 1 °C

°C = K –273

Absolute zero

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 27

27

Thermal conduction 1

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

1 Different conductors f c

b

nonmetal

g

Thermal conduction

d

a

conduction conductor electron insulation internal energy

conduction is the transfer of internal energy from particle to particle in matter.
● Metals are good thermal conductors.
They contain a ‘sea’ of free-moving electrons that are able to transfer heat quickly from one point to another.
● Non-metals are very poor conductors of heat and are used for thermal insulation. Insulators are used to prevent heat from travelling such as for the handles of pans.
● Thermal

e

a b c d e f g h aluminum brass glass iron copper thumb thuck wax heat

h

1 Different conductors
● Heat

2 Water conduction

n i j

j

l

m

k

3 Air conduction

2 Water conduction
● Liquids

o

o

is transferred along the rods by conduction. When the end of the rod heats up the wax melts and the thumb tuck falls. The thumb tack on the copper rod falls first showing that copper is the best thermal conductor.
The thumb tack attached to the glass rod takes much longer to fall off as glass is a poor thermal conductor.

i ice j boiling water k heat transfered by cinvection l very little heat transfered m gauze n steam o heat

and gases conduct heat but very slowly. Very little heat is transferred through water by conduction. ● When the water at the bottom of a test-tube is heated warm water rises by convection and melts an ice cube on the surface.
● When water at the top of a test-tube is heated it boils before sufficient heat is conducted through the water to melt the ice cube at the bottom of the testtube.

air space glass double-glazed window

3 Air conduction
● Air

is a very poor thermal conductor. It is for this reason that the air space or cavity between the outer and inner walls of a of a building and the air space between the layers of glass in double glazing help to keep the inside of the building warm in the winter and cool in the summer.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

glass

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 28

28
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words conduction gradient tangent temperature

thermal conductivity Thermal conduction 2
1 Temperature gradient lagged bar

unlagged bar
100°C

100°C

θ

1 Temperature gradient

θ

● Some

heat conducted through an unlagged bar is lost. The temperature gradient along the bar is therefore non-linear. A tangent to the curve gives the temperature gradient at that point. ● When the bar is lagged no heat is lost to the surroundings and the temperature gradient along the bar is linear. 2 Coefficient of thermal conductivity a

3 Effect on temperature gradient of insulators

θ + dθ
667
θ

Q

Q

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● In

order to achieve measurable heat flow the material is in the form of disc a few millimeter thick in a thick metal casing heated by steam.

333

dx

100°C

dQ = kA dq dx 0°C

e

f

4 Measuring k for a good conductor m k l

5 Measuring k for a poor conductor n o i

● Heat

5 Measuring k for a poor conductor b

100°C θ temperature drop is divided equally over the two thin layers of insulator and the long lagged bar.

should flow through the metal at a measurable rate and the temperature gradient along the metal must be sufficiently steep to measure.

d

3 Effect on temperature gradient of insulators

● The

4 Measuring k for a good conductor a

b

2 Coefficient of thermal conductivity

●

A thin slab has uniform cross-sectional area A, thickness L, and a small temperature difference (T1-T2) is maintained across. A small quantity of heat, dQ, passes through it by conduction in time t and its thermal conductivity is k. dQ=-k A t (T1-T2)/L
(Negative sign indicating that heat flows towards the lower temperature.) or k = dQ L / A t (T2-T1)
● Thermal conductivity, k, is the rate of heat flow through a material per unit area per unit temperature gradient.

c

x

r

p q j

r p g

a boiling water b mixture of ice and water c unlagged bar d lagging e lagged bar f thin layer of insulating material g lagging

h h i j k

copper bar steam in condensed steam out thermometers for measuring temperature gradient along length x of bar l temperature of water in m temperature of water out

n o p q r

steam in steam chamber heavy metal base layer of insulating material
Thermometers for measuring temperature gradient

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 29

29

Thermal radiation 1

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

1 Effect of surface on absorption electric heater dull black surface

shiny surface

absolute zero absorption frequency infrared radiation

thermal radiation vacuum wave

wax

Thermal radiation coin coin

wax

metal plate

● Thermal

radiation is the transfer of heat in the form of infrared waves.
● Bodies above absolute zero emit heat radiation whose frequency is determined by the body’s temperature. ● The transfer of heat radiation does not involve matter thus it can pass across a vacuum. 1 Effect of surface on absorption 2 Effect of surface on emission

●A

hot copper sheet highly polished surface

back of hand towards sheet

dull black surface

coin is attached to each metal plate with wax and an electric heater is placed between the plates ensuring each receives the same amount of radiation. The coin attached to the dull black surface falls first demonstrating that dull black surfaces are better absorbers of heat.

2 Effect of surface on emission ●A

copper sheet has one side highly polished and the other painted dull black. When the sheet is heated and the backs of the hands placed at equal distances from each side of it the back of the hand facing the dull black surface feels warmer demonstrating that dull black surfaces are better emitters of heat radiation.

3 Leslie’s cube

3 Leslie’s cube

matt color highly polished hot water

Radiant energy thermopile

Leslie’s cube

light color

Leslie compared the radiating powers of different surfaces using a hollow copper cube filled with hot water. One face was highly polished while the opposite face was made matt black by holding it above a candle flame. The remaining faces were painted in light and dark colors.
● The matt black surface emitted most of radiation, and the highly polished surface least. When comparing the sides painted different colors, the texture of the surface appeared to be more important than the color.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● John

dark color

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 30

30
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words electromotive force (e.m.f). galvanometer parabolic reflector pyrometer thermocouple thermopile potentiometer Thermal radiation 2
1 Reflection of thermal radiation 2 Differential thermometer c g

e

f

d

1 Reflection of thermal radiation parabolic reflector on a fire is highly polished. The heat radiation emitted by the element is reflected as a series of parallel rays.

● The

a b e f g h 2 Differential thermometer

heater black bulb white bulb mercury (or water)

● The

bulb painted matt black absorbs heat radiation more quickly. The air in this bulb expands more quickly causing a greater pressure in that side of the U tube.

3 Total radiation pyrometer pyrometer measures the temperature of very hot objects using the thermal radiation emitted.
● The radiation emitted by the source is focused onto the blackened foil to which a thermocouple is attached.
From the e.m.f. produced by the thermcouple, the temperature of the source can be calculated.

a b c d electrical heating element shiny reflecting surface protective guard shield to cut out direct radiant energy

3 Total radiation pyrometer

h

4 Thermopile

j

●A

i

k

r o m

p i q

s

l

4 Thermopile
● Heat

radiation absorbed by the blackened discs is warms the junctions of the wires attached to them and sets up an e.m.f. which can be measured either by a potentiometer or a galvanometer connected directly to the thermopile.

5 Disappearing filament pyrometer i radiation j blackened foil and thermocouple at principal focus k concave mirror l observation window m millivoltmeter to measure equilibrium temperature of foil

n o p q r s n

slit to let radiation in silver wire
Bismuth wire galvanometer blackened discs unblackened discs

5 Disappearing filament pyrometer t u

w

x

y

v

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Hot

bodies emit infrared, visible light and ultraviolet radiation. A disappearing filament optical pyrometer responds to light only.
● Light from the hot body and from a tungsten filament lamp pass through a red filter of a known wavelength. The current passing through the filament lamp is adjusted until it appears to be as bright as the light from the source.
The temperature is read from the ammeter, calibrated in K.

t hot body u tungsten filament coincides with image v red filter

A w objective lens x field lens y eye lens

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 31

31

Convection 1
1 Water circulation

FORCES AND ENERGY

2 Domestic water circulation h a

Key words convection density expansion b e Convection

c

● Convection

is the process by which energy is transferred by the bulk movement of a heated fluid (liquid or gas). When a fluid is heated it expands and its density becomes less than the surrounding unheated fluid. Less dense fluid rises and is replaced by denser cooler fluid.

d

f

1 Water circulation
● Potassium

a flask b water c potasium permanganate d flame

e cold water storage f hot water storage g boiler h cold water supply i hot water deliver 3 Smoke transference

4 Domestic smoke circulation

i g 2 Domestic water circulation ● When

the water in the boiler is heated it expands and rises, first to the top of the boiler and then into the top of the hot water cylinder. It is replaced by cooler water passing from the bottom of the hot water cylinder to the bottom of the boiler.
● There is a temperature gradient in the hot water cylinder. Hot water is tapped off from the top while replacement cold water passes into the bottom.

n

k

permanganate dissolves in water to give an intense purple solution. ● Heating the water immediately surrounding the potassium permanganate crystals causes it to expand and become less dense. The purple-coloured water rises and is replaced by cooler colorless water.

l k m

r

3 Smoke transference

p

k smoke l glass chimneys m box n smouldering paper o glass window p lighted candle

air above the candle expands and rises up the chimney to the left. This air is replaced by cooler air passing down the other chimney, drawing smoke down from the smouldering paper. The movement of air is seen by introducing smoke to the box.

o

4 Domestic smoke circulation q fire r hot air column

q

● Air

is drawn through a fire in order to replace the hot air from a fire which rises up the chimney.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 32

32
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words absorption conduction convection Dewar flask radiation vacuum vapor Convection 2
1 Day-night heat exchange

b c 1 Day–night heat exchange

sea breeze

a

● During

the day land heats up more quickly than sea resulting in a cool breeze—a sea breeze.
● During the night land loses heat more quickly resulting in a cool breeze from land to sea—a land breeze.

Day time a 2 Atmospheric heat exchange 3 Dewar flask
Dewar flask (vacuum flask) minimizes the transfer of thermal energy. ● The double-walled vessel is made of glass and the stopper of cork or plastic. These substances are all poor heat conductors.
● There is a vacuum between the inner and outer walls of the vessel, preventing convection currents. ● The inner surfaces of the double-walled vessel are silvered, reflecting back heat radiation to the contents of the vessel rather than losing it to the surroundings. Similarly, heat radiation from the surroundings is reflected away rather than being absorbed by the contents of the vessel.

a cold air b warm air c radiation from sun

Night time

2 Atmospheric heat exchange
Polar air meets tropical air

Warm air pushes polar air northward

d

f

f

e
Circulation starts

3 Dewar flask

●A

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

land breeze

b

● Differential

heating of the atmosphere causes the movement of air we call wind. ● Cold polar air falls as warm tropic air rises forming a polar front. Polar air cools down further as it is pushed north and convection currents form, circulating the air. A warm front leads tropic air and a cold front leads polar air. ● Air carries water vapor which condenses into tiny droplets forming clouds. When these droplets grow large enough they fall as rain.

c

c

q h g

s

r

t

u

d e f g h i j

polar air tropical air polar front cold front warm front cold air warm air

k nimbo-stratus l alto-stratus m cirro-stratus n cirrus o rain p pressure falling

Section through a depression l m

n

j

i q r s t u insulator stopper double-walled glass vessel vacuum silvering facing the vacuum hot liquid

o

i k 100 miles

p

500 miles

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 33

33

Energy changes 1

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

1 Striking a match

chemical energy combustion energy

stored CHEMICAL ENERGY in the match conversion by burning oxidation radiant HEAT ENERGY

LIGHT ENERGY

Energy changes
2 Cell lighting a filament lamp

● The

principal of conservation of energy states that energy can be neither created nor destroyed but only changes from one form to another.
● In an energy change work done equals the amount of energy changed.
● Energy is measured in joules (J) and kilojoules (kJ).

stored CHEMICAL ENERGY in the cell conversion in the cell
ELECTRICAL ENERGY conversion in the lamp filament

LIGHT ENERGY

radiant HEAT ENERGY

1 Striking a match energy ➞ Heat energy +
Light energy

● Chemical

● Chemical

energy, stored in fuels such as coal, gas and wood is released in a chemical reaction when fuel combines with oxygen. These are combustion reactions. 3 Driving a nail into a block of wood stored CHEMICAL ENERGY in your body you do work lifting hammer stored POTENTIAL ENERGY in the raised hammer

2 Cell lighting a filament lamp energy converted as the hammer falls

energy ➞ Electrical energy ➞
Heat energy + Light energy

● Chemical

KINETIC ENERGY of moving hammer hammer does work driving the nail into wood

SOUND ENERGY in the air

HEAT ENERGY in block, nail and hammer

● Chemical

energy is stored in cells.
Electrical energy results from a chemical reaction in the cell.

3 Driving a nail into a block of wood energy ➞ Potential energy ➞
Kinetic energy ➞ Heat energy + Sound energy ● Chemical

4 Winding a dynamo’s spring to light a lamp stored CHEMICAL ENERGY in your body

● Potential

stored POTENTIAL ENERGY in the strained spring conversion as the spring unwinds and ‘runs down’
KINETIC ENERGY of rotating pulley and rotor of dynamo

4 Winding a dynamo’s spring to light a lamp

conversion in the dynamo
HEAT ENERGY in pulley and dynamo bearings

ELECTRICAL ENERGY

energy ➞ Potential energy ➞
Kinetic energy ➞ Electrical energy ➞
Heat energy + Light energy

● Chemical

conversion in the lamp filament radiant HEAT ENERGY

● Energy

LIGHT ENERGY

is always lost in transfers, usually as heat. This is not usually shown in energy flow diagrams.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

you do work winding up the spring

and kinetic energy are types of mechanical energy. An object’s potential energy is the energy it has when above the ground.
● Kinetic energy is the energy possessed by a moving object. It is greater the faster the object moves.

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 34

34
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words battery chemical energy dynamo electrical energy energy exothermic power Energy changes all energy changes, some energy output does not do useful work. No energy change is 100% efficient.
● Power is the rate at which energy is transferred from one form to another.
● In

Power = Work done
Time taken

Energy changes 2
1 Electric motor raising a load

heat lost from battery

Potential energy = Weight x Vertical height above the ground
● Chemical energy ➞ Electrical energy
➞ Kinetic energy ➞ Potential energy

converted by the motor load lifted heat lost in the wires carryingelectric current

KINETIC ENERGY of moving parts

converted by the pulley and axle

heat lost in the bearings of rotating parts

POTENTIAL ENERGY of the raised load

2 Steam engine driving a dynamo steam engine

● The

work done raising the load is greater than the potential energy gained because some energy is lost as heat. ● If the raised load is released, gravity pulls it towards the ground. The opposite energy transfers then occur.

lamp stored CHEMICAL ENERGY in fuel

converted by burning or oxidation

HEAT ENERGY of pressurized steam

Potential energy ➞ Kinetic energy ➞
Electrical energy ➞ Chemical energy

The falling weight rotates the belt and pulley. These in turn rotate the motor which now acts as a dynamo. The electricity generated recharges the battery. 2 Steam engine driving a dynamo battery

ELECTRICAL ENERGY

1 Electric motor raising a load potential energy of an object relates to its weight and vertical height above the ground.

electric motor converted by the battery

Power is measured in
Js-1 = watts (W).

● The

belt and pulley stored CHEMICAL ENERGY in the battery

heat lost up the chimney

turbine

dynamo

converted in a turbine

KINETIC ENERGY of moving parts

heat lost in the wasted steam

converted in the dynamo

is an exothermic reaction thus heat is given out.

● Combustion

ELECTRICAL ENERGY

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

fuel + oxygen ➞ products + energy
● Heat

produced converts water to steam at raised pressure. This drives a turbine which drives a dynamo. The electricity produced lights a bulb.
● A more powerful steam engine produces more energy per unit time and therefore makes the bulb glow brighter. heat lost in the wires of the generator and in working against friction

converted by the lamp filament

LIGHT ENERGY

heat lost as radiant heat from the lamp

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 35

35

Energy production and distribution FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

Typical energy losses from the human body when seated (i.e. not active) (in %)

1 Human energy
Energy gains

Energy losses a

g

basal metabolic rate energy infrared respiration

b

1 Human energy

5%

● Energy

is produced in the cells of the body by the process of respiration.

f d 20%

glucose + oxygen ➞ carbon dioxide + water + energy
● The basal metabolic rate (BMR) is the

60%
15%
e h a b c d oxygen food input 10 to 20 MJ per day energy needed for doing work energy lost as heat

e f g h convection losses evaporation conduction to chair and floor infra-red radiation

2 Domestic energy

Losses

m

m i 25%
35%
l

i

10% l k
15%

15%

k

j
Energy losses from a typical house i through the walls j through the floor k through draughts l through the window m through the roof n central heating o hot water p electric lighting and domestic appliances q cooking
Losses

loft insulation cavity wall insulation double glazing carpeting draught excluders

● Buildings

o
10%
p
10%
5%
75%

prevention

the roof the walls the windows the floor draughts 2 Domestic energy

j

Uses

minimum amount of energy needed keep a person alive. It does not remain constant throughout a person’s life but changes with growth, development and aging. A new-born baby has a low
BMR, typically 100 kJ m-2 h-1. This rises to around 220 kJ m-2 h-1 at the age of one, when body growth is most rapid, and gradually declines to between 150 – 170 kJ m-2 h-1 in a young healthy adult. This translates to a total energy requirement per day of
6000 – 7500 kJ.
● The energy requirement of the body beyond BMR depends upon the level of activity of the person and the ambient temperature of the surroundings. ● The main source of heat loss from the body is heat (infrared) radiation.
● Heat is continually being lost in expelled air as this is always saturated with water vapor.

n
How energy is used in the home

q

in temperate climates are often heated to maintain a higher temperature than the surroundings.
Heat is lost from the building to the surroundings in a variety of ways.
● Energy losses can be prevented in a variety of ways.
● The vast majority of energy use in the average home goes on heating the rooms and on providing hot water for bathing. Relatively small amounts are used for lighting and electrical appliances, and for cooking.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

c

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 36

36
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words conductor convection insulation Reducing energy losses from houses
1 Roof house roof fibre glass

1 Roof
● Warm

air rises so heat losses through the top of a house are a particular problem. ● In attic insulation a layer of an insulating material is laid down between the rafters. Materials used have pockets of air trapped within them. Air is a very poor conductor of heat.

25% loss
2 Wall

ceiling

3 Floor

35% loss

rafter

15% loss

1

2 Wall
● Heat

passes from the inside to the outside of a wall by conduction. The air cavity between the inner and outer walls of a house reduces the amount of heat conducted to the outer walls.
● In cavity wall insulation, the cavity is filled with an insulating material. This reduces heat losses by conduction and prevents the formation of convection currents which transfer heat from the inner wall.

2

5

4

carpet

3 Floor

inner wall

● Heat

passes out of a house into the ground by conduction.
● Underlay and carpets are made of insulating materials which reduce heat losses through the floor.

underlay
3

floorboard

plastic foam

cavity

external wall

4 Window

ground

5 Draughts

4 Window
● Double-glazed

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

windows consist of two panes of glass separated by a layer of air. This reduces the amount of heat lost by conduction and also prevents the formation of convection currents which transfer heat from the outer surface of the inner pane of glass.

draught excluders

5 Draughts
● Warm

air is able to pass out of, and cold air to pass into a house through badly-fitting doors and windows.
● Draughts are reduced by fitting draught excluders around doors and windows. double glazing 10% loss

15% loss

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 37

37

Energy from the Sun

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

radiation from the Sun reaches the Earth at the rate
1.7 × 1017 W energy radiated back into space– degraded energy

energy fusion global warming mass normal

Energy from the Sun
● Energy

is produced on the Sun by nuclear fusion. Mass is converted to energy according to Einstein’s equation E = mc2

30% reflected back intospace energy = mass x speed of light in a vacuum2
● Every

second on the Sun, 700 million tonnes of hydrogen is converted to
695 million tonnes of helium. The remaining 5 million tonnes of mass is converted to energy.
● The mass of the Sun is 2.0 x 1030 kg therefore it could maintain its current rate of energy production for

47% absorbed and then radiated back into space

2.0 x 1030 / 5.0 x 106 = 4.0 x 1023 s ≈
1016 years.

23% evaporation and convection 0.2% produces convection currents in the oceans and atmosphere energy stored in rain clouds, lakes, glaciers, reservoirs, and rivers

wind and wave energy
(kinetic)

food and decay 0.02% photosynthesis chemical energy stored in plants– fossil fuel

solar constant is the solar energy falling per second on a square meter placed normal to the Sun’s rays at the edge of Earth’s atmosphere when
Earth is at its average distance from the Sun. Its value is 1.35 kW m-2.
● The actual amount of solar radiation falling at any point on the surface of
Earth depends on four factors. The amount of light falling on sunny regions near to the equator is greater than that falling on temperate regions nearer the poles. In temperate regions the amount of light varies with the season. More light falls on a region during the summer and less during the winter. The greater the height of a region above sea level the more light it will receive as less light is absorbed by the atmosphere. The higher the Sun is in the sky the greater the amount of light reaching the ground as less is absorbed by the atmosphere.
● Global warming is the result of less of the Sun’s energy being reflected and reradiated back into space. Many scientists attribute this to an increase of so called “greenhouse gases,” such as carbon dioxide and methane, in the upper atmosphere.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 38

38
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words electron n-type p-type parabolic reflector photovoltaic cell satellite solar panel

Solar energy devices
1 Solar furnace d a

c

1 Solar furnace
● In

a solar furnace, a heliostat (a large mirror which tracks the Sun) reflects the Sun’s rays onto a parabolic reflector formed of a number of plane mirrors. The parabolic reflector focuses the Sun’s rays onto a small space, producing a very high temperature. ● At the solar furnace at Odeillo in
France around 20,000 small plane mirrors are arranged to form a parabolic reflector of diameter 45 m.
● The furnace generates up to 1 MW with temperatures normally in the range 800–2,500˚C.

a suns rays b heliostat (large flat mirror that tracks the Sun) c parabolic reflector surface d solar radiation gathered here

b

2 Solar water heating h k

e

f

2 Solar water heating
● Water

is pumped through a network of pipes in a panel directed towards the
Sun. The pipes are made of copper, a good conductor of heat, and painted matt black to absorb the maximum amount of heat radiation.
● The hot water circulates through a heating coil in a tank where cold water is heated.

j

g

i

3 Solar cells

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Solar

cells or photovoltaic cells convert solar energy directly into electricity. ● These devices are made of layers of p– and n–type silicon. When light falls on the surface the energy frees loosely held electrons. This results in an e.m.f. between metal contacts on the top and bottom of the surfaces.
● For practical purposes solar cells are connected together to form solar panels. Such panels have been used widely to power satellites in space but their use on Earth has been limited by their high cost.

l e f g h

sunlight black heat absorbing surface insulation hot water

i j k l cold water transparent cover to domestic hot water system panel heat exchange

3 Solar cells m n

o

p m sunlight n n–type layer o p–type layer p e.m.f.

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 39

39

A typical power station

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

1 Typical power station

current dynamo energy generator magnet

p a o

potential difference power transformer turbine

1 Typical power station
● In

c

e

i

f

h

b

g

d a waste heat to atmosphere b cooling tower c pump d boiler

e f g h i

j

k

j water k condenser l cooling water m rotor n generator stator coils

steam generator high-pressure steam warm water low pressure steam turbine m

l

n

o step-up transformer p transmission lines

a power station heat is used to produce steam at high pressure. High pressure steam drives turbines which are connected to a generator.
● The generator is essentially a massive dynamo. A magnet at the center of the generator rotates inducing an electric current in the coils of wire which surround it.
● A large power station generates electricity at 25,000 V If electricity was
.
transmitted at this potential difference the losses due to heat as it passed down the lines would be considerable.
● The energy lost rises as the square of the current so reducing the current reduces the energy losses considerably. ● Electrical power is equal to the product of the current and potential difference. power = current x potential difference

2 Energy conversions in a power station

primary energy source
OUTPUT:
30 units of electricity furnace or reactor core

steam generator heat q electrical energy potential energy 15 units of energy lost as heat escapes generator r

steam turbine t

2 Energy conversions in a power station s kinetic energy more heat loss occurs in wires in the generator transformer and transmission lines q thermal energy produced by burning or nuclear reaction r thermal energy used to produce steam at high pressure

friction converts mechanical energy into wasted heat

50 units of energy lost in the cooling water as heat

s steam used to drive turbines t generator converts mechanical energy into electrical energy

● Some

energy is “lost” during each energy transfer, mainly as low-level heat. The energy is lost in the sense that it doesn’t do useful work.
● Efficiency is the ratio of useful output energy to input energy. The overall efficiency of the power station is given by efficiency =
30 units of electrical energy x 100%
100 units of fuel energy
= 30%

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

INPUT:
100 units of coal, oil or uranium a step-up transformer the current is reduced while potential difference is increased proportionally. The power input and power output remain essentially the same. The resulting output from the step-up transformer has a potential difference of 400,000 V but a much reduced current which reduces energy losses in the lines.

● In

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 40

40
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words energy fossil fuel isotope Non-renewable energy sources 1 Coal
Open cast

Drift

Shafts

Non-renewable energy resources energy sources such as coal, natural gas, crude oil (fossil fuels) and uranium (nuclear fuel) are not renewed by natural processes over a short time scale.
● Fossil fuels were formed over many millions of years from plants and animals. ● Non-renewable

2 Oil and gas

1 Coal
● Drift

mines: coal seams run to the surface, coal is easy to remove.
● Open cast mines: coal seams are near the surface. Overlying layers are removed to expose the coal.
● Shaft mines: coal seams lie deep in the ground. 2 Oil and gas

oil extraction on land

oil extraction at sea

● Oil

and natural gas are trapped in porous rock beneath impermeable rock. If rocks are folded by natural processes, oil and gas become concentrated at the peak of the fold.

folded rock

3 Nuclear

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Although

nuclear fuels are nonrenewable, amounts used are relatively small compared to fossil fuels and reserves are likely to last much longer.
● The most common fuel is an isotope of uranium, uranium U-235. This isotope only forms 0.7% of naturally occurring uranium. For a viable fuel, this percentage is increased to around
2.5% by enrichment.
● The fuel for fast breeder reactors is plutonium. The reactor is surrounded by a blanket of uranium. Neutrons escaping from the core of the reactor convert uranium to plutonium enabling the reactor to breed, or produce more of its own fuel.

gas extraction on land

gas extraction at sea

3 Nuclear

enrichment

uranium

uranium pitch blend

tailing

gas

fuel rod

centrifugal extraction *01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 41

41

Renewable energy sources 1 Water

Sun’s heat

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words aquifer biogas convection energy geothermal energy

water flow warm air rises

precipitation

gravity hydroelectric plant turbine Renewable energy sources energy sources are those which are renewed by natural sources.
They include solar-powered devices, flowing water, tides, waves, wind, geothermal aquifers, geothermal hot dry rock structures and biogas generators. ● Renewable

1 Water
● The

2 Wind

hot suns rays

rising hot air cool air

descending cool air

continuous movement of water between Earth and the atmosphere gives rise to the water cycle.
● Water that falls on high ground has potential energy. As the water flows down towards the sea the energy can be used in a variety of ways including generating electricity in hydroelectric plants. 2 Wind
● Heat

3 Tide

Moon’s orbit

Moon’s orbit

Moon

Earth

Earth

Moon

is transferred through the atmosphere by convection currents.
● When air is warmed it expands, becomes less dense and rises, creating a region of low pressure on Earth’s surface. In turn, cooler air falls to take its place creating an area of high pressure. ● Wind is air that moves from regions of high pressure to regions of low pressure. Wind has kinetic energy which can be used to drive windmills and wind turbines.

3 Tide gravitational attraction of the
Moon pulls on that part of Earth’s surface which is closest to it. This causes a slight distortion in the land mass but the main effect is pulling the oceans out in a bulge in the direction of the Moon and in the opposite direction on the far side of Earth.
● The result is high and low tides. Water at high tide has potential energy which can be used to generate electricity.

high tide

low tide

low tide

high tide

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 42

42
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words condenser energy generator turbine vaporization Alternative energy sources 1
1 Wind energy meters 100 a b c d

90

1 Wind energy
● Modern

wind technology led to the construction of wind turbines which are specially designed to generate electricity from the kinetic energy of the wind.
● To operate successfully, wind turbines must be placed in areas where the wind often blows and the average wind speed is high.

80

typical traditional windmill large horizontal axis wind turbine large vertical axis wind-turbine (concept) extra large vertical axis wind-turbine (concept)

70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0

2 Ocean thermal energy conversion a

c

b

d

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Tropical

seas absorb huge amounts of solar radiation. Ocean Thermal Energy
Conversion (OTEC) uses this energy to generate electricity.
● OTEC makes use of the difference between the warm surface of the ocean and the cold water at depths below 600 metres. Provided there is a minimum temperature difference of around 20˚C net power can be generated. ● In a closed-cycle system heat from warm surface sea water causes a working fluid (such as ammonia) to boil and become a gas. The resulting increase in pressure drives a turbine attached to a generator. Cold sea water passes through a condenser converting ammonia gas back to liquid which is then recycled through the system. ● In an open-cycle system the warm water itself is the working fluid. Water at the surface vaporizes in a near vacuum providing the pressure increase needed to drive a turbine.
The vapor is condensed by cold sea water. The fresh water produced can be used for drinking, irrigation or aquaculture. 3 Hydroelectric
● In

a hydroelectric plant the kinetic energy of flowing water turns a turbine which is connected to a generator and electricity is produced.

2 Ocean thermal energy conversion (OTEC)

3 Hydroelectric e meters
0

f g 26.5°C

25°C

200

h

power transmission line

i
400

4°C

j

4°C

k

600

l anchor e f g h dam reservoir control gate penstock i j k l transformer generator turbine outflow *01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 43

43

Alternative energy sources 2

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words energy generator pressure tidal energy turbine 1 Tidal energy a b

c

f

a high basin b low basin c upper level

d lower level e turbines f tidal range

1 Tidal energy
● The

first and, to date, the world’s only large-scale tidal barrage was built between 1961 and 1966 across the estuary of the Rance river in France.
● Tides rise and fall and different times of the day. As a tide rises, the level of water in the high basin rises. At high tide all gates are closed trapping the sea water behind the barrage.
● At low tide the water level in the high basin is higher than the water level in the low basin. The water trapped in the high basin has potential energy. It is allowed to flow out through turbine generators which are driven by the moving water to produce electricity.

c

d

d

e

2 Wave energy

i i g

g

2 Wave energy

h

h

j

j g rocking boom h wave

● Rocking

booms are strung offshore where they are kept in continual motion by the waves. As the waves rise and fall the boom is rocked up and down and this motion is used to generate electricity.

i rocking motion j balancing float

3 Tidal swell

k

3 Tidal swell

m

k turbine generator l air chamber m sea movement n air turbine

m

l

n

wave-driven device is built in a natural rock gulley on the coast so that the waves are channelled into it.
● As the wave rolls in, the water level inside the chamber rises and air is forced upwards and out through the turbine generator.
● As the water level falls, the air pressure inside the chamber drops and, due to atmospheric pressure, air is forced in through the turbine generator.
● The turbine is a special design called a
Wells turbine which can extract energy from the air stream no matter in which direction it flows so electricity is generated both as the water level rises and falls.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

l

*01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 44

44
FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words absorption aquifer biogas energy evaporation fermentation geothermal energy heat pump

1 Geothermal energy
● In

some parts of the world there are very hot rocks quite near to the surface. When rain permeates down into the rocks it is heated and forms a geothermal aquifer.
● Heat energy is also extracted from geothermal hot rock structures which lie deeper in the ground. Two wells are drilled into the rocks terminating several hundred meters apart. Cold water is piped down one of the wells and is heated as it passes through the hot rocks. The resulting hot water rises to the surface through the second well.

Alternative energy sources 3
1 Geothermal energy unit b a b c d e f g h expansion tank flow control valve heat exchange cold water hot water permeable rock cold water down hot water up

a e c d 200 to
300m

g

h

f

2 Domestic heat pump
2 Domestic heat pump
● Refrigerators

and air conditioning units are basically heat pumps which transfer heat energy from one place to another. Heat pumps can be used both for cooling and for heating.
● A heat pump consists of a closed system containing a volatile substance which changes phase between being a liquid and a gas.
● The compressor pump compresses the gas, converting it to a liquid as it passes into the house. This change of state releases energy that warms the inside of the house. When the liquid passes back out of the house it evaporates to become a gas. This change of state requires energy that is absorbed from the surroundings. The net effect transfers heat energy from outside to inside the house.

j

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

k

m

l i i outside j inside k house wall l fan m evaporator n condenser o compressor pump p electrical energy

p

l

3 Biogas unit

3 Biogas unit a biogas unit, a slurry of animal manure and water is fermented to release biogas. The main constituent of biogas is methane which is used as a fuel for cooking and heating. The residue which remains provides a useful fertiliser for improving plant growth. n

s

o

t

q

● In

q r s t u

manure and water manure slurry stirrer methane fertilizer u r *01 Forces&Energy (8-45).qxd

12/11/08

2:10 PM

Page 45

45

Nuclear energy
1 Nuclear fission

FORCES AND ENERGY
Key words

2 Controlling a chain reaction

a

chain reaction control rod fission moderator neutron m

b k k

l

k

nuclear energy nuclide 1 Nuclear fission
● Nuclear

c j i

d

v

f

l

i thermal neutrons from another fuel rod j thermal neutrons to another fuel rod k fuel rod l moderator (eg graphite) m control rod which can be raised or lowered

e a b c d

neutron uranium nucleus unstable nucleus fission fragments, eg krypton and barium e neutrons f gamma–radiation

2 Chain reaction
● The

three neutrons released can cause the fission of three more uranium-235 nuclei releasing nine neutrons. These, in turn, can cause the fission of nine more uranium-235 nuclei and so on.
This chain reaction is controlled in a nuclear reactor by limiting the number of neutrons

4 Advanced gas-cooled reactor n o

x

w

w

v

3 Chain reaction g u

g

s

h g g p h g g

q

q

r

n Reactor core up to 1500°C o CO2 coolant p concrete pressure and radiation shield q 15000 graphite bricks locked together r gas circulating pumps s water t steam generator u steam at 650°C and 40 atm pressure v flow of coolant w boron steel control rods x uranium fuel rods

order to increase the chances that neutrons will cause the fission of uranium-235 nuclei they are slowed by a moderator.
● Control rods, suspended between the fuel rods, can be raised or lowered as needed to control the nuclear reaction. They are made of alloys such as boron steel that absorb neutrons.
When they are lowered more neutrons are absorbed, slowing the chain reaction. 4 Advanced gas–cooled reactor ● Temperature

is controlled in an advanced gas-cooled reactor by circulating carbon dioxide gas. Heat is removed in heat exchangers which convert water into high-pressure steam. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

t

g

g neutron h fission of uranium nucleus

3 Controlling a chain reaction ● In

h

h

energy results from nuclear fission of large unstable nuclides like uranium-235. ● Uranium-235 undergoes spontaneous fission, but in a nuclear power station the fission occurs by bombarding the uranium nuclei with neutrons. When hit by a slow-moving neutron, the unstable nucleus breaks into two smaller nuclei of similar size and three neutrons are released. The combined mass of the products is slightly less than the reactants; some mass is converted to energy.

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 46

46
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words compression longitudinal wave rarefaction transverse wave wave wavelength

Waves
● Waves

may be classified as transverse or longitudinal depending on the direction of displacement. Both types of wave can conveniently be shown using a slinky spring.

Describing waves
1 Transverse waves
Vibration and direction of the wave vibration of source producing the wave

direction of travel of the wave

Demonstrating a transverse wave in a slinky spring hand moved side to side

slinky spring

Displacement of the particles if the wave is transverse

1 Transverse waves a transverse wave the displacement is at right angles to the direction in which the wave is traveling.
● A transverse wave produces a series of crests and troughs as the wave form is repeated in a regular cycle. The wavelength of the wave, denoted by the symbol ␭, is the horizontal distance from any point on the cycle to the analogous point on the next cycle. This is often conveniently taken as the distance from one crest to the next. Altering the size of the crests and troughs does not alter the wavelength of the wave.
● Light is an example of a transverse wave form.
● In

crest

trough
Graphical plot λ = wavelength

2 Longitudinal waves a longitudinal wave the displacement is in the same direction as the direction in which the wave is traveling. ● A longitudinal wave produces a series of rarefactions and compressions as the wave causes particles to move closer together or further apart in a regular cycle. The wavelength of the wave (␭) is the horizontal distance from any point on the cycle to the analogous point on the next cycle.
This is often conveniently taken as the distance from one compression to the next. ● Sound is an example of a longitudinal wave form.

λ

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● In

2 Longitudinal waves
Vibration and direction of the wave direction of travel of the wave vibration of source producing the wave
Demonstrating a longitudinal wave in a slinky spring slinky spring

compression of the spring

hand gives spring a pulse
Displacement of the particles if the wave is longitudinal rarefaction compression

rarefaction

λ

compression

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 47

47

Huygen’s construction 1

Key words

1 Relationship between wave fronts and waves
Spherical wave fronts from a point source S

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT

phase tangent wave

ray

1 Relationship between wave fronts and waves wave front is a line or a surface in which all points are in the same phase.
● A point source generates circular wave fronts while a line source generates straight wave fronts. The distance between adjacent wave fronts corresponds with the wavelength. A line at right angles to a wave front which indicates its direction of travel is called a ray.
●A

ray

ray
S

direction of wave

wave fronts

ray

● Huygens

ray

direction of wave

wave front

wave fronts

2 Huygen’s construction for a plane progressive wave new wave front at time t later
(v = velocity of wave)

secondary sources

secondary wave vt proposed a construction which can be used to explain reflection, refraction and dispersion of waves. ● This proposal was based on the idea that every point on a wave front could be regarded as a source of secondary waves which would spread out with the same velocity as the wave itself.
● A new wave front could therefore be considered to be the common tangent of a set of secondary waves. Since all the secondary waves travel at the same speed, this tangent would be parallel to the original wave.
● This construction implies that waves should also travel in the opposite direction i.e. backwards. This does not occur in practice. The assumption is made that the amplitude of the secondary waves varies from a maximum in the direction of travel to zero in the opposite direction.
© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Plane wavefronts from a broad source

wave front

2 Huygen’s construction for a plane progressive wave *02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 48

48
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words angle of incidence normal radius reflection

Huygen’s construction 2
1 Reflection

refractive index tangent wave wavelength B

A
´

1 Reflection
Wave front AB approaches the reflecting surface obliquely. A touches at A, B at B'.
● Draw an arc (radius BB') centered on
A; draw the tangent to this arc from B' touching the arc at A'. A is reflected in the direction AA'.
● In triangles AA'B' and ABB' angle AA'B'
= angle ABB' = 90°; AB' is a common side; AA' = BB'.
● As the triangles are congruent, the angles made by the incident wave front and the reflected wave front with the reflecting surface are the same— angle BAB' = angle A'B'A.
● Wave front is at right angles to its associated ray so angle of incidence, i, equals angle of reflection, r.
●

2 Refraction
●

Wave front AB approaches the boundary between two media. Velocity in 1 is v1; in 2, v2. After t seconds, wave front is at A'B'.
● If v1 > v2 the refracted ray is bent towards the normal as shown. If v1 < v2 the refracted ray is bent away from the normal.
● In the triangles BAB' and A'AB' sin i1/sin i2 = sin BAB'/sin A'B'A =
BB'/AB'÷AA'/AB' = BB' / AA' = v1t / v2t. Therefore sin i1/sin i2 = v1/v2.
As v1 and v2 are constant for given

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

media and wavelength, sin i1/sin i2 is also constant. Angle i2
(angle of refraction) is normally represented by r. sin i /sin r = refractive index. (constant, depending on media)

i

r r i

surface
A

B´

2 Refraction
B

i1

incident wave front i1 boundary between media

i2

A

i2

refracted wave front

A
´

secondary wave front from A

3 Optical dispersion white light

boundary between air and glass

3 Optical dispersion
●

The value of v1/v2 differs for different wavelengths (colors).
● White light is a mixture of different wavelengths. When passing between mediums, each wavelength is refracted by a different amount, dispersing into separate colors.

blue wave front red wave front

B´

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 49

49

The principle of superposition 1
1 Reinforcement

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words interference phase principle of superposition wave

2 Cancellation

slinky spring

Superposition
●

A slinky spring is used to show how waves affect each other.

The pulses meet and cancel out

1 Reinforcement

The pulses meet

●

The pulses pass through each other

3 Addition of two waves

+

A

B

Displacement

+

=

lines joining points of destructive interference

●

trough

●

B

S1
B

A

Displacement

S2

trough meets crest crest meets crest trough meets trough

A wave’s upward displacement is regarded as positive, downward as negative. When adding two waves
(1 and 2) the displacement at any point (3) is the sum of the displacements of the two waves at that point. 4 Interference

A

Distance

When the crest of one wave coincides with the trough of the other, they are out of phase and cancel each other out. The result is a straight line if the crest and the trough are of equal sizes.

3 Addition of two waves

crest

lines joining points of constructive interference

Distance

3

2 Cancellation

4 Interference

1

2

Two equally shaped but opposite pulses

=

An interference pattern forms when peaks and troughs of circular waves formed by point sources (such as S1 and S2) combine.
● Constructive interference occurs where the waves are in phase with each other. The waves reinforce each other forming peaks which are the sum of the peaks of the waves, and troughs which are sum of the troughs.
● Destructive interference occurs where the two waves are out of phase with each other. The peak of one wave coincides with the trough of another, canceling both out.
● Lines connecting points of constructive interference (B) and points of destructive interference (A) form an alternating sequence in the interference pattern.
●

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Two pulses traveling toward each other

When the crest of one wave coincides with another, they reinforce each other—they are in phase. The resulting single crest is the sum of the two crests.

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 50

50
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words amplitude cathode ray oscilloscope frequency
Lissajous figures phase potential difference principle of superposition simple harmonic motion sine wave

The principle of superposition 2
1 Addition of sine waves with perpendicular axes

1 Addition of sine waves with perpendicular axes
● The

effect of combining two sinusoidal waves of the same frequency and amplitude can be observed by applying two sinusoidal potential differences to the X-plates and Y-plates of a cathode ray oscilloscope.
● The electron beam is thus subjected to two mutually perpendicular simple harmonic motions and the shape of the trace produced on the screen depends on the phase difference between the potential differences.
● In general the resulting trace is an ellipse except when the phase difference is 0˚, 90˚ and 180˚.
● When two potential differences of different frequencies are applied to the
X-plates and Y-plates more complex figures, known as Lissajous figures, are obtained. The phase difference between the waves increases by

2 How sine waves add to form an ellipse
● The

3-dimensional structures of the sine waves combine to give a 2dimensional elliptical shape.

2 How sine waves add to form an ellipse

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

y

z x π
4

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 51

51

The principle of superposition 3
Formation of complex wave forms by addition of two or more waves (resulting wave shown in green)
11First example
First example

2 Second example

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words amplitude frequency phase principle of superposition wave

Formation of complex wave forms
● The

superposition of two or more waves results from combining the amplitudes of waves at each point.

1 First example
● When

two waves of the same frequency are combined in phase the resultant wave has a larger amplitude than either of the contributing waves.

Two waves, same frequency, different amplitude

Three waves of different frequencies, amplitudes and phases

3 Third example

4 Fourth example

2 Second example
● Mixtures

of waves of different frequencies and wavelengths result in complex wave patterns.

3 Third example
● When

two waves of the same amplitude whose frequencies are in the ratio 2:1 are combined, a stepped wave corresponding to the two frequencies is formed.

4 Fourth example
● If

the phase of the waves is changed the overall wave pattern also changes however, the contribution of each wave can still be seen.

Two waves, same amplitude, frequency in ratio 2:1

Two waves, same amplitude, frequency in ratio 2:1, but different phase

5 Fifth example
● When

5 Fifth example

6 Sixth example

two waves, one of high frequency and one of low frequency, are combined the resulting wave has the low frequency wave structure with the high frequency wave pattern superimposed on it in place of the smooth curve.

● Combining

two similar waves of the same frequency which are only slightly out of phase forms a wave showing a regular pattern of changing amplitude which gradually changes between maximum and minimum values.

Two waves, high frequency and low frequency

Two waves of very nearly the same frequency

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

6 Sixth example

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 52

52
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words amplitude harmonic node oscillation stationary wave

stroboscope transverse wave

1 Apparatus to produce stationary waves

Stationary waves
1 Apparatus to produce stationary waves clamp 2 ‘Stroboscopic’ view of stationary waves– showing 5 different positions of the vibrating cord
A

the frequency with which the cord is moved up and down is slowly increased at certain frequencies one or more high amplitude vibrating loops is formed. These are called standing waves or stationary waves—wave form appears to be frozen and does not move along the spring in either direction. ● Points on the stationary wave where displacement is zero are called nodes and denoted by N.
● Within one loop all particles oscillate in phase but with different amplitudes. Points on the stationary wave where there is maximum displacement are called antinodes and denoted by A.
● The frequency of the stationary wave and the progressive wave is the same and the wavelength is twice the distance between successive nodes or antinodes. ● Increasing the number of nodes and antinodes by one each time provides a series of harmonics.

to signal generator 2
3
4
Foundamental mode

5
A

N

A

N

1st harmonic

N

A

N
1
2
3
4
5

5
4
3
2
1

2 “Stroboscopic” view of stationary waves
● If

vibrator

1

● When

one end of a rubber cord is fixed and the other is moved up and down at regular intervals, using an electrical vibrator, two progressive trains of transverse waves travel along the cord in opposite directions.

0.5m→1m stretched rubber cord

N

2nd harmonic

A
5
4
3
2
1

N

A
1
2
3
4
5

N

N antinodes
A nodes

3 Formation of stationary waves
Waves in phase

Waves in phase

Waves in anti-phase

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

3 Formation of stationary waves ● When

the trains of waves are completely in phase the result is a stationary wave with maximum amplitude equal to twice the amplitude of the progressive wave.
● When the trains of waves are completely out of phase (anti-phase) the result is a stationary wave of zero amplitude at all i.e. a straight line.

Waves in anti-phase

wave moving to the right reflected wave moving to the left

resultant standing wave

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 53

53

Sound waves 1

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Production of a sound wave

longitudinal wave molecule transverse wave vacuum T= 0

original position of prong

2

1
1

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4

5

6

7

8

9

5

6

7

8

9

6

7

8

9

7

8

9

8

9

1

2

1

2
1

2
1

Time

3
3

2

1

3
2

1

4
3

2
1

1

4

2

6

5
4

3

5

4
3

4

6

5

3
2

5

4
3

2
1

4

6
5

5

7

8

7
6

6

7

8

is a longitudinal wave form which can travel through solids, liquids, and gases, but not through a vacuum. It travels fastest through solids and slowest through gases and its speed depends on temperature.

● Sound

material air water steel Temperature
(°C)
0
20
40

9

8

7

Sound waves

9
9

sequence of displacements of air molecules

1 Production of a sound wave 2 Displacement of air molecules forming a wave

Displacement

●

Distance

2 Displacement of air molecules forming a wave

(left)

●

Pressure

3 Pressure changes

Sound is represented as a transverse wave whose displacement is perpendicular to the its direction of motion. 3 Pressure changes
●

4 Displacement of individual air molecule
Displacement

A vibrating prong displaces adjacent air molecules, which transfer the motion to others, forming regular regions of compression and rarefaction which creates a sound wave which passes through the air.

Distance

Pressure increases where air molecules crowd together in regions of compression. Pressure decreases in regions of rarefaction.

4 Displacement of individual air molecule
●

Time

As a wave passes, air molecules are displaced in one direction and then in the other. A graph of this displacement against time forms a regular transverse wave form.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

(right)

speed of sound
(m/s at 0°C)
331.5
1437
5000
Speed of sound in air (m/s)
331.5
344.0
356.2

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 54

54
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words amplitude beat frequency longitudinal wave node principle of superposition resonance stationary wave

1 Demonstrating rarefaction and compression regions

Sound waves 2
1 Demonstrating rarefaction and compression regions in a stationary sound wave card cone
100 ml measuring cylinder

Lycopodium powder

● Stationary

2 Displacement and pressure graphs
● In

a stationary longitudinal wave the maximum pressure variation occurs at a displacement node and is zero at a displacement antinode—i.e. displacement nodes correspond with pressure antinodes and vice versa.

loudspeaker to signal generator
(1W output, 3kHz)

2 Displacement and pressure graphs for a stationary sound wave antinode node

Distance

b a d e Distance

displacement-distance curves when the displacements are greatest

c e corresponding pressure-distance curves d

b

line of normal pressure

3 Formation of beats

Time

f1

Resultant displacement

● Beats

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

c

left

3 Formation of beats occur when two notes of slightly different frequencies but similar amplitude sound together. Beat frequency is the difference in frequency between the two notes.
Beat period is its reciprocal.
● Superposition of the waves can explain beats. Sound is loudest when the waves are almost completely in phase, and quietest when the waves are almost completely out of phase.

a

Pressure

Displacement

right

Displacement

sound waves can be obtained in air using Kundt's tube—a calibrated tube sealed at one end with a small loudspeaker at the other end.
● The speaker produces progressive longitudinal waves which travel the length of the tube. These waves are reflected back in the opposite direction and interfere with the incident waves.
● The frequency of the sound is varied until it equals the natural frequency of vibration of the air column in the tube; resonance occurs as a standing wave forms in the tube. This is displayed using lycopodium powder, which swirls away from the antinodes, where the air particles are vibrating most strongly and forms heaps at the nodes.

f2

Time

best period = (f1 – f2)–1

resultant amplitude

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 55

55

Sound waves 3
1 Tuning fork

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

A

A

frequency phase principle of superposition wave

prongs

1 Tuning fork
● When

a tuning fork is struck the prongs vibrate at a fixed predetermined frequency. The simultaneous vibrations produced by the prongs can be used to demonstrate how waves superimpose.

2 Spread of sound from a vibrating tuning fork

2 Spread of sound from a vibrating tuning fork

y

rarefaction compression D

A

x

x'

A

A

C

B y' the prongs are moving away from each other a rarefaction is produced in the air particles between them. This rarefaction travels in the direction Y and Y’. Simultaneously, compressions are produced outside the prongs and these travel in the directions X and X’.
● When the prongs are moving towards each other a compression is produced in the air particles between them. This compression travels in the direction Y and Y’. Simultaneously, rarefactions are produced outside the prongs and these travel in the directions X and X’.
● Whenever a rarefaction or compression occurs in the directions Y and Y’, the opposite occurs in the directions X and X’. The rarefactions and compressions spread out from the tuning fork as spherical waves and destructive interference occurs along the lines A, B, C and D.
● If the tuning fork is held upright close to the ear and slowly rotated about a vertical axis, the sound is lost four times in each revolution. This corresponds to when the tuning fork is in positions A, B, C and D, where the two waves are out of phase and cancel each other out.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 56

56
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words angle of incidence diffraction frequency interference

phase reflection refraction stroboscope wave

Water waves lamp 1 Ripple tank

sperical dippers just touching water surface water (5 mm deep)

elastic band low voltage motor

1 Ripple tank
● Wave

behavior can be studied by observing water waves in a ripple tank—a shallow tank of water. Regular vibrations are produced using a low voltage motor attached to a wooden beam. The beam can make straight waves and, by attaching dippers, curved waves.
● The wave patterns can be “frozen” using a stroboscopic light so they can be observed and measured more easily. vibrator white screen

2 Reflected straight waves

2 Reflected straight waves

3 Reflected curved waves

barrier

● Straight

waves are reflected by a barrier. The angle of incidence equals the angle of reflection. The frequency of the incident and reflected waves is the same.

3 Reflected curved waves

barrier

● The

curvature of curved waves is reversed on reflection by a straight barrier, their frequency is unchanged.

4 Refracted waves

4 Refracted waves

peak

● When

water waves pass into shallower water they are refracted.

trough

5 Interference
● Interference

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

patterns can be formed using a pair of dippers to produce circular waves of the same frequency simultaneously. The pattern shows regions of constructive interference, where the waves are completely in phase, and regions of destructive interference where the waves are completely out of phase.

6 Diffraction
● Waves

spread on passing through an opening or around an object. This is called diffraction.
● Maximum diffraction occurs when waves pass through a gap whose size equals the wavelength of the waves.

5 Interference

submerged

6 Diffraction

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 57

57

Seismic waves 1

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 P wave compression longitudinal wave pendulum Richter scale

particle motion

rarefraction

seismic wave transverse wave

Seismic waves
● Seismic

waves are vibrations caused by movement inside Earth which manifests itself as an earthquake.
There are two types of seismic waves.

1 P wave
(primary) waves are longitudinal waves which shake the ground in the direction that the wave is traveling.
Their speed depends on the nature of the rock through which they are traveling. A typical value is 6 km/s.

●P

travel direction

2 S wave

trough

(shear) waves are transverse waves which shake the ground in directions perpendicular to the direction of travel. S waves travel more slowly than
P waves. A typical value is 4 km/s.

●S

travel direction

3 Seismograph

pendulum bob

seismogram

3 Seismograph
● Earthquakes

are recorded on a seismograph. When the ground shakes the base and frame of the instrument move with it, but the pendulum bob, due to its high inertia, does not.
Movement is recorded as seismogram.
● Earthquake severity is measured on the logarithmic Richter scale. A magnitude 5 earthquake is thus ten times more severe than a magnitude 4 earthquake. Richter
Comment
scale
<3.5
Recorded by seismograms, not usually felt
3.5–5.5
Felt, little structural damage 5.6–6.0
Causes slight to moderate damage to buildings over a small area.
6.1–7.0
Some destruction in areas up to 100 km from the earthquake center
7.1–7.9
Major damage over a large area extending beyond 100 km from earthquake center
>8.0
Severe damage over area several hundred km from earthquake center

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

crest

particle motion

2 S wave

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 58

58

epicenter radius 1 Estimating distance from earthquake’s epicenter
● The

ratio between the average speed of a P wave and its following S wave is reasonably constant. It enables seismologists to estimate the distance to an earthquake from an observation station. ● The further an observation post is from the epicenter of an earthquake, the longer the time gap between the arrival of P waves and then S waves.
● Taking typical values of 6 km/s for
P waves and 4 km/s for S waves, the distance from an observation station to the epicenter is given by:
Distance (km) = time between the arrival of P waves and S waves x 12
● The

distance to the epicenter can also be estimated from a graph of time difference against distance.

2 Estimating position of earthquake’s epicenter

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

time gap between the arrival of
P waves and S waves at an observation station indicates that the epicenter of an earthquake is at a distance d kilometers from station but gives no information about its direction. The epicenter of the earthquake could lie anywhere on a circle radius d from the observation station.
● In order to fix the position of the epicenter of an earthquake it is necessary to use information from three observation stations. If a circle is drawn from each observation station at a radius corresponding to the distance from the epicenter its position is at the point where the circles intersect.

1 Estimating distance from earthquake’s epicenter
25
Time since earthquake/minutes

Key words

Seismic waves 2
20
S waves
P waves time gap

15

10

5

0

0

2000

4000
6000
Distance from earthquake/km

8000

10000

250
Time gap between receiving P waves and S waves/seconds

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT

200

150

100

50

0

0

500

1000
1500
2000
Distance from earthquake/km

2 Estimating position of earthquake’s epicenter observation station 1
2800 km/1750 miles observation station 3
4800 km/3000 miles epicenter of earthquake observation station 2
3400 km/2125 miles

2500

3000

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 59

59

Musical notes

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Waveform

amplitude frequency fundamental harmonic 1 Waveform
● Musical

2 Waveform of 440 Hz note

Displacement

Piano

Displacement

Violin

Time

Time

instruments produce a range of notes, often due to vibrating strings or vibrating columns of air. The same note played on different musical instruments sounds different because, unlike a tuning fork, musical instruments do not produce pure notes. ● A musical instrument produces a fundamental frequency together with a series of overtones at lower amplitudes. The fundamental has the lowest frequency and the overtones have frequencies that are multiples of this fundamental.
● The number and amplitudes of the overtones determine the quality of the sound and are typical of the particular musical instrument thus middle “C” on a violin sounds different from the same note played on a piano.
● The fundamental frequency is also called the first harmonic. If this is equal to f then the overtones have frequencies of 2f, 3f, 4f, etc. They are called the second harmonic, third harmonic, fourth harmonic and so on.

2 Waveform of 440 Hz note ● It

is possible to analyse the frequencies and amplitudes of the harmonics which combine to produce a note on a musical instrument.
● When a note of frequency 440 Hz is played on a violin and a piano the mixture of harmonics is very different.

3 Frequency spectrum of 440 Hz note

1

2
3
Frequency in kHz

4

3 Frequency spectrum of
440 Hz note
● The

0

1

2
3
Frequency in kHz

4

amplitude of the second and fifth harmonics on the violin is much higher than the corresponding harmonics on the piano. This difference contributes significantly to the different sound of this note on the two instruments.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

0

Piano

Amplitude

Amplitude

Violin

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 60

60
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words amplitude frequency fundamental harmonic longitudinal wave

node stationary wave transverse wave wavelength Vibrating strings
1 Stringed instruments

1 Stringed instruments
● These

produce sound forming longitudinal waves as their strings are plucked, stroked or struck, causing them to vibrate.
● Progressive transverse waves travel from both fixed ends of the string, so reflected waves meet incident waves. A stationary wave forms when the stationary wave pattern fits the length of the string in terms of wavelengths.
● A progressive longitudinal sound wave of the same frequency forms in air surrounding the stationary transverse wave on the string.
● The sound produced by vibrating strings has low amplitude. It is transmitted by the strings to the hollow body of the instrument (cello, guitar) or to the sounding board
(piano) where it is amplified by causing vibration in a surrounding air.

␭1 is the wavelength of the stationary wave.
␭1 = 2l f1 = n/␭1 therefore f1 = n/2l

2 First harmonic

3 Second harmonic

● The

fixed ends of a string are displacement nodes, N.
● The simplest stationary wave occurs whith one displacement antinode between the fixed ends. This happens when the string is plucked at its center.
● The distance between the nodes is half a wavelength (␭/2).
● The vibration creates the fundamental frequency, or first harmonic.
● The frequency of a note, f = n/␭, (n is the speed of the transverse wave along the string).

2 First harmonic

l

A
N

N λ1 2

l

A

A

N

N

N λ2 ␭2 is the wavelength of the stationary wave.
␭2 = l f2 = n/␭2 therefore f2 = n/l

4 Third harmonic

l

3 Second harmonic
© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

string can vibrate in two parts if plucked one quarter along its length— there are two half wavelengths.
This is the second harmonic.

A
N

A
N

4 Third harmonic
● The

next harmonic is obtained when the string vibrates in three parts— there are three half wavelengths. This is the third harmonic.

␭3 is the wavelength of the stationary wave.
␭3 = 2l/3 f3 = n/␭3 therefore f3 = 3n/2l

A
N

3␭3
2

N

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 61

61

Vibrating columns of air

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Harmonics produced by a closed pipe l Fundamental
(First harmonic) f1 = n/␭1 f1 = n/4l

␭1 = 4l

N

frequency fundamental harmonic longitudinal wave node stationary wave wavelength A

Vibrating columns of air
● Sound

l
Second harmonic f2 = n/␭2 f2 = 3n/4l

␭2 =

4l
3

N

N
A

A

is produced in wind instruments by stationary longitudinal waves formed in air columns inside pipes.
● Vibration starts with a disturbance at one end of the pipe, the other end of the pipe may be closed or open.

1 Harmonics produced by a closed pipe

Third harmonic f3 = n/␭3 f3 = 5n/4l

␭3

=

4l
5

N

N

A

First harmonic f1 = n/␭1 f1 = n/2l

N

A

2 Harmonics produced in an open pipe

A

l

␭ 1 = 2l

N
A

A

l
Second harmonic f2 = n/␭2 f2 = n/l

␭2 = l
N

N

A

simplest stationary wave in a closed pipe has a displacement node
(N) at the closed end and an antinode
(A) at the open end.
● The distance between the node and antinode is 1⁄4 the wavelength, ␭1, of the stationary wave.
● The frequency; f, of a note = n/␭ (n is the speed of sound in air).
● If the pipe is of length, l, then ␭1 = 4l; f1 = n/4l. This is the fundamental frequency or first harmonic.
● The next stationary wave occurs when another node and antinode are added.
For this note ␭2 = 4l/3; f2 = 3n/4l. This is the second harmonic.
● For the next stationary wave
␭3 = 4l/5; f3 = 5n/4l. This is the third harmonic. ● Closed pipes give only odd-numbered harmonics. ● The

l

A

A

2 Harmonics produced by an open pipe

l
Third harmonic f3 = n/␭ 3 f3 = 3n/2l

␭3

=

2l
3

N
A

N
A

N
A

A

N antinodes
A nodes

simplest stationary wave in an open pipe has a displacement node
(N) in the center and an antinode (A) at each end.
● If the pipe is of length l, then ␭1 = 2l; f1 = n/2l. This is the fundamental frequency or first harmonic.
● The next stationary wave occurs when another node and antinode are added.
For this note ␭2 = l; f2 = n/l. This is the second harmonic.
● For the next stationary wave ␭3 = 2l/3; f3 = 3n/2l. This is the third harmonic.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 62

62
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words amplitude frequency pendulum resonance

Resonance

Resonance
1 Pendulum resonance

lighter weight objects have a natural frequency at which they vibrate. The vibration can be started and increased by another object vibrating at the same frequency.
This effect is called resonance.

● All

resonates with heavy ball heavy metal ball 1 Pendulum resonance
●A

heavy metal ball is set swinging as a pendulum forcing the lighter weights to swing. The light weight whose length matches the pendulum’s has a much greater amplitude than the rest.
This weight resonates with the pendulum. 2 Wire resonance resonating wire

tuning fork paper rider

2 Wire resonance
● The

length of a stretched wire is altered until it vibrates at the same frequency as the tuning fork. At this frequency the amplitude of the wire’s vibrations increase dislodging the paper rider. The wire resonates with the tuning fork.

3 Air resonance

3 Air resonance

resonating column of air

● The

length of the air column is altered by moving the tube up and down until it vibrates with the same frequency as the tuning fork, and the sound of the vibrating fork is amplified. The air column resonates with the tuning fork.

4 Destructive resonance

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● If

large structures such as tall towers and suspended bridges start to vibrate at their natural frequencies the results can be disastrous.
● The collapse of the Tacoma Narrows
Bridge, USA in 1940 is well-known. It is thought that the bridge began to resonate due to a cross wind of a particular frequency. This caused the bridge to shake itself apart.
● Models of large structures are tested in wind tunnels to ensure that their natural vibrating frequencies are outside the range of vibrations caused by winds.

tuning fork

4 Destructive resonance

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 63

63

Scales

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Keyboard scale

diatonic scale frequency octave

c´
#

d´
#

f´
#

g´
#

a´
#

(d´)

(e´)

(g´)

(a´)

(a´)
Scales
● As

music developed it became obvious that some combinations of notes of certain frequencies gave pleasing results while others did not. The results of these observations gave rise to musical scales.

294

330

394

392

440

494

523

c´

d´

e´

f´

g´

a´

b´

c´´

Frequency ratio between each of the 13 notes and the next is 1.0595
(chromatic semitone)
Keyboard scale (equally tempered) A compromise with diatonic scale

Staff notation

doh

ray

me

fah

soh

lah

te

doh

Tonic sol-fa notation

2 Frequencies (scientific)

256
Intervals

ITones

288 320 341

384 427

9
8

10
9

16
15

9
8

10
9

Major

Minor

Semi

Major

Minor

480 512
9
8

16
15

Major Semitone

1 Keyboard scale
● Music

evolved along different lines in different parts of the world and scales were adopted accordingly. In Europe, music came to be based on the diatonic scale. This consists of eight notes and can be shown in a variety of ways.
● For scientific purposes the diatonic scale has been standardised as a sequence of notes between middle C
(c´) and upper C (c´ ). Middle C has
´
the frequency 256 Hz while upper C has the frequency 512 Hz. Scientific tuning forks pitched at these two notes are however, not suitable for tuning musical instruments.
● As far as music is concerned the ratio of the pitches of the various notes on the scale is more important than the actual pitch of the notes. In the eighteenth century it would be unlikely to find two organs, for example, with middle C pipes of exactly the same pitch but this did not create a problem provided the ratios between the notes was the same for all instruments. ● In 1939 an international committee agreed to standardise absolute pitch based on the note middle A at 440 Hz.

2 Frequencies (scientific)
● Certain

intervals have been given specific names. A ratio of 9:8 is a major tone, 10:9 is a minor tone and 16:15 a semitone. The interval between the top and bottom notes of a scale is 2:1 and is called an octave.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

262

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 64

64
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words auditory nerve cochlea Eustachian tube ossicles pharynx

The human ear
1 Ear

outer ear

middle ear

inner ear

filled with air

filled with air

filled with fluid

middle ear cavity

malleus

oval window

tympanic membrane

1 Ear

cochlea

● The

outer ear consists of the pinna and the outer ear canal which collect and channel sound to the tympanic membrane (eardrum) causing it to vibrate in and out.
● The middle ear, separated from the outer ear by the tympanic membrane and from the inner ear by the oval window and round window, contains tiny bones or ossicles called the malleus (hammer), incus (anvil) and stapes (stirrup). These are the smallest bones in the body and are held in place by muscle and ligament. The ossicles transfer and magnify sound from the tympanic membrane to the oval window.
● The eustachian tube connects the middle ear to the pharynx. It ensures equal air pressure on both sides of the tympanic membrane.
● The outer and middle ear are air-filled.
The inner ear is fluid-filled and contains the semicircular canals, concerned with balance and the cochlea, concerned with hearing.

pinna

auditory canal incus staples round window

2 Cochlea

oval window

Reissner’s membrane tectorial membrane vestibular canal

middle canal

basilar membrane 2 Cochlea cochlea consists of three parallel canals separated by membranes. The basilar membrane separates the middle and tympanic canals. The tectorial membrane runs parallel with the basilar membrane the full length of the cochlea.

● The

3 Receptor cells

tympanic canal tympanic membrane auditory nerve fibres

Cross section of cochlea

round window

3 Receptor cells

tectorial membrane

sensory hairs receptor cells

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● There

is a series of receptor cells between the tectorial and basilar membranes. A sensory hair on one end of each cell touches the tectorial membrane while the other end is connected to a nerve fiber.
● Movement of the basilar membrane causes distortions of the receptor cells, resulting in impulses being sent to the brain along the auditory nerves. auditory nerve

basilar membrane

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 65

65

Audio range

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Audio range comparison

frequency infrasound ultrasound

highly sensitive less sensitive
Humans

1 Audio range comparison
●

Human beings can only hear sounds in the range 20–20,000 Hz. These are called the limits of audibility and decrease with age. Humans usually lose the ability to hear sounds at the high-frequency end of the range as they grow older.
● Many animals hear sound over a different range than humans. For example, bats are able to detect sounds at much higher frequencies than humans. They use short bursts of high-pitched sound to locate flying insects. Bats

Grasshoppers

Rodents

2 Sensitivity of human hearing ●

Whales

Tenrecs

0.01

0.1

1.0

10

100

1000

Frequency/Khz

2 Sensitivity of human hearing

Humans

Although the limits of audibility for a human are 20–20,000 Hz this does not mean that the human ear can detect sound equally well at all frequencies over the whole range. The human ear is most sensitive in the range
1000–10,000 Hz.
● Sounds below the lower limit of audibility i.e. <20 Hz, are called infrasound. Such sounds are too low to be detected by the ear but the vibrations might still be detected by the body.
● Sounds above upper limit of audibility
i.e. > 20,000 Hz, are called ultrasound. Ultrasound has a variety of uses in industry and in medicine.

0.01

0.1

1.0

10

Frequency/Khz

100

1000

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Intensity needed for sound to be heard *02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 66

66
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words frequency infrasound sonar ultrasound

Infrasound and ultrasound controlled explosion 1 Infrasound

sound waves transmitted 2 Sonar

seismograph ship pickups

1 Infrasound frequency of infrasound (typically
20 Hz down to 0.001 Hz) is too low to be detected by the human ear. It can cover long distances and negotiate obstacles with little dissipation.
● Infrasound may result from natural phenomena—ocean waves, avalanches, earthquakes, volcanoes, and meteors—and be detected by seismographs. Infrasound is also generated by some man-made processes such as explosions.
● Some animals use infrasound to communicate over varying distances of up to many miles. Migrating birds may use naturally generated infrasound, from sources such as turbulent airflow over mountain ranges, as a navigational aid.
● The

2 Sonar frequency of ultrasound (greater than 20,000 Hz). is too high to be detected by the human ear. Sonar uses ultrasound to build up a “picture” of the surroundings.

reflected shock waves reflected sound waves
(echo)

shock waves

object

rock layers

3 Animal sonar sound waves transmitted prey reflected sound waves

● The

bat

prey sound waves transmitted 3 Animal sonar
● Animals

such as bats, whales and dolphins also use ultrasound for navigation. reflected sound waves dolphin 4 Medical ultrasound

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Ultrasound

travels at a different speeds in different substances. Some is reflected when passing from one substance to another, and it can be detected. The bigger the speed difference, the greater the reflection.
● Ultrasound is used in hospitals to produce pictures of the inside of the body. Such scans are often performed to observe the unborn baby.
● Saline gel prevents the formation of a layer of air between probe and skin, allowing more ultrasound to enter the body without reflection. This allows formation of a good image.

4 Medical ultrasound
Substance
Air

Speed of ultrasound (m/s)

ultrasound probe saline gel

334

Bone

3360

Fat

1476

Muscle

1540

Saline gel

1515

sound waves transmitted reflected sound waves

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 67

67

Noise and decibel ratings
Noise
a b c d e f g h i j Distance m ft
5
15
–
–
15
50
1
3
15
50
15
50
15
50
600
2000
–
–
60
200

Whisper
Inside an urban home
Light traffic
Normal conversation
Pneumatic drill
Heavy traffic
Loud shout
Jet taking off
Disco at full volume
Jet taking off

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

Decibel rating db 30
50
55
60
85
90
100
105
117
120

cochlea decibel (dB) frequency Noise and decibel ratings
● The

Noises rated at 120–130 dB cause pain; above 140 dB can cause permanent ear damage

120

human ear responds to the ratio of the power of sounds rather than the difference in power. To the ear, a change of loudness from 0.1 W to 1 W is the same as from 1 W to 10 therefore the logarithm to base 10
(log10) of these changes is the same.
● The unit used to measure change in power is the bel, B. If the power of sound changes from P1 to P2 then number of bels change = log10(P2/P1)
● The

bel is too large for practical use so in practice the decibel is used. number

of decibels change = 10 log10(P2/P1)

decibals

80

60

40

20

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

● The

decibel scale is logarithmic, thus an increase from 10 dB to 20 dB corresponds to a tenfold increase in the power of the sound.
● Noise-induced hearing loss may result from a single very loud noise or frequent exposure to loud noise.
● Loud noise damages the sensory hairs in the cochlea either temporarily or permanently depending on the loudness of the noise and the amount of exposure.
● Sounds less than 80 dB are unlikely to cause permanent hearing loss. Regular exposure to noise above 85 dB will cause a gradual hearing loss and louder noises accelerate this loss.
● For unprotected ears, allowed exposure time decreases by one-half for each 5 dB increase in average noise level. Exposure time is limited to 8 hours at 90 dB, 4 hours at 95 dB, and 2 hours at 100 dB. The highest permissible noise exposure for the unprotected ear is 115 dB for 15 minutes each day.
● Sound frequency is measured in hertz,
Hz. The human ear can detect sound in the range 20–20,000 Hz. Human speech is in the range 300–4000 Hz.
When a person becomes deaf, higher frequency sounds are lost first.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

100

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 68

68
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words frequency fundamental resonance sonometer tension transverse wave wavelength Measurement of the speed of sound 1
1 Relation between wave velocity and tension in a wire small paper rider

movable bridges hollow wooden box

tuning fork movable bridges

1 Relation between wave velocity and tension in a wire ●A

tuning fork vibrates when struck. If a tuning fork’s base is placed on the wire of a sonometer, the wire vibrates.
● The vibrating wire’s frequency depends on its length, which is varied by moving the bridge until it equals the tuning fork’s frequency.
● Resonance occurs between the tuning fork and the string and the paper rider is thrown off the string.
● The speed of a transverse wave traveling along a stretched wire, n = ͌(T/m) where T = tension and m

weights

pulley

2 Speed of sound measurement
2nd position of resonance l2 + x = 3λ
4

= mass per unit length.
● For

a vibrating wire of length l, the frequency of the fundamental note,

f = n /2l, it follows that f = ͌(T/m) / 2l
● f is therefore inversely proportional to l when T and m are constant. f is also proportional to the square root of T when l and m are constant.

end correction, x

1st position of resonance l1 + x = λ
4
tuning fork (frequency f) l2 2 Speed of sound measurement © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

tuning fork is struck and held over a tube standing in a large glass jar which is slowly raised and lowered until the note’s sound is loudest, showing resonance between the tuning fork and the air column in the tube. The stationary wave in the air column is one quarter of the note’s wavelength.
Therefore l1 + x = ␭/4 (l1 is the length of the tube above the water level; x is the end correction).
● When the tube is raised further using the same tuning fork a second resonance position is found, corresponding to an air column three quarters of a wavelength. l2 + x =
3␭/4.
= ␭/2. The frequency, f, of the tuning fork is known, the speed of sound in air, n = f␭.

● Thus l2–l1

l1

large glass jar

glass tube water *02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 69

69

Measurement of the speed of sound 2
1 Speed of sound in a metal rod heavy claw hammer metal rods

rubber band

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

number of complete oscillations shown = 10.
Therefore time of contact of hammer = 400 µs.
Therefore speed of wave = 5,000ms–1

1m

cathode ray oscilloscope compression frequency rarefaction

1 Speed of sound in a metal rod
● The

CRO, 100 µs cm–1 time base setting

signal generator, 6V 25 kHz

2 Speed of a mechanical wave spring

spring holders

weights

scaler metal block into which trolleys collide

make to count sockets

● The

trolleys are linked by springs. trolleys are pushed together towards the metal block. The left-most trolley stops when it hits the metal block, completing the circuit. The compression pulse passes from trolley to trolley as each spring in turn is compressed. The right-most trolley then starts to move to the right initiating an expansion pulse. Each spring expands in turn until the leftmost trolley moves and the circuit is broken. ● The scaler records the length of time taken for the pulse to pass twice the distance from the front of the left-most trolley to the back of the right-most trolley. If this distance is measured the speed of the mechanical wave can be calculated. ● The

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

2 Speed of a mechanical wave trolley method provides an approximate value for the speed of sound as it passes through steel.
● The output from a signal generator becomes the input of a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO) when the hammer strikes the lower rod.
● A compression pulse passes along the rod and is reflected at the left end of the steel rod as a rarefaction pulse.
This wave passes back towards the right end of the steel rod where it breaks the contact between the rod and the hammer.
● If the frequency of the signal is
25,000 Hz and there are 10 complete oscillations on the CRO it follows that the steel bar and the hammer must have been in contact for
10/25,000 = 4 x 10-4 s = 400 ms.
During this time the wave has traveled twice the length of the steel bar which is 2 m. The speed of sound in steel is therefore 2 / 4 x 10-4 = 5,000 ms-1.

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 70

70
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words diffraction frequency interference interference fringe monochromatic light

phase wave wavelength
Young’s double slit experiment

Interference of two beams of light 1
1 Diffraction of waves at a small aperture slit 1 Diffraction of waves at a small aperture of waves passing through a narrow aperture curve on diffraction.
Curvature is greatest when the gap is similar in size to the wavelength.

● Ends

screen

2 Young’s double-slit experiment ●A

wave passing through two slits produces two coherent waves of the same frequency, equal or similar magnitude and a constant phase difference. An interference pattern forms when coherent waves cross.

2 Young’s double-slit experiment source slit double slit

3 Observing interference fringes light from a narrow slit falling on two slits (close together and parallel to the first slit) forms two coherent light sources. Diffraction occurs if the pair of slits is sufficiently narrow. A pattern of equally alternate bright and dark vertical bands, or interference fringes forms. Bright bands indicate where the waves are in phase and hence at maximum amplitude. Dark bands indicate where the waves are out of phase and amplitude is zero.

double slit ● Monochromatic

screen

3 Observing interference fringes single filament lamp retina
(screen)

eye double slit

red glass

4 Path difference in
Young’s experiment

4 Path difference in Young’s experiment

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

bright fringe occurs if the path difference from the slits equals a whole number of wavelengths (apart from the central bright fringe).
● The first bright fringe occurs at k, a distance x above the central bright fringe. The path difference of light reaching k from S1 and S2 is S2A.
Sin ␪1 = S2A/d. Sin ␪ = x/D. As d is very small relative to D, ␪1 = ␪. A bright fringe appears when the path difference is n␭. Therefore, for the first fringe (n=1), ␭/d = x/D; ␭ = xd/D

k

S1

x θ′ d

S2

θ

D

Path difference = S2A
Sin θ′ = S2A d A
Sin θ = x
D
θ′ = θ
S2A = nλ for bright fringe at k

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 71

71

Interference of two beams of light 2

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Fresnel’s biprism small angle prism

stop

screen

interference interference fringes monochromatic light

prism virtual image

1 Fresnel’s biprism monochromatic light falls on a small-angled prism two virtual images are formed by refraction at each half of the prism. This gives the effect of three light sources, one real and two imaginary. These act as coherent sources which are close together due to the small refracting angle.
● An interference pattern, similar to that from a double slit but brighter, is obtained where the two refracted beams overlap. The pattern can conveniently observed using a traveling eyepiece focused on the fringes. ● When

area of overlap of the two beams
(interference region)

point source of monochromatic light virtual sources

2 Fresnel’s mirrors source slit

2 Fresnel’s mirrors
● When

screen

area of overlap
(interference)

two mirrors inclined at a small angle

3 Lloyd’s mirror
● Lloyd's

3 Lloyd’s mirror

screen

source slit

area of overlap
(interference)

virtual source

flat mirror

mirror may also be used to demonstrate interference. Light from a monochromatic slit source reflects from a glass surface set at a small angle from the horizontal. The result is that light also appears to come from a second virtual source. The light from the real and virtual sources is coherent and an interference pattern of fringes is formed.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

virtual sources

two mirrors are inclined at a very small angle to each other they produce two virtual sources of light from one real monochromatic source.
The light from the two virtual sources is coherent.
● The two reflected beams appear to come from two closely-spaced virtual sources. They interfere with each other and producing an interference pattern of bright and dark fringes.

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 72

72
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words interference interference fringes lens monochromatic light

reflection refractive index wave Interference involving multiple reflections
1 Multiple reflections in a plane parallel film point source

reflected rays

reflections at inner surface

1 Multiple reflections in a plane parallel film monochromatic light strikes a parallel film some is reflected at the upper surface and some, transmitted through the film, is reflected at the lower surface, resulting in a series of coherent waves which interfere when brought together.

● When

2 Path difference between two consecutive rays

focusing lens

transmitted rays

2 Path difference between two consecutive rays

index of the film ␮ = speed of light in air/speed of light in film.
● Path length difference between rays,
1 and 2 = ␮ (AF + FB) –AD = 2 ␮d cos ␪' = n␭.
● The waves are coherent and interference fringes are formed.

θ

D

1

A

● Refractive

2

E

B
C
F d fringes are produced by a thin wedge of air.
● When monochromatic light shines onto the glass plates some is reflected up by the lower surface of the top plate and some, transmitted through the air, is reflected up by the upper surface of the bottom plate. Both waves originate from the same point, they are coherent and interfere when brought together.

4 Newton’s rings

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

θ′
G

3 Interference fringes in a wedge film sodium arc lamp

glass plates

eye

spacer

4 Newton’s rings

● Monochromatic

light is reflected by a glass slide and falls on the film of air between a plano-convex lens and an optical flat. To each side of the center of the lens there is a wedge of air gradually increasing in thickness from zero moving outwards.
● Light reflected by the lower surface of the lens and by the upper surface of the optical flat create interference fringes which take the form of rings.
As their radii increase, the spacing between them decreases.

θ′

film of refractive index ␮

3 Interference fringes in a wedge film
● Interference

2d

θ′

microscope monochromatic source

glass slide convex lens
Plano-convex lens optical flat

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 73

73

Diffraction at a single slit

Key words

1 Diffraction pattern source WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT

screen source slit

diffraction interference monochromatic light deffracting slit

principle of superposition wave wavelength 1 Diffraction pattern
● Diffraction

2 Wave fronts and interference 3 Angular width of central maximum Wave from A cancels with that from C

points of maximum interference

Wave from C cancels with that from B

results from superposition of waves from different parts of the same wave front, while interference results from superposition of waves on two different wave fronts.
● Monochromatic light passes through a horizontal source slit and then a horizontal diffracting slit. A diffraction pattern is formed on the screen.

2 Wave fronts and interference ●A

horizontal slit can be thought of a series of vertical strips, each being a source of secondary wavelets. The wavelets can be added using the principle of superposition.

A a 2

θ
C

a
2

B

D

3 Angular width of central maximum dark band forms at ␪° to incident beam, if path difference for secondary wavelets from strip C, immediately below A is ␭/2. Destructive interference occurs between these wavelets, causing darkness in direction
␪ when CD = ␭/2.
● Since sin ␪ = 2CD / a, sin ␪ = ␭/a.
● First

θ
Path difference
CD = λ for maximum
2
giving θ = λ, where a a = slit width

4 Position of next minimum
5 Intensity distribution

λ
2
λ
3λ
2

4 Position of next minimum ␪ = n␭ /a where n = Ϯ1, Ϯ2, etc. corresponding to pairs of dark bands on either side of the original direction of the incident beam.

● sin

5 Intensity distribution sin ␪ = ␭/a, if a (slit width) is much larger than ␭ (wavelength), angle ␪ is very small and the dark bands will be very close to the central maximum. Most of the emergent light from the slit will be in the direction of the incident light and minimal diffraction occurs.
If a = ␭; sin ␪ = 1; therefore ␪ = 90°.
The width of the central band is twice that of any other bright band.

θ = 2λ a –3λ a –2λ a –λ a 0

λ a 2λ a 3λ a sin θ

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● From

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 74

74
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words diffraction interference interference fringes lens wavelength

1 Observing diffraction from a double slit

Diffraction at a double slit
1 Observing diffraction from a double slit

double slit source

● If

slits are sufficiently narrow, diffraction occurs and each slit acts as a source of secondary wavelets which superimpose on each other. In some directions there is constructive interference resulting in bright bands while in others there is destructive interference resulting in dark bands.
● In addition to interference occurring between wavelets from different slits, it also occurs between wavelets produced by the same slit. The wavelets formed at each slit each form a diffraction pattern. These patterns are similar in nature and traveling in the same direction so they will coincide if focused by a lens.

slit width

intensity pattern

slit separation width slit width

screen

2 Intensity pattern

2 Intensity pattern
● Interference

produces a regular pattern of dark and bright bands of similar intensity.
● Diffraction at one slit produces a central bright band which is twice the width of the series of other less bright bands on either side of it.
● The two patterns come together to form a resultant intensity distribution.

Intensity distribution produced by interference from the two slits

b sin θ
–2λ
–λ
0
λ
2λ
3λ
Intensity distribution produced by diffraction at one of the slits

3 Altering slit width number of interference fringes formed depends on the amount of diffraction that occurs at each slit which, in turn, depends on the width of the slits. The narrower the slits the greater the number of fringes due to increased diffraction. However, since the slits are narrow, less light gets through and the fringes become fainter. ● In practice, in order to generate fringes which are easily seen, it is necessary to have slits which are many wavelengths wide.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

Resultant intensity distribution

3 Altering slit width

c=b c = 2b c = 5b

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 75

75

Diffraction grating
1 Diffraction and construction of intensity pattern

a

b

c
Pattern a (interference) adds to pattern b (diffraction) to give resultant intensity distribution c

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT θ Key words diffraction diffraction grating interference interference fringes monochromatic light prism spectrum wavelength

1 Diffraction and construction of intensity pattern diffraction grating consists of many evenly spaced equally sized fine parallel slits. A series of light and dark interference fringes forms when monochromatic light falls on the grating. A diffraction pattern also forms at each slit.

●A

2 Intensity pattern
● Light

and dark bands formed by interference and diffraction combine forming an intensity pattern.

2 Intensity pattern

3 Formation of spectral lines by a grating

3 Formation of spectral lines by a grating i i dsini dsinθ θ Light containing two wavelengths λ1 and λ2 is incident at angle i and is diffracted at various angles θ

diffraction envelope of wavelength λ1 diffraction envelope of wavelength λ2 slit width, d, typically 5 × 10–6m

gratings are used to produce spectra for very accurate measurement of wavelength. They are frequently preferred to prisms because they give very sharp spectra.
● Consider plane waves of monochromatic light, wavelength ␭, falling on a diffraction grating, whose slits are separated by distance, d,
(grating spacing). For wavelets coming from two adjacent slits and traveling at angle ␪ to the direction of the incident light, the path difference between them corresponding to one wavelength will be dsin ␪. This is true of corresponding pairs of adjacent slits. In the general case for all such waves dsin ␪ = n ␭, where n gives the order of the spectrum, and reinforcement of diffracted wavelets occurs in direction ␪. Intensity is greatest when the wavelets are focused by a lens.
● If light of mixed wavelengths falls onto the diffraction grating ␪ is different for each, corresponding to the difference in wavelength. The angle at which reinforcement of diffracted wavelets occurs is different for each wavelength, thus light of different wavelengths is separated.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Diffraction

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 76

76
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words aperture diffraction
Rayleigh criterion resolving power wavelength Resolving power
1 Formation of diffraction images S1 S2

2 Diffraction images of two slit sources

Resolution
● Resolution

is the ability of an optical system to form distinct separate images of objects that are close together. Resolving power depends on the size of hole or slit through which objects are viewed and the color of the light. It is easier to resolve an object which is illuminated by short wavelength light (blue) than by long wavelength light (red).

S1 and S2 are slit sources

Well resolved

α=2θ

Well resolved

α=

α is the angle the sources subtend at the slit α 1 Formation of diffraction images 3
2

θ

● Resolving

power also depends on the distance between objects. When two slit sources form diffraction images resolution depends on the angle subtended by the sources at the slit.

2 Diffraction images of two slit sources

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

3 Resolving power of a microscope Intensity

the angle subtended at the slit by the two sources decreases so does the resolution of their diffraction images.
● Rayleigh suggested objects should be considered to be just resolved when the first minimum of one image coincides with the central maximum of the other image. If slit width equals b then ␣ = ␭/b. As the wavelength of light decreases so ␣ decreases.
● Assuming the pupil of the human eye is 2 x 10-3 m and the average wavelength of white light is 6 x 10-7 m the resolving power of the eye is
6 x 10-7 / 2 x 10-3 = 3 x 10-4 radians.

α=θ
Just resolved – The Raleigh Criterion ␣ = λ b α

● As

S2´

Not resolved

S1´

1

α =2 θ

3 Resolving power of a microscope
3

● In

a microscope the lens acts as a circular aperture.
● The Rayleigh criterion for a circular aperture is sin ␣ = 1.22 ␭ / d where ␣ is the angle subtended by the images,
␭ is the wavelength of light and d is the diameter of the aperture.

O´
O

α

d

I´
I

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 77

77

Polarization 1
1 Demonstration

polaroids

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT

2 Analogy

cardboard with slit –
1st Polaroid

string

Key words
Nicol prism
Polaroid
polarization reflection refraction

lamp

1 Demonstration
● Polarization

turn polaroid until all light is blocked out

2nd
Polaroid

4 Polarization by reflection

3 Nicol prism
Canada
Balsam cement

unpolarized incident ray

extraordinary ray
(plane polarized)

A

ip ip

Calcite medium 1 medium 2

shows that light waves are transverse in character.
● A lamp viewed through a Polaroid appears normal although dimmer.
Rotating the Polaroid has no effect.
● If the lamp is viewed through two
Polaroids and one is slowly rotated, a position is reached where light is completely blocked off. If the rotation is continued the light is restored.

2 Analogy
● Vibrations

B

Calcite

Since angle between A and B = 90° for polarization then ␮ = tan ip where the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first is denoted by ␮

unpolarized light ordinary ray
(plane polarized)

in light waves occur in all directions perpendicular to the direction of travel.
● A Polaroid acts like a slit, allowing only waves vibrating in one direction to pass. No waves pass if a second slit is placed perpendicular to the first.

3 Nicol prism

5 Sheets of glass unpolarized incident light

plane polarized reflected light

Nicol prism consists of Icelandic spar, a form of calcite.
● An unpolarized ray of light passing through a Nicol prism splits into an ordinary and an extraordinary ray— polarized at right angles to each other.
The extraordinary ray is transmitted.
●A

4 Polarization by reflection reflected by glass or water is partially plane polarized. At the polarizing angle, ip, an unpolarized ray of light splits into two plane polarized rays. One is reflected, the other is refracted. ● Light

partially polarized transmitted light

6 Scattering tank of slightly cloudy water

5 Sheets of glass

polaroids

● When

light falls on glass plates, separated by thin layers of air, the reflected light rays are plane polarized transmitted rays are partly polarized.

6 Scattering polaroid ● Light

scattering particle
Polarization produced by scattering

Illustrating scattering

rays are scattered by collisions with particles in cloudy water, this results in rays of plane polarized light.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

slide projector

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 78

78
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words absorption electromagnetic spectrum microwaves
Nicol prism

Polaroid polarization Polarization 2
1 Light rays resolved into two planes of vibration

‘side-on’

components

‘end-on’

1 Light rays resolved into two planes of vibration
● Many

sources produce unpolarized light. Rays vibrate perpendicularly to the direction traveled by the ray.
● Unpolarized light can be represented by arrows whose direction corresponds to the direction of vibration. Dots represent arrows going into and out of the page.
● Any vibration can be resolved into two perpendicular components.

polarized in the horizontal plain polarized in the vertical plain

2 Light and electromagnetism

Light as an electronmagnetic wave

electric field wires direction of travel 2 Light and electromagnetism ● Visible

light is part of the electromagnetic spectrum. It is regarded as a combination of varying electric and magnetic fields at right angles to each other.
● Light vibrations are taken to be variations of the electric field.
● Polaroid consists of tiny crystals aligned in the same direction on a nitrocellulose sheet. The crystals polarize light by selective absorption.
● The effect is similar to the polarization of microwaves by a grid of wires.

wires magnetic field

Wires can be used to demonstrate that microwaves are plane polarized

varying B-field
(magnetic)

3 Parallel and crossed tourmaline crystals

varying E-field
(electric)

4 Nicol prisms used as polarizer and analyzer
Parallel nicols Crossed nicols – Parallel nicols –
– E ray no transmission
E ray transmitted transmitted polarizer tourmaline

3 Parallel and crossed tourmaline crystals
● The

mineral tourmaline also polarizes light by selective absorption. Two wafers placed in parallel produce polarized light. If one of the wafers is rotated through 90° no light passes.

tourmaline

4 Nicol prisms used as polarizer and analyzer
© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

direction of travel Nicol prisms are placed in parallel, polarized light is transmitted through them. When the same prisms are placed in the “crossed” position the polarized light transmitted by the first is absorbed by the second and there is no overall transmission.

● When

Parallel

Crossed

analyzer

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 79

79

Measurement of the velocity of light
1 Fizeau’s rotating wheel

e

c

a

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words concave plane prism reflection

d

speed of electromagnetic waves

5.5 miles

1 Fizeau’s rotating wheel
●A

eye bright source glass plate mirror rotating wheel (720 teeth)

a f g h i j k

2 Michelson’s rotating prism a i

h

e

eye light source octagonal rotating prism prism telescope plane mirrors concave mirrors

j

g

2 Michelson’s rotating prism AI

● Light

passes through a slit and is reflected by one side of a prism. After reflection by a plane mirror, it is reflected between a pair of concave mirrors. The returning beam is reflected at the opposite side of the prism and, after reflection, viewed.
● When the prism is stationary, the image is seen by light reflected from surface AI. As the prism rotates, the image disappears, but it reappears when the rotation speed increases, and is seen in the same position as when the prism is stationary. Light reflected from A now arrives at AI in the time taken by the prism to rotate through 45° or 1⁄8 of a revolution.

k

k

A

f

600m

a eye l bright source m rotating plane mirrors n glass plate o tube containing water p concave mirrors

3 Foucault’s method p 3 Foucault’s method
● Light

l

n

a

p

o

m

is reflected by rotating plane mirrors onto a pair of concave mirrors set an equal distance away. The difference in the speed of light in air and in water is shown by the different time taken for the light beams to be reflected back to the eyepiece.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

b

a b c d e

ray of light is reflected by a glass plate, passes between the teeth of the wheel to a distant mirror and is reflected back. When the wheel is rotating slowly the light returns in time to pass through the opening through which it was transmitted. As the speed of rotation increases, the light is blocked when the wheel has advanced half the distance between adjacent gaps. As the speed increases, the wheel advances the whole distance between adjacent gaps and the light will again pass through.
● As the distances, the wheel’s speed of rotation when light was transmitted, and its speed when light was blocked were known, Fizeau could calculate the speed of light.

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 80

80
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words diffraction electromagnetic spectrum frequency gamma radiation

interference vacuum wave wavelength Electromagnetic spectrum 1
Light waves
1 Electromagnetic radiation
3 Light waves
3 Light waves

1 Electromagnetic radiation magnetic force

1 Electromagnetic radiation electromagnetic spectrum consists of a series of wave-like radiations which carry energy and exhibit interference and diffraction.
● Because of their electrical origin and ability to travel in a vacuum, they are regarded as a combination of electric and magnetic forces (hence the name) directed at right angles to each other and to the direction of travel.
● The

Å

0Å
70
–7
20
52

E 0
G 2
N 62
RA –
O 970
5

D
RE

electric force

direction of travel

2 Electromagnetic spectrum 1012kHz

B

D

C

speed in a vacuum is constant, the frequency of electromagnetic radiation increases as wavelength decreases and vice versa.
● The energy of electromagnetic radiation increases with its frequency thus gamma rays are the most energetic and able to pass through thick layers of solid materials.

1

1cm

7

10cm

6

1m

5

10m

4

100m

106A

3

1000m

2

10 000m

1

E

2

1mm

A

● Since

3 Light waves

109kHz

1GHz

1MHz

106kHz

Frequency

103kHz

speed in a vacuum = wavelength x frequency c = ␭␷

2 Electromagnetic spectrum
1kHz

electromagnetic spectrum is divided into a series of regions on the basis of wavelength or frequency.
● For all electromagnetic radiation:

100Hz

● The

Wavelength

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

visible spectrum of light is part of the electromagnetic spectrum. The colors of the spectrum correspond to the colors of the rainbow: red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet, although there is some dispute over whether indigo and violet are sufficiently different in appearance to justify being regarded as different colors. ● What makes light of one color different from light of another color is its wavelength. Red light has the longest wavelength (and therefore the lowest frequency) while violet light has the shortest wavelength (and highest frequency). ENERGY DECREASE

1 km

A

Generated electricity 1m

B

C2

Induction heating 1 cm

C4

Radio waves Radio waves 0.01 mm

D1

Micro waves D2

Micro waves *02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 81

81

Electromagnetic spectrum 2

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

Tests indicate that, according to average judgement, names for the pure spectral colors should be applied to light of the following wavelenghts

fluorescence infrared microwaves radioactivity radio waves ultraviolet light

X-rays

Gamma rays
● Gamma

E
50
45
Å

1024kHz

1021kHz

1015kHz

1018kHz

Å

Å
70
59

0
77
–5

0
92
–4

20
49

–
70
57

0Å
T 55
LE 4
O 0–
VI 90
3

U
BL

EN
RE

G

W
O
LL
YE

radiation is emitted as a result of radioactive decay. Gamma rays have high energy and are the most penetrating and least ionising of the three radiations emitted in radioactivity. X-rays
● X-rays

are produced in X-ray tubes by the impact of high speed electrons on metal targets.
● High frequency X-rays can penetrate solid objects. Longer wavelength X-rays can penetrate flesh but not bone. They are used to obtain “pictures” of bones and teeth inside the body.

Ultraviolet waves
● Ultraviolet

1Xu

10Xu

100Xu

2

1Å

10Å

100Å

1000Å

1

1µ

I

H

10–6Å

G

F

radiation is emitted by white-hot objects (such as the Sun) and from certain gas discharges.
● This radiation gives rise to fluorescence and photoelectric effects.
It causes the skin to tan and is used in the formation of vitamin D.

ENERGY INCREASE

Infrared waves
● Infrared

radiation is thermal radiation
(heat). All bodies emit infrared radiation and it is one means of transferring heat.
● Infrared is used to transfer data between IT equipment without cables.

Microwaves
0.1 µm

0.1 nm

F

E

G

sources include tubes called klystrons.
● Microwaves are used in radar and in microwave ovens to cook food.

0.01 nm

H2

H1

I

Radio waves
● Radio

Infrared waves Light waves Ultraviolet waves X-rays

X-rays

Gamma rays waves are important in communication. Information is added to the wave before transmisson. At the receiver the information is separated from the carrier wave and amplified.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Microwave

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 82

82
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words black body bolometer infrared prism radiation spectrum thermistor thermocouple thermopile wheatstone bridge

Infrared
1 Intensity of a filament lamp a 12 V 24 W filament lamp b lens

c prism d white screen

a

e phototransistor f milliameter

b

g 1.5 V battery
Infrared
detected here c

1 Intensity of filament lamp
● Light

sources emit both light and heat.
When radiation from a filament lamp is dispersed by a prism, infrared radiation is refracted less than visible light and can be detected beyond the red end of the spectrum.

red

g

blue

e

f

d

2 The thermopile
● When

two different metals are joined in a circuit with their junctions kept at different temperatures, a small e.m.f. is produced and a current flows.
● Several thermocouples connected in series form a thermopile.
● Hot junctions of a thermopile are painted dull black to increase heat absorption, while the cold junctions are shielded from the heat radiation.

3 The bolometer
●A

small temperature change causes a large change in the electrical resistance of a thermistor.
● A bolometer contains one active and one compensating thermistor in a
Wheatstone bridge circuit. Change in temperature alters the active thermistor’s resistance, unbalancing the potential difference. The required rebalancing relates to the size of the temperature change.

4 Black body radiation black body theoretically absorbs all the radiation falling on it. It is a standard to judge other bodies by.
● A cylinder with dull black interior surfaces and a small hole through which radiation enters approximates to a black body. Radiation entering is absorbed before exiting.
● Wien’s displacement law states that at a temperature, the wavelength of the majority of the energy radiated has a particular wavelength ␭max. This wavelength decreases with rising temperature ␭maxT = constant.

2 The thermopile h h thermocouple wires k galvanometer m horn i cold junction l incident radiation n to galvanometer j hot junction m l i G j k

i

3 The bolometer o active thermistor p compensating thermistor q bridge circuit and connections to bolometer

A

B

C

G
C
B
A

p

o

4 Black body radiation

q

Black body radiation spectrum
10

●A

9

Producing a black body

r

s

r small hole s dull black surface t visible region

Relative intensity units

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

n

j

t

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0

1

2

3 4 5 6 7 8
Wavelength (in µm)

9 10

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 83

83

Absorption and scattering
1 Scattering by particles

lo

Key words

lo – l = ls

l

absorption
Rayleigh’s
scattering law reflection spectrograph

ls

2 Absorption of light by solids

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT

wavelength

1 Scattering by particles

spectograph

light source ● Some

light passing through a tube containing particles collides and is reflected in several directions, whilst the remainder passes straight through.

tube containing sample

2 Absorption of light by solids substances absorb light of different wavelengths.
● Light which has passed through a sample can be separated into a series of rays of different wavelengths by diffraction and be displayed as a spectrograph. ● Different

to spectrograph

3 Iodine vapor fluorescence polished reflector

tube containing iodine water

polished reflector tube containing iodine water tube filled with water
(to act as cylindrical lens)

tube filled with water
(to act as cylindrical lens)

3 Iodine vapor fluorescence ●A

spectrograph records the wavelengths of light absorbed by iodine vapor.

4 Reflection and scattering
● The

nature of scattering depends on the size of the particles involved.

arc source (eg sodium)

arc source (eg sodium)

5 Rayleigh scattering

4 Reflection and scattering

5 Rayleigh scattering
1200

Reflection

Relative intensity

1000

800

The graph shows that blue light is scattered much more than red light

UV

600

400

V
B
Q

200
Scattering
0
300

400

500 λ (in nm)

Y

OR
600

IR
700

scattering is the effect where light is scattered by particles smaller than the wavelength of light. It is most prominent in gases.
● Such particles scatter more short than long wavelength light. The wavelength of blue light is around 400 nm, red light around 700 nm.
● Nitrogen and oxygen molecules cause
Rayleigh scattering. Blue light is scattered about 10 times more than red. When the sun is overhead blue light is scattered many times before it reaches our eyes so the sky appears uniformly blue. Red light is scattered relatively little and so appears to be coming only from the sun.
● At sunrise and sunset, sunlight travels through a thicker atmospheric layer causing increased scattering of red light which can make the sky appear redder. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Rayleigh

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 84

84

Key words chirp dispersion electromagnetic radiation electromagnetic spectrum

frequency prism refraction refractive index wavelength 1 Dispersion curves refractive index, ␮, of a medium is the ratio of the speed of light in that medium to the speed of light in a second medium (often air).
● The change in speed of electromagnetic radiation passing from one medium into another depends on its wavelength. When a mixture of radiations of different wavelengths, such as white light, passes from air into a glass prism it separates into its component wavelengths. ● The

Dispersion
1 Dispersion curves dense flint glass 1.7

Refractive index

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT

light flint glass 1.6

barium flint crystal quartz telescope crown

1.5

borosilicate crown glass vitreous quartz

1.4

0

2000

4000
6000
8000
Wave length (in nm)

2 Anomalous dispersion of sodium vapor d e a

fluorite

10000

spectroscope images of horizontal slit c d

2 Anomalous dispersion of sodium vapor
● Sodium

3 Anomalous dispersion of quartz in infrared
● Over

a short range of wavelengths quartz absorbs all radiation and refracts none.

a horizontal slit b sodium c vertical slite

e

b

a visible region b absorption band

3 Anomalous dispersion of quartz in infrared
Refracted index

vapor is formed by heating sodium metal in a sealed tube. Light is polarised using a horizontal slit before passing through the vapor.
● A sequence of images of the horizontal slit separated by gaps forms. The radiation bands are detected by a spectroscope. 4 Dispersion curve for material transparent to light a

b

Wave length (in nm)

occurs in all regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
● Higher frequency components of light passing through a normally dispersive medium travel slower than lower frequency components. The light becomes positively chirped, or upchirped, increasing in frequency with time. Higher frequency components of light passing through an anomalously dispersive medium travel faster than low ones, the pulse becomes negatively chirped, or down chirped, decreasing in frequency with time.

4 Dispersion curve for material transparent to light
Refracted index

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Dispersion

a b c d e near infra-red f far infra-red g radio waves

X-rays far ultraviolet near ultraviolet visible a

b

c

d

e

f

Wave length (in nm)

g

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 85

85

Reflection 1

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Reflection of light rays from polished surface incident ray

reflected ray

angle of incidence laws of reflection normal reflection

virtual image

polished surface

1 Reflection of light rays from polished surface
● When

parallel light rays fall on a highly polished surface they are reflected as a parallel beam. This is described as regular reflection. The angle of reflection of each ray equals the angle of incidence.

2 Reflection of light rays from rough surface

rough surface

2 Reflection of light rays from rough surface
● Most

3 Verifying law of reflection

mirror

holder

reflecting line drawn on paper

angle of incidence

3 Verifying law of reflection angle of reflection

75°

surfaces are not totally smooth, therefore light is reflected in many different directions. This is diffuse reflection. Although light rays are reflected in different directions each individual ray obeys the laws of reflection; its angle of reflection equals its angle of incidence.

● The

60°

line of reflected rays marked on paper

45°

normal

ray box
15°

0°

4 Ray diagram to find image position

angle of incidence is the angle between the incident light ray and the normal. The angle of reflection is the angle between the reflected ray and the normal.
● The first law of reflection states that the angle of reflection equals the angle of incidence.
● The second law of reflection states that the angle of incidence, the angle of reflection and the normal all lie in the same plane.

virtual image broken lines are virtual rays

4 Ray diagram to find image position

search pins

search pins object pin real rays

eye

eye

object’s image seen in a mirror is located by aligning two pins with the image from two different positions.
The image is at the point where the lines of the pairs of pins intersect.
● The image of an object in a mirror is upright, same size and virtual. Its position is at an equal perpendicular distance behind the mirror as the object is in front of it.
● When an object is viewed in a mirror its image is laterally inverted.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● An

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 86

86
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words angle of incidence concave convex focus

plane reflection virtual ray

Reflection 2
1 Action of the periscope parallel plane mirror object 45°
45°

1 Action of the periscope
● When

a mirror is set at an angle of 45° to the horizontal (or vertical) the angle of incidence of a ray of light parallel to the horizontal is 45° and the angle of reflection is also 45°. The result is that the direction of the ray of light changes by 90° or a right angle.
● In a periscope two mirrors arranged at
45° are aligned in such a way that the observer can see above or around an object. The first mirror alters the direction of light by a right angle and the second mirror restores the light to its original direction.

2 Kaleidoscope a kaleidoscope two plane mirrors are set at an angle of 60° with an object between them. The object is often a small number of coloured glass or plastic shapes.
● The mirrors provide a series of multiple images which form a symmetrical pattern at the end of the kaleidoscope. obstacle

45°
45°

image (virtual and erect)

b

parallel plane mirror

c

2 Kaleidoscope

a

a c ● In

3 Action of a concave mirror concave mirror is also called a converging mirror. It reflects parallel rays of light to a single point or focus.
The focus of a concave mirror lies in front of the mirror and is real.

●A

4 Action of a convex mirror convex mirror is also called a diverging mirror. It reflects parallel rays of light away from the mirror in such a way that they appear to be coming from a single point or focus.
The focus of a convex mirror lies behind the mirror and is therefore virtual. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

c c a plane mirrors set at 60° b object c multiple images

c

3 Action of a concave mirror

4 Action of a convex mirror virtual focus virtual rays

real focus *02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 87

87

Reflection 3

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Definitions associated with a concave mirror

tangent

angle of incidence caustic curve concave convex focus laws of reflection

silvered surface

normal focus center of curvature

pole

principal axis

normal parabolic reflector spherical aberration tangent focal length

1 Definitions associated with a concave mirror

radius of curvature

2 Definitions associated with a convex mirror

normal

silvered surface center of curvature pole principal axis focal length radius of curvature

3 Caustic curve formation in a spherical mirror

caustic curve

spherical concave mirror can be regarded as part of a sphere whose center is called the center of curvature. The distance from there to the mirror is the radius of curvature.
● A ray of light striking the mirror is reflected through the focus (half way between the mirror and the center of curvature). The laws of reflection are satisfied. The angle of incidence and the angle of reflection are found by drawing the tangent to the mirror at the point where light rays strike it and then the normal to this tangent.
●A

2 Definitions associated with a convex mirror
●

A spherical convex mirror is also regarded as part of a sphere. The focus and center of curvature are behind the mirror. The focus is half way between the mirror and the center of curvature, thus the radius of curvature is twice the focal length.

3 Caustic curve formation in a spherical mirror

4 Elimination of caustic curve using parabolic reflector single point focus ● Light

rays parallel to the principal axis incident on a spherical mirror are focused not through a single point but through a series of points lying on the radius of curvature. This effect is spherical aberration. It results from the mirror’s focal length for marginal rays being less than for paraxial rays.

4 Elimination of caustic curve using parabolic reflector a parabolic reflector all rays parallel to the principal axis are reflected through a single focus.
● Searchlight and car headlights use parabolic reflectors. All the light is reflected as a parallel beam.
● In

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

silvered surface *02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 88

88
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words center of curvature concave convex focus

principle axis virtual image

The three rays used to find the images formed by reflection at a curved mirror Reflection 4
1 Ray parallel to principal axis

principal axis C

F

F

● In

order to locate the image of an object formed by a convex or concave mirror three rays may be drawn from the top of the object. Any two of these rays is sufficient to fix the location.
● For a convex mirror the rays must be drawn as if they are coming from the focus or the center of curvature.
● The intersecting rays locate the top of the image. The image is then drawn from the point of intersection to the principal axis.
● Once the image has been located it is possible to comment on its position relative to the center of curvature and the focus, and describe it as: upright or inverted magnified, diminished or same size real or virtual.

C

C center of curvature
F focus

Concave: reflected through focus, F

Convex: reflected as though it came from F

2 A ray arriving through the focus

C

F

F

C

1 Ray parallel to principal axis ●A

ray parallel to the principal axis which is reflected back through the focus or appears to diverge from it.

2 A ray arriving through the focus

Concave: reflected parallel to the principal axis Convex: reflected parallel to the principal axis

3 A ray returning along the same path

●A

ray through the focus which is reflected parallel to the principal axis.

3 A ray returning along the same path

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

ray passing through the center of curvature which strikes the mirror at a right angle to the path of the ray and is reflected back along the same path.

C

F

A ray arriving through the center of curvature,
C, returns along the same path

F

C

A ray arriving in line with C returns along the same path

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 89

89

Reflection 5

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Images formed by a concave mirror

C

F

O

center of curvature concave convex focus

C

P I

F
O

infinity plane virtual image

1 Images formed by a concave mirror
● The

Object O between focus, F, and pole, P: image is virtual – used as a magnifier

nature of the image formed by a concave mirror depends on the position of the object.
● When the object is between the focus and the mirror the image is upright, magnified and virtual since it is behind the mirror.
● When the object is at the focus it is not possible to locate the image since the rays normally used to locate an image are parallel. The image is said to be at infinity.
● When the object is between the center of curvature and the focus a real, inverted and magnified image is formed. ● When the object is at the center of curvature a real, inverted image the same size as the object is formed at the same point.
● When the object is beyond the center of curvature an inverted, diminished real image is formed between the focus and the center of curvature.
● An object at infinity forms an inverted real image at the focus.

Object O at F: image at infinity – used as a reflector in a spotlight

O
I

C

C
O F

F
I
Object beyond C: image is real – used as a reflector behind a projector lamp

Object between F and center of curvature, C: image is real

C

I
O

C

F

F
I

Object beyond C: image is real

Object at infinity: image is real – used in a reflecting telescope

2 Images formed by a convex mirror

3 Convex mirror giving a wide field of view

2 Images formed by a convex mirror convex mirror always forms a diminished, upright, virtual image no matter what the position of the object.

●A

3 Convex mirror giving a wide field of view

C
O

I

F

image is diminished and virtual

C

convex mirror gives a much wider field of view than a plane mirror of similar size.
● Convex mirrors are used as rear view mirrors in cars and security mirrors in shops. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 90

90
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words angle of incidence reflection refraction refractive index

vacuum

Refraction 1
1 Refraction and reflection

2 Real and apparent depth

In this example medium y is more dense than medium x.
If x is a vacuum, then refractive index sin d
=␮
sin e

␮=

real depth apparent depth

Refraction
● The

speed of light is constant for any medium. The change of speed on passing from one medium to another causes refraction as light rays bend.

1 Refraction and reflection
● When

a light ray passes into a medium with a different optical density, part of the ray is reflected and part refracted.
● When a light ray passes from a less to a more dense medium, the angle of incidence is greater than the angle of refraction. When it passes the other way, the converse is true.
● The ratio sine of angle of incidence : sine of angle of refraction is the refractive index for light passing from one medium into another. For media 1 and 2, refractive index is 1␮2. If 1 is a vacuum (or air) the ratio is the absolute refractive index, ␮2.

2 Real and apparent depth
● When

a submerged object is viewed from above the surface of water it appears closer to the surface than it is.
This is due to light rays from the object being bent away from the normal as they pass out of the water
(the more dense medium) into air
(the less dense medium).
● The ratio of the real depth of the object to its apparent depth equals the refractive index of water.

g a b h d

x y f

j

e c a b c d e f incident ray reflected ray refracted ray angle of incidence angle of refraction angle of deviation

i

g h i j air water object image position

3 Apparent depth used to measure refractive index
Focus microscope on mark.
Record reading S 1

Pour in water and focus on mark. Record reading S2 main scale

Focus on lycopodium powder and record reading S3
Vernier scale

3 Apparent depth used to measure refractive index

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Real

depth of the mark is S3–S1.
(Difference in readings when the microscope is focused on the surface of the liquid and on the mark in the empty beaker.)
● Apparent depth of the mark is S3–S2.
(Difference in readings when the microscope is focused on the surface of the liquid and on the mark in the beaker full of water.)

powder

S1

S2 beaker S3 mark *02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 91

91

Refraction 2
1 Critical angle

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

i

angle of incidence critical angle normal prism

k g h l j j f

f g h i j k l

source air water partial transmission partial reflection grazing emergence total reflection

2 Measuring critical angle

x

x
2x

n

m

o

3 Deviation through prism

m raybox n move raybox until angle x is reached o reflected ray

4 Total internal reflection

1 Critical angle
● When

a ray of light strikes the interface between two media, some is refracted, some reflected.
● When a ray of light passes from a more to a less optically dense medium (from water to air) at some angle of incidence, the angle of refraction is
90° and the ray is refracted along the interface between the two media. This is called the critical angle, c. When the angle of incidence is greater than the critical angle no light is refracted and total internal reflection takes place. 2 Measuring critical angle refractive index equals the reciprocal of the sine of the critical angle i.e. ␮ = 1/sine c.

● The

3 Deviation through prism

c

●A

light ray passing from air into a glass prism at other than a right angle is refracted towards the normal. On passing from prism back into air it is refracted away from the normal. The angle of deviation gives the overall change in direction of the light ray.

45°

a
45°
b

reflection refraction refractive index virtual image

45°

a incident ray b emergent ray c angle of deviation

45°

4 Total internal reflection
● No

6 Image formation with prism d image e object

45°

45° e 45°

5 Prism turning ray 180°

45°

●

90°

90°
45°

d

45°
45°

45°

A 45° prism can also reflect light through 180°. Thus a prism can reflect light in the same manner as a mirror.

6 Image formation with prism ●

An image viewed using a prism is virtual, inverted and the same size as the object.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

5 Prism turning ray 180°

refraction takes place when a light ray passes from air into a glass prism at a right angle to the surface.
● Total internal reflection occurs if the light ray strikes another surface inside the prism at greater than the critical angle. Ray shown is turned 90°.

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 92

92
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words absorption endoscope fiber optics refractive index

Refraction 3
1 Optical fiber

1 Optical fiber
● Each

time a light ray strikes the inside of the fiber, total internal reflection takes place. The ray passes from side to side down an optical fiber with very little loss due to absorption in the glass, and emerges almost normally.

2 Light pipe

2 Light pipe

● Several

optical fibers are taped together to form a light pipe. The many uses of light pipes include medicine, engineering, and providing illumination in difficult conditions.
● To reduce leakage of light at points of contact between fibers, each fiber is coated with cladding to promote total internal reflection. The cladding is a layer of glass of lower refractive index than the glass from which the fiber is made. ● Light pipes transport beams of light.
Changes in the orientation of the fibers along the length of the pipe present no problems.

3 Medical use

3 Medical use
● If

an image is to be used it is essential that each fiber retains the same position relative to the others in the bundle throughout its length.
● Such arrangements are more difficult to manufacture than light pipes, but are essential components of instruments such as the endoscope which a surgeon uses to view internal parts of a patient’s body.

4 Transmission of signals
© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Optical

fibers are increasingly used to carry television, telephone and computer signals. Such signals are generated as pulses of light from lasers. Optical fibers are preferred to traditional copper wires because of their high information-carrying capacity, freedom from noise caused by electrical interference, lower mass and signal loss, and greater security.

4 Transmission of signals information optical receiver

coder optical transmitter

decoder

information

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 93

93

The human eye muscles 1 The eye

muscles

lens

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

retina

accommodation cornea focal length focus lens

iris blind spot pupil optic nerve

retina

1 The eye is focused on the retina, a layer of light sensitive cells, by the cornea and the lens. When the retina detects light, an impulse is sent along the optic nerve to the brain. The point where the optic nerve leaves the eye is called the blind spot and is not itself sensitive to light. Within the wall of the eye the choroid layer contains heavy pigmentation which prevents light from being reflected.

● Light

cornea

aqueous humor muscles

vitreous humor

2 Focusing

2 Focusing

ciliary muscle relaxed

● The

retina

eye can focus on objects over a range of distances. This is called accommodation and occurs by altering the focal length of the lens.
The lens is held by suspensory ligaments attached to a ciliary body which is a ring of muscle.
● To view distant objects, the ciliary muscle relaxes. This pulls on the suspensory ligaments which, in turn, pull on the lens. The lens is stretched thinner at the center and its focal length increases.
● To view near objects, the ciliary muscle contracts. This reduces the tension on the suspensory ligaments allowing the lens to thicken at the center, decreasing its focal length.

ciliary muscle contracted

3 Control of light entering eye circular muscle contracted radial muscle relaxed

circular muscle relaxed radial muscle contracted

iris

small pupil

large pupil

amount of light entering the eye through the pupil is controlled by the iris which is composed of both circular and radial muscles.
● In bright light the circular muscles contract and the radial muscles relax.
This reduces the size of the pupil, limiting the amount of light that can enter the eye.
● In dim light the circular muscles relax and the radial muscles contract, increasing the size of the pupil, allowing as much light as possible into the eye.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

3 Control of light entering eye

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 94

94
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words concave convex cornea focus lens retina

Defects of vision
1 Short sight correction

1 Short sight correction
●A

short sighted person can see close objects, but light rays from distant objects converge in front of the retina.
Correction is made using a concave lens which makes light rays diverge slightly before being focused by the cornea and lens onto the retina.

Concave spectacle lens

Light from distant object is brought to a focus in front of the retina

2 Long sight correction

2 Long sight correction
●A

3 Rods and cones

Light from close object is brought to a focus beyond the retina

3 Rods and cones cone rod

● The

retina consists of rod and cone cells. ● Rods allow the eye to see in low light and are responsible for night vision.
They do not register objects as clearly as cones and do not respond to different colors.
● Cones work best in good illumination and are responsible for daylight vision.
They register a clear image and respond to different colors.

4 Color vision green red cone cone

100

membranes with photochemical pigment mitochondria
75

nucleus

cell body of bipolar neurone

● There

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

blue cone pigmented epithelium 4 Color vision are three types of cones, each sensitive to one of the three primary colors. It is thought that a color is perceived by one, two or three cone types being stimulated to some extent.
● Some people have red and green absorption curves so close together that they cannot distinguish between these two colors and are red-green color blind.
● Another type of color blindness results from the complete absence of one type of cone. A person with this defect can only see colors formed by mixing the two primary colors corresponding to the cone types present.

Convex spectacle lens

cell body of optic nerve fiber (ganglion cell)

light absorbtion per cent of maximum

long sighted person can see distant objects, but light rays from close objects converge behind the retina. It is corrected using a convex lens. This makes light rays converge slightly before being focused by the cornea and lens onto the retina.

50

25

optic nerve fibers 0 light rays

400 450 500 550 600 650 700 wavelength/nm *02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 95

95

Lenses 1

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

converging rays

1 Two types of image

real point image

diopter concave convex focal length focus Real image

lens prism virtual image

1 Two types of image optical system

point object virtual point image

diverging rays

Virtual image

●A

real image is formed when rays of light actually pass through it.
● An image is described as virtual if rays of light of light seem to come from it but do not actually do so.
● A convex lens is a converging lens and has real foci. A concave lens is a diverging lens and has virtual foci.

2 Three prisms forming an image optical system

point object

2 Three prisms forming an image lens can be thought of as a series of prisms. A ray of light is refracted by each prism through a common focus.

●A

3 Continuously curved surface forming an image
● Lenses

have a continuous curved surface. A light ray striking the lens at any point on one surface is refracted through a common focus.

4 Lens shapes

3 Continuously curved surface forming an image 4 Lens shapes
Converging lenses

Double convex Planoconvex

Diverging lenses

Meniscus

Double concave Planoconcave

Diverging meniscus have a variety of types and are named according to their shape. For example, a plano-convex lens has one flat and one convex side. Similarly a biconcave or double-concave lens has two concave sides.
● A meniscus lens has one concave and one convex side.
● The power of a lens is related to its focal length. The shorter the focal length the more the lens converges or diverges light. The power, F, of a lens is the reciprocal of its focal length, f, measured in meters; F = 1/f.
● The unit of power is the radian per meter, rad m-1. The focal length equals distance, in meters, divided by angle of deviation, measured in radians. This has replaced the diopter, which was
1 radian per meter.
● The sign convention for power is the same as that used for focal length i.e. positive for converging lenses and negative for diverging lenses.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Lenses

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 96

96
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words concave convex focal length focus lens

principal axis refraction Lenses 2
1 Focal points of lenses
Primary focal point of a convex lens, F

Secondary focal point of a convex lens, F´

F

F´

1 Focal points of lenses lenses have two foci since light passes through them in either direction. For symmetrical bi-convex and bi-concave lenses the foci are equal distances on either side of the lens and the focal length each side of the lens is also equal.

● All

f

f´

f = focal length

f´ = focal length

Primary focal point of a concave lens, F

Secondary focal point of a concave lens, F´

2 Ray diagrams locating image formed by lenses

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

position of the image of a small object perpendicular to the axis of a lens can be located by drawing two of three possible rays from the top of the object. The point of intersection of the rays indicates the top of the image.
● A ray parallel to the principal axis which, after being refracted by the lens, passes through the principal focus (convex lens) or appears to diverge from it (concave lens).
● A ray which passes through the
(optical) center of the lens. This ray is drawn straight with no deviation.
● For convex lens—ray which, after passing through the principal focus, is refracted by the lens and leaves it parallel to the principal axis.
● For concave lens—ray which appears to pass through the principal focus but is refracted by the lens and leaves it parallel to the principal axis.
● No matter at what distance an object is placed from a concave lens, a virtual, upright and diminished image is always formed. Concave lenses are used in spectacles to correct short sight. ● The magnification, m, of a lens is the ratio of the height of the image to the height of the object. Magnification has no unit or sign. If a magnified image is formed magnification is greater than 1, and if a diminished image is formed magnification is less than 1.

F´

F f f´

2 Ray diagrams locating image formed by lenses
Convex lens principal ray

object

principal axis

F´
F
image

f

f´

Object beyond principal focus

Concave lens

object

F

F´

principal axis

image

principal ray

eye

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 97

97

Lenses 3

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT

1 Position and nature of image formed by convex lens

F
2F

2F

Key words convex diverging lens focal length lens virtual image

F

Images formed by convex lenses image formed by a convex lens depends on its distance from the lens.
● The position of an image formed by a object can be found by calculation using the formula:
● The

object distance more than twice focal length

F
2F

2F

F

from the image to the center of the lens, f—focal length of the lens.
● The focal length of a convex lens is taken as positive, that of a diverging lens as negative. A positive value for u or v indicates that it is real, a negative value indicates it is virtual.

object distance exactly twice focal length

F
2F

1/u + 1/v = 1/f u—distance between the object and the center of the lens, v—distance

2F

F

1 Position and nature of image formed by convex lens object distance between one and two focal lengths

F
2F

2F

F im ag ea t in fin ity

object distance exactly focal length

2F
2F

F

object distance less than focal length

F

an object is at a distance of more than twice the focal length of the lens a real, inverted and diminished image is formed.
● When an object is at a distance of exactly twice the focal length of the lens a real, inverted image which is exactly the same size as the object is formed at the same distance on the opposite side of the lens.
● When an object is at a distance between one and two focal lengths from the lens a real, magnified inverted image is formed.
● When an object is at a distance exactly equal to the focal length of the lens the rays drawn to locate the image are parallel. An image is said to form at infinity. ● When an object is at a distance of less than the focal length a virtual, upright and magnified image is formed.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 98

98
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words diffraction dispersion electromagnetic spectrum prism refraction spectrum wavelength

Color red light

1 Producing a pure spectrum

1 Producing a pure spectrum ● Visible

light is a small part of the electromagnetic spectrum. Each color corresponds to light of a different wavelength. ● White light is a mixture of light of all colors. When white light passes through a prism different wavelengths are diffracted by different amounts.
This effect is called dispersion and the resulting visible spectrum of colors can be shown on a screen.
● In the visible spectrum there is a gradual color change from one color to the next. The spectrum, however, is shown as consisting of seven colors; red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet.
● The colors of the visible spectrum correspond to the colors of the rainbow. A rainbow is formed when sunlight (which is white light) is refracted by droplets of water in the atmosphere and dispersion takes place. ● The red light has the longest wavelength and is refracted the least while the violet light has the shortest wavelength and is refracted the most.

2 Recombining white light

glass prism

achromatic lens violet light

bright source of white light

achromatic lens

white screen

2 Recombining while light prism red light

violet light

eye

prism

3 Newton’s disc
Orange

Yellow
Red

● If

a pair of prisms, one upright and one inverted, are placed next to each other the first prism disperses white light into its component colors while the second recombines the colors forming white light.

Green

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

3 Newton’s disc
● Newton’s

disc consists of a series of seven segments corresponding to the colors of the visible spectrum. When the disc is rotated rapidly about its center, the colors appear to merge forming white light.

Violet

Blue
Indigo

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 99

99

Color mixing
1 Primary colors

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

2 Mixing of light ray box

ray box

red

yellow

magenta

1 Primary colors red filter

green

absorption primary colors reflection secondary colors

blue green filter blue filter region of white light

white cyan ● Red,

blue and green are the three primary colors of light. All other colors are made by combinations of primary colors.
● The secondary colors, yellow, magenta and cyan, are formed by mixing two primary colors.

2 Mixing of light

3 Colored light – absorption and reflection white light

green light

● Mixing

of light occurs by addition. light forms when light of the three primary colors is mixed.
● When a secondary color is mixed with its complementary color white light is formed. ● White

red light

3 Colored light—absorption and reflection
● An

red light absorbed blue light absorbed

red light absorbed

5 Mixing of pigments

4 Primary pigments

orange yellow green

indigo blue green

object’s color is determined by the light it absorbs and reflects.
● A green box appears green when viewed in white light. It absorbs red and blue light and reflects green light.
● The same box when viewed in red light appears black since it absorbs the red light and reflects no light.

4 Primary pigments
● Primary

pigments are colors which cannot be made by mixing other colored pigments. These pigments are used to make paints.

cyan

5 Mixing of pigments

yellow

blue

magenta

yellow paint blue paint green

red white green paint of pigments occurs by subtraction. ● Paints are seldom pure colors but mixtures of colors in which one color may predominate.
● Blue paint appears blue because it absorbs all the colors in white light except green, blue and indigo. Yellow paint absorbs all the colors except orange, yellow and green. When the two paints are mixed, all the colors of white light are absorbed except green, which is reflected. Mixing blue paint and yellow paint makes green paint.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Mixing

green

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 100

100
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words convex focal length focus lens magnification objective lens virtual image

Optical instruments 1 converging lens

1 Magnifying glass

virtual image

retinal image

object

1 Magnifying glass
●A

magnifying glass consists of a single convex lens. When in use the object is placed so that the distance to the lens is less than the focal length of the lens and the eye is placed close to the other side of the lens.
● A magnifying glass produces an upright, magnified virtual image.
Magnification, m, equals the height of the image/ height of the object.
● The magnification is also equal to v/u. v—distance from the image to the center of the lens. u—distance from

the object to the center of the lens.
●m

eye

2 Microscope

eyepiece lens = v/u; using the lens equation
1/u + 1/v = 1/f it follows that m = v/f – 1

●

eye

eye

eyepiece lens image formed by objective

A lens with a short focal length thus has a large magnifying power.

top point of final image principal focus of eyepiece lens

image formed by objective principal focus of eyepiece lens

2 Microscope

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

magnifying glass is also a simple microscope, but it has limitations. The focal length of a lens can be decreased by making its surfaces more curved, but this results in serious distortion of the image.
● A compound microscope uses two convex lenses of short focal lengths.
The objective lens forms a real, magnified and inverted image of an object placed just outside its principal focus. The image is just inside the principal focus of the second lens or eyepiece, which acts as a magnifying glass and produces a magnified virtual image of the first image.
● Microscopes commonly have a choice of objective lenses ranging from low power x10 to high power x40. They may also have a choice of eyepieces such as x5 and x10. The total magnification of a compound microscope is the product of the powers of the objective lens and the eyepiece. principal focus of objective principal focus of objective objective lens objective lens object

object final image

Compound microscope in normal use

Compound microscope with image at infinity

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 101

101

Optical instruments 2

WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words

1 Simple telescope objective lens

image formed by objective

principal foci of objective and eyepiece eyepiece lens

eye

concave convex focal length focus infinity objective lens

reflecting telescope refracting telescope virtual image

Refracting telescopes
● Refracting

telescopes use lenses, but large lenses are heavy, difficult to support and have two ground surfaces. Reflecting telescopes use mirrors which can be made much larger, are more easily supported and have a single ground surface.

light from distant object

1 Simple telescope objective lens

simple telescope has two convex lenses. The objective has a long focal length while the eyepiece has a short focal length. The lenses are arranged so that their principal foci coincide.
● The objective lens forms a real, diminished, inverted image of a distant object at its principal focus. The eyepiece acts as a magnifying glass forming a magnified virtual image of the first image. In normal adjustment, this image is at infinity.
●A

2 Terrestrial telescope image formed by objective

eyepiece lens

eye

2 Terrestrial telescope image formed by erecting lens light from distant object lens inverts image formed by objective and is positioned to give unit magnification

3 Galilean telescope light from distant object

top point of final image

●A

simple telescope produces an inverted image. This is a problem for viewing objects on Earth.
● A terrestrial telescope has an erecting lens between objective and eyepiece.
The image of the objective forms at twice the focal length of the erecting lens. A second real, upright image of the same size forms at the same distance on the opposite side of the inverting lens. The eyepiece forms a magnified third image at infinity.

3 Galilean telescope

objective lens eyepiece lens

image that would be formed by objective lens in absence of eyepiece lens

Galilean telescope uses a convex objective lens of large focal length and a concave eyepiece of small focal length to produce an erect image.
● The image of the objective lens forms at the principal focus on the opposite side of the eyepiece. The converging light rays falling on the eyepiece behave like a virtual object and an upright virtual image forms at infinity.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

eye

*02 Sound,Light(46-102).qxd

12/11/08

3:33 PM

Page 102

102
WAVES, SOUND, AND LIGHT
Key words atom electron energy levels laser phase

photon radiation Lasers
1 Spontaneous emission
E2

E2 electron photon of frequency (E2–E1)/h

1 Spontaneous emission atoms are excited, electrons are promoted to high energy levels. They normally return to lower energy levels spontaneously. Radiation is emitted in all directions and is incoherent.

● When

2 Stimulated emission a photon of exactly the correct energy approaches an excited atom, an electron may fall to a lower energy level and emit another photon with the same phase, frequency and direction of travel as the first, which is unaffected. This is called stimulated emission and is the basis of a laser.

● If

E1

E1 excited atom

spontaneous emission 2 Stimulated emission
E2

E2 stimulating photon

electron

stimulating photon of frequency (E2–E1)/h

frequency
(E2–E1)/h
stimulated photon E1

E1 excited atom

3 Optical pumping

stimulated emission ● In

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

a laser there must be more electrons in upper energy levels than lower (an inverted population).
● An inverted population can be produced by illuminating laser material with light (optical pumping).
● In a two energy level system, when the electron population in the higher level increases, the pumping radiation induces stimulated emission so no build up of electrons occurs.
● In a three energy level system, the pumping radiation promotes electrons from E1 to E3 which fall to E2 by spontaneous emission. An inverted population arises between E2 and E1.
● Spontaneous emission of a photon due to an electron transition between
E2 and E1 may trigger stimulated emission of more photons, giving the laser effect.

3 Optical pumping
E3

3 spontaneous emission

E2

2 stimulated photon of frequency (E2–E1)/h

stimulated photon of frequency (E3–E1)/h

E1

1

4 Ruby laser

quartz flash tube electrode 4 Ruby laser
●A

ruby rod laser, a three-level laser, consists of a synthetic crystal of aluminum oxide containing small amounts of chromium.
● Optical pumping radiation is provided by intense flashes of yellow-green light from a flash tube. Electrons emit red light on falling to level 1.

reflecting end intense laser beam

thinly silvered end ruby rod
(5 cm × 1 cm)

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 103

103

Electric charge

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Positive and negative poly(ethene) strip negatively charged uncharged metallized polystyrene ball

atom charge electron ion neutron

ball charged after contact with poly(ethene) strip

nylon thread positively charged acetate strip

nucleus proton 1 Positive and negative a negatively charged strip is placed close to a neutral polystyrene ball the ball becomes polarized.
Electrons on the ball are repelled by the negatively charged strip, resulting in the side of the ball facing the strip becoming positively charged and the side facing away from the strip negatively charged. The ball is therefore attracted to the strip.
● A similar effect is observed when a positively charged strip is placed close to the same ball. In this case, the side of the ball facing the strip becomes negatively charged and the side facing away becomes positively charged. The result is the same and the ball is attracted to the strip.
● A negatively charged strip repels a negatively charged ball but attracts a positively charged ball. Like charge repel while unlike charge attract.
● When

–

+

Attraction

Attraction

ball charged after contact with poly(ethene) strip poly(ethene) strip negatively charged positively charged acetate strip

+ –

– –
Like charges repel

Unlike charges attract

2 Atomic model
2 Atomic model

electron

atom consists of a nucleus containing protons and neutrons, surrounded by electrons. Electric charge is the result of loss (to give a positive charge) or gain (to give a negative charge) of electrons. The particles in the nucleus of an atom remain unchanged.
● An atom can become an ion either by the loss or gain of one or more electrons. ● An

–

proton

ion

neutral atom

neutron

+

+

+

electron removed –

Ionization

– electron 3 Charging by friction
3 Charging by friction
– –
– –
– –
–
Before rubbing

duster

poly(ethene) strip

duster

–

+

+
+ +
+ +
+
+
+ +
+ + +
+

+

After rubbing – electrons transferred by rubbing together

charging by friction there is no imbalance of electrons on either the poly(ethene) rod or the duster.
● When the rod is rubbed with the duster electrons are transferred from the duster to the rod. The result is that the duster becomes positively charged while the rod becomes negatively charged. As a result the poly(ethene) rod and duster will be attracted to each other.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

poly(ethene) strip

● Before

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 104

104
ELECTRICITY
Key words charge conductor electron electroscope insulator The electroscope
1 Gold-leaf electroscope metal cap wooden case perspex insulator glass windows

1 Gold-leaf electroscope gold leaf electroscope is used to detect electric charge. When the metal cap becomes charged this is transferred to the metal plate and gold leaf. Since the metal plate and the gold leaf carry the same charge they repel each other and the gold leaf rises.

●A

gold leaf metal plate

2 Charge-sharing

charged poly(ethene) strip

– – – – – – – –
– – – –– – – – – –
–
–– –
–

2 Charge-sharing
●A

poly(ethene) strip becomes negatively charged because electrons are transferred to it when it is rubbed.
If a charged strip is placed in contact with an uncharged strip no charge is transferred because poly(ethene) is an electrical insulator and electrons are unable to flow through it.
● If a negatively charged strip is placed on the metal cap of an electroscope charge is transferred because metals are electrical conductors and electrons are able to flow through them. The gold leaf is repelled by the metal plate indicating they carry the same negative charge. charged poly(ethene) strip

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

a negatively charged poly(ethene) strip is placed on the metal cap of a negatively charged electroscope electrons flow from the strip into the metal part of the electroscope. The gold leaf moves even further away from the metal plate indicating that the amount of negative charge on the electroscope has increased.
● If a positively charged acetate strip is placed on the metal cap of a negatively charged electroscope electrons flow from the metal part of the electroscope to the strip. The gold leaf falls nearer to the metal plate indicating that the amount of negative charge on the electroscope has decreased. conductor flow of electrons – – – –
– – – – – –
–
Insulator in contact with another insulator– no sharing

–
––
––
–
Sharing between insulator and conductor

3 Testing the sign of a charge
– – –
–– –
–

negatively charged poly(ethene) strip

–
––
–

3 Testing the sign of a charge ● If

uncharged poly(ethene) strip

–
–
– ––
–
negatively charged acetate strip

Charged electroscope –
–
– ––
–
electron flow

+
++ – –
– – –
– –

electron flow Bring up negatively charged poly(ethene) strip –
–
– ––
–
Bring up negatively charged acetate strip

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 105

105

Charging by induction
1 Charging by induction
A

ELECTRICITY
Key words

2 Charging an electroscope by induction B

insulating stands conductor electron electroscope induction insulator

insulating stands 1 Charging by induction
● Electrons

leaf plate Two uncharged metal spheres
(A and B in contact)
Uncharged electroscope

electron flow

S

S

A

B electron flow

Bring up negatively charged strip (S)
Bring up charged strip S

S

S

A

electron flow flow through electrical conductors. ● When a negatively charged strip is placed close to but not touching an insulated metal ball, electrons are repelled from the side next to the strip and accumulate on the other side.
One side of the ball becomes positively charged and the other becomes negatively charged.
● When the metal ball is in contact with a second metal ball electrons flow; negative charge accumulates on the second ball, leaving the first ball short of electrons—positively charged. The balls retain their opposite charge when they are separated and the charged strip removed.
● No charge was transferred from the strip to the balls. The strip simply induced electrons to move from one ball to the other.

2 Charging an electroscope by induction

B

an electroscope is uncharged there is no repulsion between the gold leaf and the metal plate.
● When a negatively charged strip is placed close to but not touching the metal cap, it repels electrons from the cap leaving it positively charged.
Electrons flow to the metal plate and gold leaf which become negatively charged and repel each other.
● With the charged strip in place, the metal cap retains induced positive charge. Electrons flow to earth if the cap is touched; both metal plate and gold leaf lose negative charge and no longer repel. Electroscope is overall positively charged.
● When the charged strip is removed, positive charge flows through the electroscope; the metal plate and gold leaf again repel as they are now positively charged.

A

B

Move spheres apart
Earth top with finger

A

A
Remove S
A is now positively charged
B is now negatively charged

B

B
Remove finger then remove S
Electroscope is left positively charged © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 106

106
ELECTRICITY
Key words charge corona electron electrostatic precipitator van de Graaff

1 van de Graaff generator negative charge is produced on the poly(ethene) roller by friction between the roller and the rubber belt, inducing a positive charge on an earthed metal comb which is sprayed off the points onto the outside of the belt and carried upwards towards another metal comb. When the positively charged belt reaches the comb the negative charge induced on it is sprayed off the points leaving the dome positively charged.

Applications of electrostatics 1
1 van de Graaff generator

g

2 Electric wind

a

●A

2 Electric wind accumulates at the most highly curved parts of an object.
● Charge accumulates at each of the four points of the mill and is discharged to the surrounding air by point or corona discharge. The “wind” streams away from each point causing the mill to spin around.

i h l j b

f e g

● Charge

3 Lightning conductor results from a build up of negative charge in the atmosphere which induces a positive charge on structures below. Electrons flow to earth, or discharge, from the atmosphere in a flash of light.
● A tall structure may be damaged by lightning discharging through it. A lightning conductor, a thick strip of good conducting material such as brass or copper, provides lightning with a low-resistance path to earth.

j

c

d k a b c d metal dome e metal base insulating column f poly(ethene) roller rotating rubber belt g metal combs electronic motor

3 Lightning conductor

h i j k l

perspex roller wire insulating supports
Hamilton’s mill direction of rotation

4 Electrostatic precipitator

● Lightning

4 Electrostatic precipitator electrostatic precipitator prevents ash particles in wastes gases from coalfired power stations from being released into the atmosphere.
● The particles become positively charged on passing through a positively charged wire grid. They are attracted to earthed metal plates where they are deposited. Periodic mechanical shaking removes the ash.

m

t

n r y

o p q

v

u

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● An

w

x m negatively charged s base of clouds n positive ions o high charge density p electric flow q thick copper conductor r pointed end of conductor s large metal plate buried in the ground

t positively charged fine wire grid u chimney v metal plates w earth connection to metal plates x smoke and dust particles rising y positively charged particles deposited on plates

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 107

107

Applications of electrostatics 2

ELECTRICITY
Key words charge earth potential difference

1 Electrostatic powder coating a b c d e d

compressed air powder hopper fluidized powder particle charging region earthed object

e

1 Electrostatic powder coating ● The

powder coating is fluidized in a stream of compressed air. As the stream passes out of the gun the particles become positively charged.
The object to be coated is earthed and therefore negatively charged relative to the powder particles. The powder particles are attracted to the object and will adhere to it.

c a b

2 Ink jet printer

2 Ink jet printer h i

j

ink reservoir pump ultrasonic oscillator gun charging cylinder output from computer l deflection plates m paper n gutter

● The

l

k

f g h i j k m

++++
++++

n

g

jet of ink becomes positively charged as it passes through the charging cylinder. The potential difference across the deflecting plates is varied in such a way as to direct the jet of ink onto the paper in a pattern corresponding to what is to be printed. ● Since the jet of ink is positively charged any droplets of ink that form will also be positively charged and will be repelled. These droplets collect in the gutter and are recycled to the ink reservoir. 3 Electrostatic finger printing f

3 Electrostatic finger printing r o high voltage charger p metal plate q fine powder gains a positive charge r specimen s powder becomes negatively charged

s

+

+

o p +

+

+

q

positive terminal of the charger is attached to the metal plate while the negative terminal is attached to the specimen. ● A dark background of fine particles is sprinkled on the metal plate where they become positively charged.
● The larger particles on the specimen become negatively charged and are attracted to the positively charged metal plate. Since the plate is covered in a dark background of fine particles the pattern of the larger particles from the specimen are easily seen.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 108

108
ELECTRICITY
Key words charge corona electron photoconductive cell Applications of electrostatics 3
The complete process for a rotating drum copier document slit

1 The complete process for a rotating drum copier

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Xerography—from

the Greek words for “dry” and “writing” is another word for the photocopying process, referring to the fact that the process does not use liquid ink.
● When a document is placed on the platen of a photocopier, the cover is closed to exclude light and the button is pressed to start the copying procedure. ● The charging corotron, containing a fine corona wire, is charged to several thousand volts. The photoconductive surface of the receptor plate (in the form of a rotating drum) passes the charging corotron and the surface of the receptor plate gains a positive charge of several hundred volts.
● At the same time, traces of bright light are seen escaping around the edges of the cover. This light captures an image of the document; the image is reflected by angled mirrors and focused onto the surface of the receptor plate.
● The light areas of the image cause the receptor plate to lose electrons, while positive charge remains in the dark areas. An image of the document is thus formed as a pattern of electric charge on the receptor plate.
● The receptor plate rotates past the developing unit. Toner particles are mixed with beads which transfer them to a roller. The roller brings toner into contact with the receptor plate, where it adheres to the charged areas of the drum (representing the dark parts of the document).
● A sheet of paper passing into the machine is charged by a corotron. This charge causes transfer of the toner from the receptor plate.
● The surface of the paper is heated to fuse the toner to the paper, and it passes out of the machine.

plate

mirror

toner hopper

lens

mirror

carrier beads and toner powder

charging corotron discharge lamp fur brush
a.c. corotron

developing unit paper charging corotron paper feed rollers

fusing lamp receptor plate

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 109

109

Applications of electrostatics 4
1 Receptor plate

ELECTRICITY
Key words charge neutral photoconductive cell reflection 2 Charging receptor plate corotron photo-receptor plate 1 Receptor plate
●

++

++

The receptor plate is coated with a photoconductor such as selenium (or the less toxic poly(vinyl) carbazole) .
Electrons are released when light shines on a photoconductor.

E.h.t.

2 Charging receptor plate

selenium
(photoconductor)

●

+ –

aluminum
(conductor)

aluminum oxide
(insulator)

The receptor plate becomes positively charged by rotating it in contact with a corotron. 3 Exposure
The document to be copied is illuminated. Light reflected by the document is focused and reflected by a mirror onto the receptor plate.
● Light reflected from white areas of the document falls on the receptor plate.
Areas of the coating receiving light release electrons, neutralizing the positive charge carried. Dark areas of the document (text or illustration) do not reflect light. No light from these areas is received by the receptor plate so those parts of the receptor plate remain positively charged.
● An image of the document composed of positive charge is formed.
●

4 Developing using toner

lens

back of mirror

toner powder

photo-receptor plate roller latent image latent image on receptor plate

5 Transfer onto paper

6 Forming permanent copy radiant heater

heat roller

4 Developing using toner
Toner consists of very fine particles of carbon black which are given negative charge. When they come into contact with the receptor plate they adhere to the positively charged areas as the receptor plate rotates.
● This results in a black image of the original sheet of paper composed of toner particles on the receptor plate.
●

5 Transfer onto paper
●

The image formed on the receptor plate is transferred to a sheet of paper.

6 Forming permanent copy
●

paper

pressure roller

The paper passes between rollers which heat and compress it, fixing the toner powder in place.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

3 Exposure

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 110

110
ELECTRICITY
Key words alpha particle charge earth electricity electron

electrostatics ionizing radiation isotope radioactivity

Problems created by electrostatic charge
1 Friction and static charge
Hair brushes gain static from friction of combing.

Balloons rubbed on garments contain static electricity and can stick to walls.

1 Friction and static charge electricity is generated whenever two materials touch and then separate. Electrons are transferred between the materials leaving one positively charged the other negatively charged.
● A build-up of static electricity occurs when the rate of charge generation is greater than the rate of charge dissipation. The rapid build up of a very high potential leads to electrostatic discharge (ESD) sparks and shocks.
● Static

2 Earthing static charge
2 Earthing static charge electricity may result from the movement of fluidized solids, liquids or gases through or over a material.
Precautions must be taken to prevent
ESD where the generation of sparks could result in fires and/or explosions.
● In manufacturing processes involving transferring fluidized solids, such as flour, chocolate powder etc. pipes must be earthed.
● The hoses used to transfer gas and diesel into vehicles in petrol stations are made of a special form of conducting rubber.
● The charge which builds up on the surface of aircraft during flight is discharged to earth on landing.

Hoses used to transfer gasoline are made from conducting rubber.

● Static

3 Neutralizing static charge © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● During

the manufacture of poly(ethene) and other plastic film, charge builds up on the film. If it is not neutralized the film cannot be wound onto a roller safely as each layer repels the previous layer, since they carry the same charge.
● The charge is neutralized using a charge bar. This contains a strip of the radioactive isotope polonium-210 which emits radiation in the form of alpha particles, ionizing the air around them. These ions neutralize the charge of the poly(ethene).

3 Neutralizing static charge
Newly made plastic film creates positive static charges on the outside and negative charges on the inside.

Installing a neutralizing bar removes positive outside charges.

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 111

111

Capacitance

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Capacitance varies with dielectric used

capacitance charge dielectric dipole electric field

electroscope nucleus permittivity potential difference

1 Capacitance varies with dielectric used
●A

charged metal plates

charged metal plates

2 Capacitance varies with area of plates

3 Capacitance varies with separation of the plates

dielectric material (insulator)

2 Capacitance varies with area of plates
● Capacitance

increases as the area of overlap between the positively and negatively charged plates increases.

3 Capacitance varies with separation of the plates
● Capacitance

increases as the separation distance between the positively and negatively charged plates decreases.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

air

metal plate is shown to be charged by connecting it to an electroscope.
The gold leaf rises indicating that it and the metal plate carry similar charge and thus repel each other.
● There is an electric field between positively and negatively charged plates which are placed next to, but not touching, each other.
● Positively charged nuclei of dielectric material molecules are attracted towards the negatively charged plate, electrons move the other way.
● Dielectric molecules become distorted with excess positive charge at one end and excess negative charge at the other, forming electric dipoles.
● Within the dielectric, positive and negative ends of adjacent dipoles balance out, but the surfaces are charged with opposite sign to the plate they touch. Potential difference between the plates is reduced.
● The force between oppositely charged plates is always reduced when an insulating material replaces a vacuum.
The material is said to have permittivity. A material with a high permittivity significantly reduces the force between the plates compared to a vacuum (or air).
● Capacitance increases if the plates are separated by a dielectric with a high permittivity. *03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:41 PM

Page 112

112
ELECTRICITY
Key words alternating current (AC) anode capacitance capacitor cathode current dielectric electrolytic capacitor

Practical capacitors
1 Non-electrolytic capacitors silvered mica

polyester

1 Non-electrolytic capacitors ● Capacitors

have many uses in electrical circuits.
● Choice of capacitor depends on its value, stability and the frequency of any alternating current that will flow.
● Dielectric material breaks down at a particular potential gradient. The nature and thickness of the dielectric determines the working potential difference of a capacitor.
● Waxed paper capacitors are only used where frequencies are less than 1
MHz. Their stability is also poor. Mica, plastic and ceramic capacitors are more stable and can be used at much higher frequencies.

polystyrene

ceramic

symbol

2 Electrolytic capacitors

tubular

2 Electrolytic capacitors
● Electrolytic

capacitors have much higher capacitance.
● Their dielectric is a thin (as little as
10-4 mm) film of aluminum oxide, formed by passing a current through a strip of paper soaked in aluminum borate sandwiched between two strips of aluminum foil. A layer of oxide forms on one aluminum strip (the anode). The remaining borate solution is connected to the second aluminum strip which becomes the cathode.
● A current of around 1 mA must pass through the capacitor in the correct direction to maintain the dielectric.
The anode is marked with a + and must be connected at a higher potential difference than the cathode.

can

symbol

3 Variable capacitors

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

3 Variable capacitors
●A

variable capacitor, used to tune radio receivers, consists of two sets of interleaving plates. The capacitance is determined by the degree of overlap.
● Air is the dielectric in such capacitors and losses are low at all frequencies.
Breakdown occurs at relatively low potential differences so the dielectric should be relatively thick.

plates

insulator

symbol

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 113

113

Color coding and size

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Non-electrolytic capacitors

capacitance capacitor electrolytic capacitor 4.7pf
+

500µF
100V

–
1 Non-electrolytic capacitors unit of capacitance, the farad, F, is a large unit so microfarads, ␮F (10-6
F) or nanofarads, nF (10-9F), or picofarads, pF (10-12F) are used.
● The capacitance of non-electrolytic capacitors is generally limited to a few microfarads, and in the case of mica capacitors, the limit is around 0.01 ␮F.
Electrolytic capacitors can have values up to 100,000 ␮F.
● The

2 Identifying size capacitor first digit second digit

letter
F
G
J
K
M

multiplier digit

4 74 K

tolerance

tolerance
± 1%
± 2%
± 5%
± 10%
± 20%

3 Color coding first digit second digit multiplier tolerance voltage 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

black brown red orange yellow green blue violet gray white color black brown red tolerance
± 5%
± 10%
± 20%

2 Identifying capacitor size
● Large

capacitors generally have their value printed on them. For smaller capacitors different conventions exist.
● There are a variety of different marking conventions used to indicate the size of a capacitor.
● Small disk type capacitors may carry three numbers followed by a letter.
The first two numbers indicate the first and second digits of the capacitance and the third number is the multiplier
(as a power of 10). From these values the capacitance is given in pF. The letter indicates the tolerance.

3 Color coding color brown red yellow

4 Capacitors in a circuit

voltage
100
250
400

● Ceramic

capacitors may be coded by a series of colored bands. The first two numbers indicate the first and second digits of the capacitance and the third number is the multiplier. The fourth and fifth bands correspond to tolerance and operating voltage.

4 Capacitors in a circuit capacitors are connected in series in a circuit their combined capacitance, C, is given by:
1=1+1+1
C C1 C2 C3
● When

capacitors are connected in parallel in a circuit their combined capacitance, C, is given by:

Capacitors in series

Capacitors in parallel

C = C1 + C2 + C3

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 114

114
ELECTRICITY
Key words charge conduction electric field electron Electric fields
2 Electric field patterns

1 Attractive and repulsive forces
C

1 Attractive and repulsive forces ●A

body may be positively charged
(having a shortage of electrons) or negatively charged (having an excess of electrons).
● Bodies having the same charge repel each other, those with opposite charge attract each other.

A

B

Two positive point charges

2 Electric field patterns on an isolated conducting sphere is uniformly spread over its surface due to the repulsion of like charges, resulting in a radial field pattern. The field outside the sphere is the same as it would be if the charge acted in the center of the sphere.
● Electric fields are represented by electric field lines. The direction of these lines is the direction in which a positive charge would accelerate. Since a positive charge would be repelled by another positive charge, it would accelerate away from it, thus electric field lines point away from a positive charge. Conversely, a positive charge would be attracted towards a negative charge thus electric field lines point towards a negative charge. The number of lines per unit cross-section area is proportional to the field strength. ● Charge

3 Electric force field

F
F

a
Two opposite point charges

3 Electric force field

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

two positive point charges are brought close together electric field lines are directed away from both showing that a repulsive force exists between them. There is a similar pattern of field lines for two negative point charges except that the field lines are directed towards the charges.
● When a positive and a negative point charge are brought close together, electric field lines are directed away from the positive charge towards the negative charge, showing that a force of attraction exists between them.

F b Point charge next to a charged sheet

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 115

115

Electric fields and
Gauss’s theorem

ELECTRICITY
Key words charge dipole electric field electric field strength 1 Electric field line direction and magnitude of field at P

Gauss’s law permittivity tangent

1 Electric field line
● The

P

direction and magnitude of field at Q

direction of the field at any point on an electric field line is the tangent to the field line at that point.

2 Electric field of a dipole
Q

● The

2 Electric field due to a dipole
–Q

Q+

direction of an electric field line is given by the direction in which a positive charge would accelerate along it. Since like charges repel and unlike charges attract, field lines are directed away from a positive charge and towards a negative charge.
● The resultant field is parallel to the axis of the dipole.

3 Simple Gaussian surface
●A

direction and magnitude of field at –Q

resultant field direction and magnitude of field at +Q

Gaussian surface can be any shape that completely encloses a volume of space and is often referred to as a closed surface.
● When a sphere is charged the electric field is spread symmetrically over its surface. ● A small positive point charge Q placed at any point in an electric field experiences a force, F. Field strength,
E, at that point is: E = F
Q
● Calculate

3 Simple Gaussian surface electric field is radial and same magnitude at all points on the surface

field strength, E (in a vacuum) of point charge +Q at position P (distance between P and Q
= r by considering small charge +Q0 at
P. Using Coulomb’s law, force F on Q0 is: F = QQ0
4␲r2⑀0
E is force per unit charge (E = F
Q0

so F= E

spherical Gaussian surface

Q0

Therefore E = Q
4␲r2⑀0
(⑀0 is the permittivity of a vacuum).
● Charge density, ␴, is charge per unit area. Since a sphere’s surface area is s
4␲r2 : ␴ = Q / (4␲r2). E = ␴/⑀0

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

spherically symmetric charge distribution

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 116

116
ELECTRICITY
Key words charge conduction earth electron induction neutral polarization van de Graaff

Electric current 1
1 Showing electric current is a flow of electric charge c h

1 Showing an electric current is a flow of electric charge the van de Graaff is running, positive charge accumulates on the dome. If a metal plate is connected to the dome by a conducting wire, positive charge will also accumulate on the metal plate.
● The metallized ball becomes polarized due to induction. The side facing the positively charged plate will become negatively charged and therefore attracted to the plate.
● Once the ball touches the positive plate it acquires a positive charge and is then repelled by the positive plate and attracted by the second metal plate which is earthed to the base of the van de Graaff generator.
● When the ball touches the second plate it acquires electrons and becomes neutral. The process of being attracted to the positively charged plate is then repeated.
● Electrons move around the circuit carrying charge. The current produced causes a deflection on the ammeter.
● When

g

e d b f a

A i a b c d e

van de Graaff generator rubber belt metal dome copper wire insulating handles

f g h i metal plates metalized ping-pong ball nylon thread sensitve ammeter

2 Metallized ball transfers charge

2 Metallized ball transfers charge © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

direction in which a current moves around a circuit is a cause of some confusion. Prior to the properties of electrons being known, in the nineteenth century, scientists decided to adopt a convention whereby a current flowed from positive to negative.
● Subsequent to this, it was discovered that electrons carried a negative charge and therefore actually flowed from negative to positive in a circuit.
● As a result we talk about conventional current as flowing from positive to negative, and actual current flowing from negative to positive.

A flow of positive charge = a conventional current

A flow of negative charge = a flow of electrons

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 117

117

Electric current 2

ELECTRICITY
Key words

V-I characteristics
1 Ohmic conductor

diode direct proportion
Ohm’s law resistance 2 Filament lamp lower current caused by decreasing resistance

I

I

semiconductor thermionic valve thermistor 1 Ohmic conductor
● When

V

V

the current flowing through a conductor, such as a metal wire, is directly proportional to the potential difference allied across it the current is said to be ohmic and obeys Ohm’s law. Its resistance does not alter with the potential difference applied across it provided its temperature remains constant. 2 Filament lamp
●A

3 Thermistor

filament lamp is ohmic over a narrow range of current. However, as the current increases, the temperature of the tungsten wire increases until it becomes white hot, increasing the resistance of the wire causing the curve to become less steep.

4 Thermionic valve

higher current caused by decreasing resistance

saturation current

I

I zero reverse current 3 Thermistor thermistor is made of semiconductor material. As its temperature increases its resistance decreases causing the graph to bend upwards.

●A

V

V

4 Thermionic valve thermionic valve passes current in one direction only. Current increases with potential difference up to the saturation current where the resistance of the valve begins to increase. ●A

I

small saturation current 6 Semiconductor diode mA I

5 Gas

spark discharge ● The

saturation current of a gas is relatively small. A spark discharge results in a rapid decrease in resistance.

V

V

6 Semiconductor diode
● Current

µA very small reverse current avalanche breakdown

passes when the potential difference is applied in one direction but is almost zero when the polarity is reversed. A diode has a small resistance when the current flows in one direction and a large resistance when it flows in the other. If a large potential is applied in the reverse direction, the diode breaks down.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

5 Gas

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 118

118
ELECTRICITY
Key words battery charge current electron

Electric current 3
1 Electric current direction
+ –

+

–

1 Electric current direction convention, all current is assumed to be due to the movement of positive charges therefore when current direction is marked on a circuit it is from positive to negative.
● In metals an electric current is the movement of negative charge in the form of electrons. Electrons move from negative to positive i.e. in the opposite direction to the conventional current. To differentiate from the conventional current, this is called the real current.
● By

2 Flow of electric charge
● In

a circuit charge is provided by a battery or other source. It flows along a conductor when there is a potential difference, V between points.
,
● The unit of charge is the coulomb (C).
One coulomb is the quantity of electrical charge carried past a given point in a circuit when a current of
1 ampere flows for 1 second.

Direction of coventional current

Direction of real current

2 Flow of electric charge
V

Q

Q

Q

Q

3 Current in a conductor
●A

conductor of length, L, and crosssection area, A, has n “free” electrons per unit volume. Each electron carries a charge e.
Volume of conductor = AL
Number of free electrons = nAL
Total charge, Q, of free electrons = nALe charge, Q, travels length, L, in time, t, with an average drift velocity of
v. The resulting steady current, I, is given by:

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

I = Q = nALe t t but v = L and therefore t = L t v

3 Current in a conductor

conductor

e

e

so the drift velocity is given by: v=I nAe

For a current of 1 ampere passing through an SWG gauge copper wire the drift velocity is 0.6 mm s-1.

l

e

A

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 119

119

Electric current 4

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Kirchhoff’s first law

charge conservation of energy, law of current electromotive force (e.m.f). potential difference

1 Kirchhoff’s first law

l

a circuit, the current arriving equals the current leaving.
● Since current is the transfer of charge, charge is conserved and flows in a circuit without being destroyed or accumulating at any particular point.
● This can be verified by measuring the current at different points in a circuit.
● In

A

A

l1

2 Kirchhoff’s second law
● Around

A

2 Kirchhoff’s second law

l2

I = l 1 = l2

v1
V

any closed circuit or loop, the algebraic sum of the e.m.f. equals the algebraic sum of the products of the current, I, and resistance, R. This can be expressed as ⌺E = ⌺IR.
● This can be verified by measuring the potential difference (P.D.)at different points in a circuit.
● This law is another way of stating the law of conservation of energy using electrical quantities.

3 Conversion of electrical energy into power
● When

v2

v3

v4

V

V

a current flows electrical energy is converted into other forms of energy. The power of a device is the rate at which this conversion occurs.
● If the P.D. across a device is V, the current through it is I. The electrical energy, W, converted in time t is given by W = ItV.
● Power, P, is the rate at which energy is converted: P = ItV = IV

V

t

converting electrical energy into heat energy is called a passive resistor. The rate of production of heat is also IV. Since R = V

3 Conversion of electrical energy into power
V
I
R

I

this can expressed as:
P = IV = V2 = I2R
R
●

Heat energy losses increase as the square of the current so if the current is doubled the heat losses will be quadrupled. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Device

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 120

120
ELECTRICITY
Key words electromotive force (e.m.f.) galvanometer potential difference Ohm’s law resistance Wheatstone bridge 1 Wheatstone bridge circuit
Wheatstone bridge circuit allows resistance to be measured far more accurately than is possible using an ammeter and voltmeter. It is based on the principle that when the ratio of
P/Q is equal to that of R/S then no current flows through the galvanometer and therefore the potential difference across the galvanometer must be zero.
● Using Ohm’s law
●A

Electric current 5
1 Wheatstone bridge circuit

2 Comparing e.m.f.s

E1

P

Q
L1

L2

G
R

S lg G

(V = IR) I1P = I2R and I1Q = I2S.
I1P = I2R thus P = R
I1Q I2S
Q S

E2

2 Comparing e.m.f.s
● When

the reading on the galvanometer is zero the ratio of the
e.m.f.s of the cells, E1/E2 must be equal to the ratio of the resistance in the circuit containing E1 (L1 + L2) and the resistance of the circuit containing E2
(L1) i.e. (L1 + L2) / L1. This values of L1 and L2 are found by moving the contact from the galvanometer, often called the jockey, along the wire.

3 Comparing resistances

3 Comparing resistances

L1

●A

potential divider can be used to compare two resistances. When the reading on the galvanometer is zero the ratio of the resistances either side of the jockey on the potential divider,
L1/L2 is equal to the ratio of the two resistors P/Q.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

the galvanometer reads zero there is no current flowing through it therefore the potential difference across it must equal zero. This will occur when the potential difference across L1 is equal to the potential difference across the resistor Q.

L1

L2

G

L1 = P
L2 Q

4 Comparing p.d.s

4 Comparing p.d.s

P

G
Q

P

Q

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 121

121

Ohm’s law

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Testing current, voltage, and resistance in a circuit

battery conductor Ohm’s law parallel potential difference lamp

1 Testing current, voltage, and resistance in a circuit

A

●A

variable resistor R resistor V

2 Relating current and voltage
0.20

resistor, R, is connected in series with a battery, lamp and variable resistor. An ammeter is connected in series with the resistor and a voltmeter is connected in parallel.
● When the value of the variable resistor is changed this alters the potential difference across resistor and therefore its current. The current and the potential difference are recorded for several different values.
● The lamp provides a visual indication of how the total resistance of the circuit is changing. When the value of the variable resistor is high the current falls and the lamp becomes dimmer.

2 Relating current and voltage 0.18

● The

graph of current against voltage is a straight line indicating the current in the resistor is proportional to the potential difference across it. This assumes that the temperature of the resistor has remained constant.
● This relationship is known as Ohm’s law. Conductors which obey this law are called ohmic conductors.
● The gradient of the graph,
I/V = 0.0333.

Current I/amps

0.16

0.14

0.12

0.10

0.08

3 Ohm’s law
2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

Potential difference V/volts

3 Ohm’s law
V=I×R
R=
I=

V
I

V
R

Voltage = Current Resistance
Resistance =
Current =

Voltage
Current

Voltage
Resistance

Where voltage is given in volts (V), current in amps (A), ans resistance in ohms (Ω).

6.0

● Potential

difference or voltage, current and resistance are connected by a simple mathematical equation.
● The gradient of the graph is equal to
I/V. The resistance of a resistor is given by V/I therefore the resistance of
R is given by the reciprocal of the gradient of the graph.
R = 1 / 0.0333 = 30 ⍀.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

0.06
2.0

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 122

122
ELECTRICITY
Key words alternating current (AC) current magnetic field solenoid Electric meters 1
1 Moving coil meter

shaft to which meter pointer is attached

spring

coil

1 Moving coil meter
● Most

direct current meters are the moving coil type. This consists of a coil of copper wire, wound around a soft iron cylinder, which rotates inside a strong magnetic field provided by a permanent magnet.
● The magnetic field produced in the narrow air gap between the coil and the permanent magnet is radial. The field lines in the gap appear to radiate from the central axis of the cylinder and are always parallel to the plane of the coil as it rotates.
● The coil is pivoted on jewelled bearings and its rotation is resisted by hair springs above and below it. The springs are also the means by which current enters and leaves the coil.
● When a current passes through the coil it generates a magnetic field. This interacts with the magnetic field of the permanent magnet causing the coil to rotate. pole pieces of magnet iron cylinder

Illustrating the radial magnetic field

field lines soft iron core

N

S

2 Moving iron meter

2 Moving iron meter deflection of an alternating current meter cannot depend upon the direction of the current since this is continually changing.
● In a moving iron meter two soft iron rods are mounted inside a solenoid parallel to its axis. One rod is fixed while the other is attached to a pointer. ● When current passes either way through the solenoid the soft iron rods are magnetized in the same direction and repel each other. The rod which is not fixed moves away until it is stopped by the restoring couple of the hair springs.
● This type of coil can be used for measuring direct current or alternating current. The scale is non-linear, being closer for smaller currents.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

1

0

non-linear scale

solenoid

fixed soft iron rod moving soft iron rod

connections

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 123

123

Electric meters 2

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Moving coil meter as ammeter

current
Ohm’s law parallel potential difference µA
A

moving coil meter has a resistance of 1,000 ⍀, due mainly to the coil, and gives a full scale deflection when a current of 100 ␮〈 passes through it.

0.0001A
1000Ω
coil of meter

1A

Moving coil meter
●A

1

0

0

10
0

resistance

1 Moving coil meter as ammeter ●A

resistor of very low value (called a shunt) is connected in parallel with the meter to convert it to an ammeter reading 0–1 A.
● The meter and the shunt are in parallel therefore the potential difference across the meter equals the potential difference across the shunt.
Applying Ohm’s law (V = IR):
0.0001 A x 1000 ⍀ = 0.9999 x resistance of shunt =
0.0001 x 1000 = 0.1 ⍀

0.9999A shunt terminals

0.9999

2 Moving coil meter as voltmeter

2 Moving coil meter as voltmeter µA

●A

V

1

0

0

10
0

resistor of very high value (called a multiplier) is connected in series with the meter to convert it to a voltmeter reading 0–1 V.
● Applying Ohm’s law (V = IR) the potential difference across the multiplier and meter in series =
0.0001 x (1000 ⍀ + resistance of

0.0001A
1000Ω
coil of meter

multiplier
1V

terminals

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

multiplier)

The meter must give a full scale deflection when a potential difference of 1 V is applied across it therefore:
0.000 1 x (1000 ⍀ + resistance of multiplier) = 1 ⍀
Resistance of multiplier = 9000 ⍀
● Voltmeters are graded according to their resistance per volt at full scale deflection. Here, applying 1 V would give a full scale deflection corresponding to a current of 100 ␮A therefore the resistance per volt
(R = V/I) is 10000 ⍀. The higher the resistance per volt the more accurate the voltmeter as the smaller the current it draws.

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 124

124
ELECTRICITY
Key words current Ohm’s law parallel potential difference Resistors 1
1 Resistors in series
V
R1

1 Resistors in series resistors are connected in series the potential difference across the network is divided between the resistors V = V1 + V2 + V3. The same current, I, is in each resistor.
● From Ohm’s law V = IR therefore
R = V/I. An expression can be written for each resistor:
R1 = V1/I; R2 = V2/I; R3 = V3I.
● It follows that IR = IR1 + IR2 + IR3: dividing throughout the equation by I gives RT = R1 + R2 + R3 where RT is the total effective resistance.
● When resistors are connected in series the total effective resistance of the network is equal to the sum of the individual resistors.

R2

R3

V1

I

V2

V3

● When

2 Resistors in parallel resistors are connected in parallel the current in each resistor is dependent on the size of the resistance I = I1 + I2 + I3. The same potential difference is across each resistor. ● From Ohm’s law V = IR therefore
I = V/R. An expression can be written for each resistor:
I1 = V/R1; I2 = V/R2; I3 = V/R3.
● It follows that
V/R = V/R1 + V/R2 + V/R3: dividing throughout the equation by V gives:
1/RT = R1 + R2 + R3 where RT is the total effective resistance.
● When resistors are connected in parallel the reciprocal of the total effective resistance of the network is equal to the sum of the reciprocals of the individual resistors.
© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

3 Resistors in series and parallel resistors are arranged in a mixture of series and parallel circuits within a network the effective resistance of each part of the network is found separately before the total effective resistance is calculated.

3Ω

3Ω

3Ω

9Ω

2 Resistors in parallel
I1

R1
3Ω

I

I2

R2

1Ω

3Ω

3Ω
I3

R3
V

3 Resistors in series and parallel

6Ω
5Ω

5Ω

● When

3Ω

2Ω

7Ω

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 125

125

Resistors 2

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Carbon resistor

first digit second digit multiplier digit tolerance 2 Carbon film resistor

conductor resistance 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

black brown red orange yellow green blue violet gray white color gold silver red tolerance
± 5%
± 10%
± 20%

1 Carbon resistor
● Resistors

carbon film spiralled away to give value

end cap insulating coating metal lead

come in a variety of types which are used in different ways in circuits. ● Carbon resistors are composed of carbon black, clay and a resin binder.
The mixture is molded into rods by heating. Carbon is the conducting material in the mixture. The value of the resistance is determined by the proportion of carbon present.
● The stability of carbon resistors is poor and their tolerance is usually ±10% at best. However, they are cheap to produce and are good enough for many applications.
● The value of a carbon resistor may be given in numbers or as a sequence of colored bands.

2 Carbon film resistor
● Carbon

film resistors consist of a ceramic rod upon which is deposited a film of carbon. The value of the resistor depends on the thickness of this film, and can be increased by cutting a spiral groove in the coating.
The carbon film is protected by a coating of epoxy resin.
● This type of resistor is more stable than a carbon resistor and its tolerance is commonly ±2%.

ceramic rod

3 Wire-wound resistor

3 Wire-wound resistor

ceramic bobbin

ceramic case

resistors are very stable and have a very low tolerance. They also have the advantage over carbon resistors that they can be manufactured to have a large power rating. ● This type of resistor is based on the fact that the resistance of a wire increases with its length. For high precision resistors manganin (an alloy of copper, manganese and nickel) is used while for general commercial resistors nickel-chromium wire provides resistors which are sufficiently accurate.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Wire-wound

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 126

126
ELECTRICITY
Key words battery cell charge electrolyte

electromotive force (e.m.f.) galvanometer generator insulator Electromotive force
2 E.m.f. of simple cell

1 Galvanometer measuring e.m.f a 1 Galvanometer measuring
e.m.f.
e.m.f. of a battery or generator is the energy, in whatever form, converted into electrical energy when unit charge passes through it. Its unit is the volt. The e.m.f. of a source is 1 V when 1 joule of one form of energy is changed into electrical energy when 1 coulomb passes through it.
● A galvanometer can measure the
e.m.f. produced when wires of different metals are connected.
● The

c

b

f

3 Daniel cell

d copper coin e silver coin f blotting paper

4 Dry cell k 2 E.m.f. of simple cell

j

simple cell is formed by placing two different metals either side of a piece of blotting paper which has been soaked in a solution of an electrolyte such as sodium chloride.

●A

l

m

g

3 Daniel cell cells, such as the Daniel cell, were described as wet cells as they consisted of rods of different metals suspended in liquid electrolytes such as dilute sulfuric acid. The e.m.f. of the
Daniel cell is 1.1 V
.

e

d a ballistic galvanometer b copper wire c iron wire

i

● Early

n o h g copper rod h dilute sulfuric acid i zinc rod

j pitch k brass cap l carbon rod

m mixture of MnO2 and C n zinc case o jelly of NH4Cl

4 Dry cell
● In

dry cells the electrolyte is a paste. In a carbon-zinc cell the electrolyte is a paste of ammonium chloride. The
e.m.f. of this cell is 1.5 V
.

5 Car battery

r

q

5 Car battery

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Cells

which are discarded after use are described as primary cells while those that can be recharged are secondary cells or accumulators.
● A car battery, or lead accumulator, consists of plates of lead and lead oxide in sulfuric acid, separated by layers of insulator. When the battery is discharging a chemical reaction takes place; this is reversed when the battery is being recharged.
● The e.m.f. of a car battery is normally
12 V
.

u p t p q r s t u

lead filler cap vent Lead (IV) oxide insulator sulfuric acid

s

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 127

127

Applications of the
Wheatstone network 1

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 The explosimeter flashback arrested

flashback arrested

aspirator bulb

corrosometer explosimeter resistance
Wheatstone
bridge

1 The explosimeter resistance of a material varies with its temperature. This can be expressed by its temperature coefficient of resistance which is the fractional increase in resistance at 0˚C per unit rise of temperature.
● Metals have positive coefficients i.e. their resistance increases with temperature rise. The value of the coefficient is of the order of 1/275 per˚C. ● An explosimeter is used to measure the concentration of combustible gases present in a sample, in a location such as a mine. The greater the concentration the greater the heat produced when the sample is burnt.
● Initially the Wheatstone bridge is balanced. The sample is then introduced to the hot wire.
Combustible gases are ignited and burn in the presence of the wire. The more heat is produced, the hotter the wire becomes and therefore the more its resistance increases. This disturbs the Wheatstone bridge which gives a reading. ● Flashback arrestors are installed in the device as a safety feature to prevent the explosimeter igniting a sample external to it.
● The

detector filament
(changing resistance) valves outlet sample inlet

variable resistor
(adjust zero)

2 The corrosometer reference element

measuring element

2 The corrosometer corrosometer is used to measure the metal loss due to corrosion.
● When the measuring element comes into contact with the metal its resistance is altered. This causes an imbalance in the Wheatstone bridge circuit which is rectified by the variable resistor. The amount of rectification is an indication of the amount of metal loss. variable resistor (with corrosion dial)

The circuit

measuring element to Z to Y to X

tube
The probe

reference element

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 128

128
ELECTRICITY
Key words resistance strain
Wheatstone
bridge

Applications of the
Wheatstone network 2
1 Electric strain gauge paper 1 Electric strain gauge electric strain gauge converts mechanical strain into a change in resistance in itself. This is possible because the resistance of a wire depends on its length and crosssectional area.
● One form of strain gauge consists of a very fine wire (of a nickel-ironchromium alloy) bonded to a slip of thin paper. It is attached to the component to be tested using a strong adhesive so that whatever strain is experienced by the component will also be experienced by the wire.
● As the component is stretched so is the gauge wire. This increases its length and decreases its cross-section, both of which increase its resistance.
This change in resistance can be detected by a Wheatstone bridge suitably calibrated to indicate the magnitude of the strain.

connections fine wire

● An

2 Strain gauge pressure transducer

diaphragm

force rod

strain gauge windings
1 and 2 (R1, R2)

flexible cross-member

insulating pillar

2 Strain gauge pressure transducer © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Initially

the strain gauge windings above and below the flexible cross member are under the same strain and therefore Wheatstone bridge circuit is balanced. ● When a force is applied to the diaphragm the force rod is pushed down, causing the flexible cross member down at its center. The insulating pillars below the cross member splay out from each other resulting in an increase in the strain experienced by the windings around them. ● This causes the windings to stretch, thereby becoming longer and thinner, which increases their resistance. The result is an imbalance in the
Wheatstone bridge circuit which is detected and converted into a measure of the strain.

strain gauge windings 3 and 4 (R3, R4)

rigid support

R1

R4

R3

R2 constant voltage supply

transmitted signal amplifier *03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 129

129

Electric power

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 The watt and the kilowatt
40W

60W

100W

current electrical energy fuse potential difference power

1 The watt and the kilowatt power of an electrical device is the rate at which it converts electrical energy into other forms of energy. The higher the power the more electrical energy is consumed per unit time.
● The unit of power is the watt (W). One watt is the transfer of 1 J of electrical energy into other forms of energy each second.
● Electrical energy is often measured in kilowatt hours kWh. One kilowatt hour is the amount of electrical energy which is converted to other forms of energy when an electrical device which has a power rating of 1 kilowatt is used for 1 hour.
● The

2 Power rating of appliances

1 kWh = 1 x 1,000 x 60 x 60 =
3,600,000 J = 3.6 MJ

Lamp 60W

Television 650W

Drill 900W

2 Power rating of appliances ● All

electrical devices have a power rating. Devices which are designed to heat in some way, such as irons, kettles and fan heaters have the highest ratings. 3 Operating current and calculation of fuse required
● Electrical

power can be calculated using the equation:
Power = Current x Potential difference

Iron 1200W

Kettle 1500W

3 Operating current and calculation of fuse required

information given on an electrical device can be used to calculate the operating current and therefore the size of fuse that should be fitted to it.
● The operating current of an iron which has a power rating of 1200 W when connected to a 120V supply is:
Current = 1200 W = 10 A
120 V

0V
12
W
00
12 Hz
0
-6
50

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Fan heater 1,000W

● The

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 130

130
ELECTRICITY
Key words electrode energy levels evaporation filament fluorescence infrared ultraviolet light

Electric lighting
1 Filament lamp inert gas

tungsten filament

1 Filament lamp filament lamp consists of a thin wire filament enclosed in a glass bulb. Such lamps operate at very high temperatures in order to emit light and therefore the filament is made of tungsten which has a very high melting point (3400 ˚C).
● The glass bulb is filled with an inert gas such as nitrogen or argon. The gas reduces the evaporation of tungsten and prevents it being deposited on the inside of the bulb where it would cause blackening. The bulb cannot be filled with air as at high temperatures the tungsten would undergo a chemical reaction with oxygen.
● In addition to producing light energy, filament lamps also produce ultraviolet radiation and infrared radiation (heat). The efficiency of filament lamps as producers of light is very low, of the order of 10 percent.
●A

2 Fluorescent lamp fluorescent lamp consists of a glass tube with an electrode at each end.
The tube contains mercury vapor and the inside surface is coated with a phosphor material.
● When a high voltage is applied across the electrodes electrons migrate between them, colliding with atoms of mercury. Energy is transferred to the mercury atoms causing electrons to be promoted to higher energy levels.
When the electrons fall back to their ground state, energy is released as ultraviolet radiation.
● The phosphor coating on the inside of the tube is a fluorescent material. It absorbs the ultraviolet radiation from the mercury vapor and emits visible light. ● Fluorescent lamps do not emit unwanted ultraviolet radiation and produce relatively little heat, therefore they are typically 4 to 6 times more efficient than filament lamps.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

glass bulb

2 Fluorescent lamp electrode filament

phosphorus coating

mercury vapor

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 131

131

Electrolysis

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Copper voltameter

anion anode cathode cation charge

Circuit for a voltameter

electrolysis electrolyte ion voltameter A

–

1 Copper voltameter

+

● Electrolysis

a

b

c

Detail of the voltameter
Flow of current in the voltameter

d g h f –

2 Electrolysis of copper

–

e

● The

i voltameter cathode anode beaker

e copper plates f saturated copper sulfate solution with addition of small amount of dilute sulfuric acid

2 Electrolysis of copper

g anode h cathode i direction of conventional current

3 Electrolysis of water p o

u

s

2+
Cu
j

k t 2+
Cu
2+
Cu

j copper k copper l copper m copper n copper

3 Electrolysis of water
● Pure

q

r

l

A m following reactions occur.
At the anode: Cu ➞ Cu2+ + 2eAt the cathode: Cu2+ + 2e- ➞ Cu
● Copper goes into solution at the anode which becomes smaller.
Conversely, copper is deposited from the solution on the cathode which becomes larger.
● The anode’s loss in mass equals the cathode’s gain in mass. The concentration of Cu2+ + ions in solution remains constant so its color neither fades nor deepens.
● If a block of impure copper forms the anode, pure copper is deposited at the cathode. Solid impurities fall and accumulate below the anode.

v

n

cathode gains mass anode loses mass sulfate solution deposited dissolved

o p q r s

oxygen gas hydrogen gas platinum anode platinum cathode tall beaker

t slightly acidified water u inverted burette v 12 V DC supply

water ionizes to a very small extent as follows: H2O H+ + OH-.
Due to the low concentration of ions it is a very poor conductor of electricity, but this increases if a small amount of an ionic substance such as dilute sulfuric acid is added.
● The following reactions occur at the electrodes. anode 4OH- ➞ O2 + 2H2O + 4ecathode 4H+ + 4e- ➞ 2H2

Twice as much hydrogen as oxygen is produced. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

a b c d causes chemical change when an electric current passes through an electrolyte (either a melted or an aqueous solution of an ionic substance). Ions transfer current through the electrolyte.
● Negative ions (anions) are attracted to the anode (positive electrode) while positive ions (cations) are attracted to the cathode (negative electrode).
● A voltameter measures the size of an electric charge by detecting changes to anode and cathode.

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 132

132
ELECTRICITY
Key words magnet magnetic field

Magnetic fields of magnets 2 Combined fields of magnet and Earth

1 Single magnet

N

N

N

S

S

N

Magnetic field direction of a magnetic field at a point is the direction of the force that acts on a north magnetic pole there.
● The pattern of field lines indicates the shape and direction of the field. The number of field lines per unit cross section area indicates field strength.
● The

N
S

1 Single magnet a bar magnet the magnetic field is concentrated at the ends of the bar.
Field lines are directed away from the
N pole and towards the S pole.

● In

3 Two North poles (end on)

4 North and South poles
(end on)

2 Combined fields of magnet and Earth
● The

magnetic field around a bar magnet alters when it is placed in an applied field.

N

N

N

S

3 Two north poles (end on)
● Like

magnetic poles, either N—N or
S—S, repel each other. This is shown by the pattern of field lines when like poles are placed close together.

4 North and south poles
(end on) magnetic poles, N—S, attract each other. The magnetic field lines are directed out of the N pole and into the S pole.

5 Magnets broadside on

N

N

N

S

S

S

S

N

● Unlike

5 Magnets broadside on

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●

When two bar magnets are placed broadside to each other repulsion occurs at both poles if they are in the same orientation, and attraction if they are in the opposite orientation.

6 Effect on soft iron

N

6 Effects on soft iron
● When

a bar magnet is placed close to a piece of soft iron it induces magnetism in the soft iron. The part of the soft iron closest to the N pole acts as if it was the S pole of a magnet, while the part closest to the S pole acts as if it was an N pole.

N

S

soft iron soft iron ring

soft iron

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 133

133

Magnetic fields due to an electric current 1

ELECTRICITY
Key words current magnetic field

1 A current produces a magnetic field

1 A current produces a magnetic field compass Current deflection

2 Field patterns produced by currents

2 Field patterns produced by currents
I

● The

I

+

Current out of paper

Long straight wire

3 Determining a field pattern compass needle

stiff card Current into paper magnetic field around a wire carrying a current consists of a series of concentric circles. The direction of the field is determined by the direction of the current.
● Conventionally, if a wire is represented is section, a current coming out of the page is represented by a dot (●) while a current passing into the paper is represented by a cross (+). The dot and cross represent the tip and tail of an arrow respectively.

4 Right hand screw rule
3 Determining a field pattern ● The

shape and direction of the magnetic field around a wire carrying a current can be found by placing plotting compasses at different locations around the wire. The needle of a plotting compass lines up with the magnetic field line and indicates its direction. 4 Right hand screw rule
● The

direction of the magnetic field around a wire carrying a current can be predicted using the “right hand screw rule.” If a right-handed screw moves forward in the direction of the conventional current then the direction of rotation of the screw gives the direction of the magnetic field lines. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

No current, no deflection

a current is passed through a wire it creates a magnetic field around the wire which is demonstrated by the deflection of a plotting compass. While the current is flowing the compass needle deflects but as soon as the current is switched off the compass needle returns to pointing north.

● When

compass

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 134

134
ELECTRICITY
Key words atom conductor current electromagnetism electron magnet magnetic field solenoid Magnetic fields due to an electric current 2
1 Field pattern produced by wire loop

1 Field pattern produced by wire loop an electric current is passed through a loop of wire each part of the loop can be regarded as a single wire.
The current passes in the opposite direct in each part of the loop therefore the magnetic field lines will have the opposite orientation.

● When

2 Field pattern produced by solenoid solenoid is a long cylindrical coil composed of many loops. The field pattern for a solenoid can be thought of as the summation of the field pattern for each loop. It is similar to that of a bar magnet.

●A

2 Field pattern produced by solenoid

3 Right hand grip rule

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

polarity of a solenoid can be predicted using the “right hand grip rule.” If the right hand is placed over a solenoid with fingers pointing in the same direction as the conventional current passing through each coil, the direction of the N pole of the solenoid is given by the thumb.
● If the direction of the current is reversed its polarity is also reversed.
● Electromagnetism may be described as temporary magnetism since it only exists when a current passes through a conductor. ● In general, the field produced by a permanent magnet can be reproduced by passing a current through a suitably shaped conductor. This supports the idea that all magnetic effects are due to electric currents which, in the case of permanent magnets, are the result of the movement of electrons within the atoms.
● Static charge gives rise to electric fields. Moving charge i.e. current, gives rise to both electric and magnetic fields. 3 Right hand grip rule

I

B

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 135

135

Magnetic field of Earth 1

ELECTRICITY
Key words magnet magnetic field

1 Earth’s magnetic field

2 Earth’s magnetic field in terms of electric currents

mndpn points vertically downward magnetic axis of the Earth magnet

axis of rotation

1 Earth’s magnetic field

North pole

S

N

2 Earth’s magnetic field in terms of electric currents

mnpdn points vertically upwards South pole

● Magnetic

electric currents in the Earth’s core

Magnetic north pole dip needle (mnpdn)

3 Migration of north magnetic pole
84

°N

90°N

82
°N

80

°N

78°
N

2000
1999

1995
1990

76°
N

1985
1980
1955

74°
N

is surrounded by a magnetic field. It is as if Earth contains a huge imaginary bar magnet but the source of the magnetic field is much more complicated than this.
● It is thought that the field is the result of the movement of molten iron in the outer core of the Earth some 3,000 km or more below the surface.
● Earth

North is the place to which compass needles point. However since the end of a compass needle marked
N points north it follows that Earth’s magnetic north pole is actually a south magnetic pole.
● Earth’s magnetic N pole is not fixed either in terms of polarity or of location. ● Evidence obtained from rocks containing minerals of iron indicate that the polarity of Earth’s magnetic field has reversed many times in its history. These iron minerals aligned with Earth’s magnetic field while the rock was still molten and forming.
Their orientation provides a record of
Earth’s field when the rock was formed. ● It has been suggested that a reversal of polarity occurs when the circulation of molten iron in Earth's outer core is disrupted and then reestablishes itself in the opposite direction.

72°
N

● The

1920
1915
1910
1900

position of the north magnetic pole can move erratically from day to day but more usually it migrates typically 10 – 40 kilometers each year.
● The north magnetic field drifted steadily north and west over the last century and appears to be heading towards Siberia in this one.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

3 Migration of north magnetic pole

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 136

136
ELECTRICITY

Magnetic field of Earth 2

Key words magnetic field satellite 1 Resolving Earth’s magnetic field strength
BH
α

N

2 The dip circle

S

magnetized dip needle

●A

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

circular scale in degrees

90°

3 Angle of declination
Horizontal component of the Earth’s magnetic field

axis of rotation

C

E

angle of declination is the angle between the geographical North Pole and the magnetic north pole. Since the location of the magnetic north pole is not constant, it is necessary for people relying on a compass that navigation to make periodic amendments to their instruments and charts. The increasing use of satellites for navigation has made this less of a problem in recent years.

N

N

● The

angle of dip

horizontal

W

3 Angle of declination

0°

S

dip needle is essentially a magnetized needle, such as is found in a compass, but suspended vertically so that it moves freely about its center.
● At the north magnetic pole the vertical component of Earth’s magnetic field strength is at its maximum and the horizontal component is zero. A dip needle points vertically downward at this point on Earth.
● At the magnetic equator the vertical component of Earth’s magnetic field strength is zero and the horizontal component is at its maximum.
Anywhere on the magnetic equator a dip needle lies horizontal.
● The dip angle indicates the position of a location in terms of latitude relative to Earth’s magnetic poles. In the southern hemisphere it is the opposite end of the dip needle which indicates the dip angle.

E

2 The dip circle

BR

BV

S

magnetic field strength, BR can be resolved into horizontal, BH, and vertical, BV, components: BH = BR cos
␣ and BV = BR sin ␣, where ␣ is the angle of dip, the angle between the horizontal and the magnetic pole.
● A compass needle is only affected by
BH since is only moves in the horizontal plane.
● Earth’s

W

1 Resolving Earth’s magnetic field strength

North Pole

north magnetic pole

angle of declination at point A

A

South Pole south magnetic pole Angle of declination: at point A
North Pole (angle = 0) at point C direction of magnetic north direction of North Pole angle of declination

direction of magnetic north direction of North Pole angle of declination

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 137

137

Forces in magnetic fields 1

ELECTRICITY
Key words conductor current flux helical motion magnetic field

1 Current-carrying wire in a magnetic field
N

S

N

S
1 Current-carrying wire in a magnetic field

current flowing

No current

2 Current balance

I

circular magnetic field is generated around a current-carrying wire. The direction of the field reinforces the applied magnetic field below it and opposes that above it, resulting in the wire being thrust upwards.

●A

3 Fleming’s Left-Hand rule

coil producing magnetic field

thuMb = Motion

2 Current balance
●A

pivot counter-weights hung here

x

First finger = Field

y

horizontal wire loop, balanced at its center, has one end within a magnetic field produced by a coil. This part of the loop moves down when current passes through it. The size of the force is measured by adding counter weights to the opposite end of the loop.

3 Fleming’s Left-Hand Rule
● This

relates motion, magnetic field and current in motors.

4 Motion of a charge moving in a magnetic field

5 Helical motion of particle in uniform field

region of uniform field into plane of paper

B θ positive charge q and mass m

4 Motion of a charge moving in a magnetic field
● The

force exerted on a currentcarrying conductor in a magnetic field is the resultant of the forces acting on the charges.
● For a particle carrying a charge, q, moving at velocity, v, in a conductor at an angle ␪ to a uniform magnetic field of flux density, B, the force exerted on the particle, F = Bqvsin␪.
● If the charged particle enters the uniform magnetic field at a right angle then ␪ = 90º, sin ␪ = 1 and F = Bqv.
● The direction of the force is at right angles to the field and the direction of motion, resulting in the particle being deflected in a circular path.

5 Helical motion of particle in uniform field
● If

centripetal force F = Bqv path of particle

a charged particle enters the uniform magnetic field other than at a right angle then sin ␪ 1 the particle is deflected in a helical path.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

seCond finger = Current

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 138

138
ELECTRICITY
Key words conductor current
Hall effect
Magnadur
magnetic field

potential difference Forces in magnetic fields 2
1 Force between current carrying wires

wooden supports wooden supports 1 Force between current carrying wires current passes in the same direction through parallel wires, the circular magnetic field around both wires has the same direction—either clockwise or counterclockwise.
Overlapping parts of the fields between the wires are opposite in direction so the wires are forced together. ● When current passes in opposite directions through parallel wires the direction of the circular magnetic field around the wires is different.
Overlapping parts of the fields between the wires are in the same direction so the wires are forced apart.

f

● When

2 The Hall effect a current carrying conductor is placed in a magnetic field it has a small potential difference across its sides at right angles to the field.
● This effect is caused by forces acting on the charge carriers in the conductor. These forces act at right angles to the magnetic field and the current and cause the charge carriers to be pushed sideways. Their concentration increases on one side of the conductor thus leading to a potential difference across it.

strips of flexible aluminum foil f

f

f

current

f

current

current

current

f

f f f

strips of flexible aluminum foil f

–

–

+

Currents in same direction

+

Currents in opposite direction

● When

2 The Hall effect magnetic field

i i i

Positive carriers in a semi-conductor slice
Magnetic field applied at right angles

i

i

Electric field established across the slice

3 Measuring Hall voltage
●A

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

current of around 50 mA is passed through the Hall slice (such as a piece of doped germanium). If the connections to the Hall slice are not exactly opposite each other there will be a potential difference between them irrespective of whether a magnetic field is applied to the slice.
In this case the balance control is used to zero the meter.
● If a Magnadur magnet is placed face down on the Hall slice the voltmeter indicates that a potential difference now exists across it.

magnetic field

3 Measuring Hall voltage
Hall slice

zero potentiometer

voltmeter

mA

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 139

139

Electromagnets 1

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Experimental electromagnet

soft iron core

coil

current electromagnet electromagnetism magnet magnetic field

magnetism

Electromagnetism

A

● Electromagnetism

nails

variable resistor is called temporary magnetism since it only exists while a current is passing. An electromagnet can be switched on and off unlike a permanent magnet.

1 Experimental electromagnet ● When

a current passes through a wire a magnetic field is generated around it however, to make a practical electromagnet, the wire is wound into a coil.
● An electromagnet’s strength can be found by measuring the weight of iron which it can support. A simple comparison of the strengths of electromagnets can be made using small articles e.g. nails or paper clips.
● The strength of an electromagnet increases when the number of turns of wire in the coil increases.
● The strength of an electromagnet increases when the current passing through the coils increases.
● The strength of an electromagnet increases when the coil is wound around a core of soft iron.

2 Horseshoe electromagnet

Electromagnet

3 Practical electromagnet

2 Horseshoe electromagnet ●A

ferrous metals horseshoe electromagnet can be made by winding a coil around each limb of a soft iron core.
● If the coils are wound around the limbs in the same direction the magnetic fields cancel each other out and the core is not magnetized.
● If the coils are wound around the limbs in opposite directions the limbs are magnetized with opposite polarity.

3 Practical electromagnet
● Electromagnets

non-ferrous metals are used in scrap yards as a convenient way of moving ferrous metals (iron and steel) and separating them from non-ferrous metals such as aluminum, copper and brass.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

No magnetism

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 140

140
ELECTRICITY
Key words current electromagnet magnetic field sound waves

Electromagnets 2
1 Electric door bell

2 Door bell with chimes f g

1 Electric door bell
● When

the switch is closed the circuit is complete and current flows through the coil. The soft iron core becomes magnetic and attracts the armature. As the armature moves it strikes the gong while at the same time breaking the circuit. The soft iron core ceases to be magnetic and the steel spring returns the armature to its original position, completing the circuit once again. The cycle is repeated for as long as the switch remains closed causing the bell to ring.

h

i d k

a

c

b e j g 2 Door bell with chimes
● When

the switch is closed the coil of insulated copper wire becomes an electromagnet and the soft iron collar is pulled down into it causing the poly(ethene) bobbin to strike the lower metal plate. The spring is compressed and forces the poly(ethene) bobbin and soft iron collar back up again to strike the upper metal plate. The bobbin will continue to oscillate up and down in this way while the switch is closed.

a b c d e

armature steel spring soft iron core screw to adjust tension push button to close switch

3 Telephone ear piece

f g h i j k freely suspended metal plates poly(ethene) bobbin loosely coiled spring soft-iron collar coil of insulated copper wire supply f

4 Magnetic relay

n

3 Telephone ear piece

r

p

q

●A

variable current passes through the coil in the ear piece. This produces changes in the strength of the magnetic field below the diaphragm which causes it to move up and down making sound waves.

4 Magnetic relay

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

the switch is closed current flows through the coil and the soft iron core becomes magnetic. As one end of the armature is attracted downward towards the core the other end moves upwards closing the contacts. m o l l permanent magnet m soft iron n magnetic diaphragm

o p q r s

contacts armature soft iron core to circuit to be switched switch s

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 141

141

Electromagnetic induction 1

ELECTRICITY
Key words conductor current galvanometer generator magnetic field

1 Moving a conductor in a magnetic field
B

B

S

N

S

N

1 Moving a conductor in a magnetic field a conductor is moved in a magnetic field in such a way that it cuts the magnetic field lines a current is induced in it. This occurs when the conductor is moved horizontally or vertically through a magnetic field but not when it is moved from one magnetic pole to the other along the field lines.
● Moving one end of a loop either into or out of a magnetic field causes a deflection on the galvanometer while the loop is moving.
● When

G
G

3 Moving a magnetic field around a conductor

2 Right-hand rule

2 Right-hand rule
● Fleming’s

Right-hand rule, used for electric generators, relates motion, magnetic field, and current.

thuMb = Motion

S

N
3 Moving a magnetic field around a conductor
●A

current is also induced if the conductor remains stationary and the magnetic field is moved. What is important is that the conductor is moving relative to the magnetic field and that it cuts the magnetic field lines. First finger = Field

G seCond finger = Current

4 Moving both magnetic field and conductor

S

N

5 Conductor moving within magnetic field

S

N

● There

is no induced current when the conductor and magnetic field move together in the same direction or when the conductor remains stationary inside the magnetic field.
This is because magnetic field lines are not cut by the conductor.

5 Conductor moving within magnetic field
G
G

● When

a closed loop is moved entirely within a magnetic field, a current is induced, moving in the same direction at both ends of the loop. The result is that they cancel each other out giving zero current.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

4 Moving both magnetic field and conductor

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 142

142
ELECTRICITY
Key words conductor electromagnetic induction electromotive force (e.m.f.) flux galvanometer generator induction magnetic field potential difference

Electromagnetic induction 2
1 Flux changes and e.m.f
N

N

Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction
● Faraday

suggested an explanation of electromagnetic induction based on magnetic field lines. He proposed that an e.m.f. is induced in a conductor either when it cuts field lines or when there is a change in the number of lines linking it i.e. passing through it.
These often amount to the same thing.
● The number of field lines per unit cross-sectional area represents the magnitude, B, of the flux density.
Where the flux density acts at right angles to and over an area, A, the magnetic flux, F = BA.
● If F is the flux through the crosssectional area A of a coil of N turns the total flux through it, or flux linkage, is
NF since the same flux, F, links each of the N turns.
● Faraday’s law of induction states that the induced e.m.f. is directly proportional to the rate of change of flux linkage or rate of flux cutting.

S

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

a coil of wire is rotated in a magnetic field each turn of wire cuts through the flux inducing an e.m.f.
The result is a potential difference across the coil thus a current flows through it. This is the basis of an electric generator.

Flux changes –
e.m.f. induced

N

S

N

S

G

G

No flux changes – no e.m.f.

● When

2 Rotating conductor in a magnetic field

G

Flux changes –
e.m.f. induced

1 Flux changes and e.m.f. part of the loop passes between the magnetic poles there is a change in the flux. A deflection on the galvanometer indicates that an e.m.f has been induced.
● When the whole of the loop passes through the flux there is no net change in the flux and no e.m.f. is induced. S

G

No flux changes – no e.m.f.

2 Rotating conductor in a magnetic field
N

N

N

rotating coil

S

S

● When

S flux through area
Rotating coil to produce an induced e.m.f.

Showing that flux has changed

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 143

143

Generating electric power 1 AC generator

ELECTRICITY
Key words alternating current (AC) commutator electromotive force (e.m.f.)

2 DC generator

e

a

N

S

S

N c g

g

d

f

b a rotation b brushes

e rotation f commutator

c slip-rings d load

g brush h load

h

e.m.f. generated

1 AC generator simple alternating current generator consists of a coil rotating inside a magnetic field produced by a permanent magnet. Current is taken off via slip rings.
● Brushes pressing against the slip rings transfer current to the load. Brushes are made of a soft conducting material, such as graphite.
●A

2 DC generator
●A

simple direct current generator is identical to an AC generator except that slip rings are replaced by a commutator. 3 E.m.f. against time for AC generator

3 E.m.f. against time for
AC generator

number of revolutions
1
4

1
2

3
4

1

● As

Position of coil with respect to direction of magnetic field

zero e.m.f. – coil vertical

generator magnet magnetic field

maximum e.m.f. – coil horizontal

zero e.m.f.

maximum reversed e.m.f.

zero e.m.f.
T = time for one complete circle

the coil rotates the rate at which it cuts the magnetic field lines changes.
When it moves through the vertical it passes along the field lines but does not cut them therefore no e.m.f. is produced. When it moves through the horizontal it passes through maximum flux density therefore maximum e.m.f. is induced.
● If Flemings Right-hand rule is used to predict the direction of the induced current in a single turn of a coil it is found that the direction of the current reverses each half turn.

4 E.m.f. against time for DC generator
e.m.f.
generated

4 E.m.f. against time for
DC generator the coil rotates the induced e.m.f. is zero when it moves through the vertical and maximum when moving through the horizontal.
● The commutator ensures that the output current of a DC generator does not reverse direction. As the induced current in the coil is reversed the output through the commutator is also reversed.

number of revolutions
1
4

1
2

3
4

1

Position of coil and commutator with respect to direction of magnetic field

zero e.m.f.

maximum e.m.f.

zero e.m.f.

maximum e.m.f.

zero e.m.f.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● As

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 144

144
ELECTRICITY
Key words couple current electromagnet generator magnet magnetic field

The DC electric motor
1 DC motor

2 Series wound motor coil in magnetic field
d.c. supply commutator 1 DC motor
● The

structure of a simple DC motor is identical to that of a DC generator.
The only difference in the devices is the direction of the energy transfer.
● In a generator: kinetic energy ➞

l

electrical energy

In a motor: electrical energy ➞ kinetic

brushes

energy

direct electric current (from a source such as a cell) passing through the coil creates a magnetic field around it. If the coil is positioned within a magnetic field, the field around the coil interacts with the applied field causing the coil to rotate.

●A

field coil

3 Forces acting on the coil
F

2 Series wound motor
● In

simple DC motors a permanent magnet often provides the field within which the coil rotates. In practical DC motors both the field and the coil are electromagnets. S

F

N

l

l l l

X
F

Y

3 Forces acting on the coil

X
F

Y

● The

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

direction of the force acting on each side of a coil can be predicted by applying Fleming’s left-hand rule or the motor rule to each side.
● Opposite sides of the coil which are perpendicular to the applied magnetic field are acted on by vertical forces in opposite directions. A pair of forces acting in this way are called a couple.
● Opposite sides of the coil which are parallel to the applied magnetic field are acted on by forces directly perpendicular to that field.

coil

direction of rotation

4 Forces on coil at different parts of cycle
F

4 Forces on coil at different parts of cycle
● Forces

causing the coil to rotate are greatest when the coil is moving horizontally relative to the magnetic field lines, and least when the coil is moving through the vertical.

S

B
Y

X
N

S

B

X
N
Y

S

B

X
N

S

X

Y
B

Y

N

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 145

145

Transformer-induced
e.m.f.s 1
1 Inducing current two ways

ELECTRICITY
Key words

2 Continuously changing current f

a

f

current electromotive force (e.m.f.) flux magnet

magnetic field solenoid transformer

g

1 Inducing current two ways e

outer solenoid forms part of a circuit whose current can be altered. A magnetic field forms around it when current flows.
● An e.m.f. is induced in the inner solenoid if it is moved in or out of the outer solenoid, cutting through magnetic field lines. This induced current changes direction as the inner solenoid is pushed in or pulled out.
● If the current passing through the outer solenoid is slowly reduced to zero the magnetic field around it slowly collapses. Magnetic field lines cut the inner solenoid and an e.m.f. is induced.
● The

d

b c A a, b square cross-sectional solenoids
If a is moved out of b a current is induced in a.
If the current in b is changed a current is induced in a. c to smoothed DC supply and rheostat

d coil e iron yoke

f to Y2 input of CRO g to Y1 input of CRO

2 Continuously changing current ● An

3 Effect on e.m.f. of number of turns

h

AC reverses direction during each cycle. The polarity of the magnetic field generated when an AC passes through a conductor also reverses.
● The magnetic field generated around a coil connected to an AC supply grows and collapses twice each cycle owing to changes in polarity.
● When a coil is wrapped around a soft iron yoke, the yoke becomes a magnet. Field lines around the yoke grow and collapse, cutting turns of wire in a secondary coil, inducing an
AC in it.
● This is the principle upon which transformers work.

4 Effect on e.m.f. of solenoid area k j

j

j

i

h CRO

i to a.c. supply j to double-beam CRO k probe (also to CRO)

● If

the number of turns of wire in a coil is increased the rate at which the flux is cut also increases therefore a greater
e.m.f. is induced in the coil.

j

i

4 Effect on e.m.f. of solenoid area
● The

ratio of the e.m.f.s induced in the coils equals the ratio of their areas.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

3 Effect on e.m.f. of number of turns

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 146

146
ELECTRICITY
Key words eddy current electromotive force (e.m.f.) ferromagnetic flux mutual inductance transformer Transformer-induced
e.m.f.s 2
1 Effect on e.m.f. of rate of flux change

1 Effect on e.m.f. of rate of flux change

2 Power loss in a transformer A2

Y1 Y2 f rate of change of flux can be increased or decreased by altering the frequency of the signal. As the rate of change of flux increases so does the induced e.m.f.

● The

b

V2 d 2 Power loss in a transformer 6 V lamp provides the load on the secondary coil of the transformer.
● Electrical power can be calculated using the equation:
Power = Current x Voltage.

15Ω

●A

V1 a Input power at primary coil =
A1 x V1
Output power at secondary coil =
A2 x V2
Power loss in the transformer =
A1 x V1 = A2 x V2

Small energy losses (in the form of heat) do occur due to resistance in the windings, and eddy currents and flux leakage in the core.

e

A1
Number of coils in primary
Voltage in primary
=
Number of coils in secondary Voltage in secondary

a signal generator

Y1

-⑀

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

dIp/dt

where ⑀ is the e.m.f. induced in the secondary when the rate of change of current in the primary coil is dIp/dt.
● The unit of mutual inductance is the henry (H). Two coils have a mutual inductance of 1 henry if an e.m.f. of
1 volt is induced in the secondary coil when the current in the primary coil changes at a rate of 1 ampere per second. ● The value of M is much higher when the coils have a ferromagnetic core.

e a.c. mains f 6V lamp

j j ●A

M=

c primary turn coil d secondary coil turn

b CRO

3 Measuring mutual inductance

3 Measuring mutual inductance change in current in one coil or circuit can induce an e.m.f. in a neighboring coil or circuit. The phase difference between the coils or circuits is one quarter of a cycle.
● The mutual inductance, M, is defined by the equation:

c

0 h k

Y2

0 i k

Circuit to measure mutual inductance

g

1Ω

Y1
Y2

CRO display g CRO h current in primary

i e.m.f. in secondary j dl dt k E M is computed from
Mdl
E= dt *03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 147

147

AC electric motors 1

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Forces on induced currents c a

alternating current (AC) damping eddy current electromagnet b

magnetic field

1 Forces on induced currents a aluminum ring b iron ore c coil

2 Electro-magnetic damping d d copper sheet e eddy currents

an alternating current is passed through the coil it induces an eddy current in the aluminum ring. The direction of the eddy current is such as to produce a magnetic field which opposes the one in the coil thus the aluminum ring is repelled up the iron core. ● When

2 Electro-magnetic damping ● As

S

N e Damping is reduced by cutting copper sheet as shown

Swinging sheet comes rapidly to rest

3 3-phase electric motor

4 Shaded-pole electric motor h f

i

the copper sheet swings it cuts the magnetic field lines and an eddy current is induced in it. The eddy current always tends to oppose the motion of the sheet so it rapidly comes to rest.
● If sections of the copper sheet arc removed then a much weaker eddy current is induced and the damping effect is much reduced.

3 3-phase electric motor
● In

a 3-phase electric motor three pairs of stationary electromagnets are arranged at equal angles around a rotor. Each pair is connected to one phase of a three phase AC supply. The phases reach their maximum values one after another in a repeating cycle.

4 Shaded-pole electric motor j

g

f conducting ring g source of rotating magnetic field

h aluminum sheet i electromagnet j aluminum plate, the insertion of which produces an unbalanced force on the eddy currents induced in h

shaded-pole induction motor produces a rotating magnetic field by covering part of the pole of an electromagnet carrying alternating current with a conducting plate such a sheet of aluminum. The current induces eddy currents in the plate which create a second magnetic field adjacent to the first. The metal disc interprets the phase difference between the two fields as a moving field and responds by rotating.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 148

148
ELECTRICITY
Key words electromagnet magnetic field

AC electric motors 2
1 3-phase electric power production
A

B

A

B

C

N
1 3-phase electric power production of the coils is connected to one phase of a 3-phase AC supply. They provide the stationary electromagnets or stator in the electric motor. They are arranged at 120° to each other around a conductor or rotor.
● Each phase of the 3-phase AC rises to a maximum value in turn in a continuous cycle. During one rotation of the rotor each stator carries maximum current for part of the time, while the other windings carry smaller currents. S

● Each

2 Producing rotating magnetic field

C
A, B, and C are coils at 120° to each other

An e.m.f. is induced by the rotating magnet in each coil

2 Producing rotating magnetic field

B

A

A

● Each

phase of a 3-phase AC is fed into each coil in turn with the direction of the current reversing half way through the cycle. This produces a magnetic field which moves around the rotor.
● The rotor is often of a “squirrel cage” design. This consists of a number of copper rods contained in an iron cylinder. The rotor interprets the alterations of the magnetic field as a magnetic field sweeping around it, in other words a rotating field. The eddy currents induced in the copper rods cause it to rotate.

B
C

A

A

C

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

B

C

B

C

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:42 PM

Page 149

149

Electric power transmission 1

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Transmission without transformer

current electrical energy resistance transformer

d

a b c

A

1 Transmission without transformer B

● The

a 12V a.c. supply b lamp A, 12V 24W – BRIGHT

c power line d lamp B, 12V 24W – DIM

2 Transmission with transformer

f

a e A

a 12V a.c. supply

B

e step-up transformer n1 1
=
n2 20

3 Use of transformer f step-down transformer n1 20
=
1 n2 longer a wire the greater its resistance and the greater the loss of electrical energy from it as heat when a current flows through it.
● A drop in brightness of a lamp indicates a fall in power due to loss of electrical energy.
● Energy lost as heat from a wire,
E = I2R (R—resistance of the wire;
I—current). Loss of current results in a significantly larger energy reduction if electricity is transmitted long distances at large current values.
● Losses are significantly lower if electricity passes through wires with increased voltage and decreased current. 2 Transmission with transformer step-up transformer increases voltage and decreases current.
● Vin/Vout = n1/n2 ( n1—number of turns in primary coil, n2—number of turns in secondary coil).
●A

j

● Input

power = Output power (assuming
100% efficiency) and
Power = Potential difference x Current
● If n2 is twenty times n1, e.m.f. induced

k

3 Use of transformer

a m i

h

l

g step-up transformer h 120 turn coil i 2400 turn coil j 1 or 2 meters of constantan wire k step-down transformer l 2400 turn coil m 120 turn coil

step up: n1 = 120, n2 = 2400; voltage increases 20 fold.
● step down: n1 = 2400, n2 = 120; voltage decreases 20 fold.
● The similarity in brightness of the two lamps shows that little power has been lost through the wires.
●

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

g

in the secondary coil is twenty times that in the primary coil.
● Current decreases by a factor of 20 and energy losses decrease by a factor of 202 (400).
● In the step-down transformer n1 is greater than n2 thus e.m.f. is reduced and current increased.

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 150

150
ELECTRICITY
Key words current electricity potential difference transformer Electric power transmission 2
1 The grid system

c

a

b

1 The grid system a power station electricity is generated at a potential difference of
25,000 V In order to reduce energy
.
losses the potential difference is increased to 400,000 V using a step-up transformer for transmission through the super grid.
● Increasing the potential difference by a factor of 400,000 / 25,000 = 16 reduces the current by a factor of 16.
Since the energy lost as heat from cables is proportional to the square of the current, this reduces the energy losses by a factor of 162 = 256.
● A step-down transformer is used to reduce the potential difference to
132,000 V for transmission through the lower voltage grid.
● Electricity at a potential difference of
132,000 V is far too dangerous for domestic use so it is necessary to reduce the potential difference using step-down transformers.
● Heavy industry uses electricity at a potential difference of several thousand volts while electricity for home use is supplied at 120 V
.
● In

2 Pylon

d

e j h

l

2 Pylon

is cheaper to suspend power lines from metal pylons that to bury them in the ground.
● The live cables are insulated from the pylon by large glass or porcelain insulators. A single neutral cable is run over the top of the pylon.

l

n a generator and power station (25 kV) b step-up transformer c 3-phase transmission
(400 kV super-grid) d step-down transformer
(grid switching point) e 132 kV grid f step-down transformer
(distribution point) g 33 kV grid

o

3 3-phase current
● If

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

k

m

● It

AC was transmitted in single phase the current would only reach its maximum positive and negative value once in each cycle. It is more economic to use 3-phase transmission where each phase is offset from its neighbor by 120˚.

i

g

f

l

3 3-phase current
1

3

current
2

h heavy industry (3-phase) i sub-station and stepdown transformer (11 kV) j light industry (3-phase) k sub-station step-down transformer (120 V) l domestic supply (single phase) m single neutral cable n insulators o 3-phase transmission

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 151

151

Transients: capacitor

ELECTRICITY
Key words capacitor current exponential exponential decay 6V

Exponential decay
Time constant (T) = RC
= 1.0 s

6

S1
Potential difference

C = 1µF

3

S2
R = 1 MΩ

1.5

0
1
T

2

3

4

5

Time (in s)

2 Capacitor discharging through 2 M⍀ resistor
6V

6

S1

Potential difference

C = 1µF

3

S2
R = 2 MΩ

1.5

1 Capacitor discharging through 1 M⍀ resistor
S1 is closed current (Ic amps) flows and the capacitor (C farads) begins to charge. The current decreases progressively slowly to zero.
Potential difference, Vc, initially rises rapidly and then progressively more slowly until reaching 6V.
● The growth curves for Ic and Vc are both exponential. A graph of charge,
Q, on the capacitor against time would have the same shape as Vc since
Q = VcC.
● S1 is opened, S2 closed, the capacitor discharges. The graph of voltage against time as the capacitor discharges is also exponential. In exponential decay curves a quantity decreases by the same fraction in equal time intervals. The time taken for half the original quantity to decay is the half life of the process.
● For capacitor value C, charged through resistor value R, and charging current constant at its starting value, the capacitor is considered fully charged after time T (the time constant). T = R x C seconds. (Although i decreases with time, T is a useful measure of a capacitor’s charging and discharging time.) ● When a 1 ␮F capacitor discharges through a resistor of 1 M⍀; time constant, T = R x C = 106 x 10-6 = 1s.
● Time taken for potential difference across the capacitor to fall to half its starting value (from 6 to 3 V)
● When

= loge2 x T = 0.7 x 1 = 0.7 s.

2 Capacitor discharging through 2 M⍀ resistor

a 2 M⍀ resistor is used; T = 2 s time taken for the potential difference of the capacitor to fall from
6 to 3V is 0.7 x 2 = 1.4 s.
● The larger the resistor, the longer the capacitor’s discharge time.
● If

● The

0
1
T

2

3

Time (in s)

4

5

half-life potential difference

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

The capacitor is charged by closing S1 and discharged through R by closing S2

1 Capacitor discharging through 1 M⍀ resistor

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 152

152
ELECTRICITY
Key words current electromagnetic induction electromotive force (e.m.f.)

exponential flux inductance resistance self inductance

Transients: inductor
1 Investigating induction

Inductor
● An

ε = 1.0V

1

L = 1.0H
0.75
Current (in amps)

inductor is a coil of wire which may either have a core of air or of some magnetic material. Inductors oppose current changes and are said to have inductance. Inductors use the symbol
L and the unit of inductance is the henry (H).
● A flux is produced in the coil when the current passes. If the current changes the resulting flux change induces an electromotive force in the coil itself. This changing magnetic field type of electromagnetic induction is called self induction.
● The current in an inductor is greater if the inductance is low i.e. the coil has few turnings and does not surround a magnetic core. It is also greater if the frequency of the AC it carries is low, therefore the current changes value more slowly.

Transients in an inductor. When the switch is closed the growth of the current is recorded against time

Exponential growth of current
Time constant
T=L
R
= 1.0 s (T)
Time for current to grow from
0 to 0.5 A = Loge 2 L
R
= 0.7 L
R
= 0.7 s
Time for current to grow from
0.5A to 0.75A = 0.7 s

0.50

R = 1.0Ω
0.25

0
1
T

2

3

4

5

Time (in s)

1 Investigating induction induced electromagnetic force opposes the current change which causes it. When connected to a supply, the current passing through an inductor grows exponentially up to a maximum. The time taken for the current to rise from 0 to 0.5 A is the same as for 0.5–0.75 A and so on.
● The time constant for a circuit containing an inductor, L, and a resistor, R, is given by L/R thus it depends both on the inductance and resistance. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

2 Effect of changing the time constant
● Increasing

the size of the resistor, R, increases the time constant and decreases the maximum current that passes through the circuit.
● The time constant for a circuit containing a 1.0 henry inductor and a
2.0 ohm resistor is 2/1 = 2.0 s.

2 Effect of changing the time constant ε = 1.0V

1

0.75
Current (in amps)

● The

L = 1.0H
0.50

0.25

R = 2.0Ω
0
1
T

2

3

Time (in s)

4

5

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 153

153

Radio

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Transmission and reception tuning circuit

modulator

a.f.

detector

amplifier and loudspeaker

r.f. + a.f.

r.f. oscillater r.f. + a.f.

alternating current (AC) amplitude modulation carrier wave demodulation a.f.

electromagnetic spectrum frequency frequency modulation modulation oscillator

1 Transmission and reception 2 AM and FM

● Audio

frequencies (a.f.) are alternating currents with frequencies below 20 kHv. Radio frequencies (r.f.) have frequencies above 20 kHz. In radio a.f. is combined with r.f. in order to send it over long distances.
● A transmitter is an oscillator that produces an r.f. current. If connected directly to an aerial it would send out an electromagnetic wave called a carrier wave Before transmission the
r.f. signal is modified or modulated to carry the a.f.
● In a receiver the tuning circuit selects the wanted signal from the aerial The detector or demodulator separates the a.f. from the r.f. carrier signal.

AM

a.f.

FM

r.f.

modulated carrier 2 AM and FM amplitude modulation (AM) the speech or music from, for example, a microphone is used to vary the amplitude of the carrier wave so that it follows the wave shape of the a.f.
● In frequency modulation (FM) the frequency of the carrier wave varies with the information signal. It increases if the information signal is positive and decreases if it is negative.
● In

3 Tuning circuit

aerial

coil

variable capacitor L
C

earth

3 Tuning circuit
V

I

time

diode amplitude modulated signal time

radio waves of different frequencies induce a signal in the aerial of a radio receiver. If the aerial is connected to an L-C circuit only the signal whose frequency equals the natural frequency of the L-C circuit is selected. This is an example of electrical resonance. The radio is tuned to different radio stations by varying the value of C.

earphone capacitor 4 Demodulation
● In

demodulation the a.f. which was added to the r.f. carrier wave is retrieved. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● All

4 Demodulation

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 154

154
ELECTRICITY
Key words cathode ray oscilloscope electron fluorescence Television
1 Electron beam tracks screen

1 Electron beam tracks screen television is, in essence, a cathode ray oscilloscope with two time bases which cause a beam of electrons tracks across the screen in a sequence of horizontal lines. When electrons hit the screen they cause the fluorescent coating to glow. A picture is produced when an incoming signal alters the number of electrons which travel from the electron gun to the screen. On the screen of a black and white television this causes the brightness of spots to vary between white through different shades of gray to black.
● A complete new picture appears on the screen every 1/25th of a second.
Each new picture is slightly different from the previous one but persistence of vision gives the effect of a continuous picture rather than a sequence of stills.
●A

2 Color image formation dots emitting blue, red and green light

2 Color image formation

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● In

a color television there are three electron guns. The fluorescent screen is coated with around a million tiny light-emitting dots arranged in triangles. ● In each triangle there is one dot that emits red light when hit by electrons, one which emits blue light and a third that emits green light.
● A metal shadow mask ensures that the electrons from one gun only hit red light emitting dots, electrons from another gun only hit blue dots, and electrons from the third gun only hit green dots.
● All colors are made by combining dots of these three colors in different intensities. For example, in a triangle of dots, if the electron beams to the red and green dots are intense while the electron beam to the blue dot is not then the dot will emit red and green lights strongly and appear yellow. glass face plate metal shadow mask

electron guns blue, red, green

electron beam hole

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 155

155

AC theory 1

ELECTRICITY
Key words

Current or voltage as fraction of peak value

1 AC as sine wave
1 +
.75
.50
.25

ωt

0
90
T
4

.50
.25

180
T
2

270
3T
2

360
T

1

1 AC as sine wave alternating current is conveniently represented as a sine wave.

2 Phase difference

–

● This

leading cycle

lagging cycle

a and b are 90°
(π) out of phase
2

shows two alternating currents which are out of phase, i.e. they do not reach maximum and minimum values at the same points.

3 Voltage across capacitor
● Alternating

ωt

0
90

180

270

360

–
3 Voltage across capacitor
+

Current leads the
e.m.f. by 90°

supply e.m.f. across capacitor ωt

0
90
Current vector Current or voltage

electromotive force (e.m.f.) frequency inductance phase sine wave

● An

.75

2 Phase difference
+
Current or voltage

alternating current (AC) amplitude capacitance capacitor l = losinωt

–

180

270

360

I = dQ = d(CVmsin␲ft) = dt dt
2␲fCVmcos2␲ft

+90° current (maximum value depends on C and frequency of supply)

e.m.f. vector current flows around a circuit containing a capacitor because the capacitor plates are continually being charged and discharged and then charged the opposite way around by the alternating voltage.
● If the amplitude of the current is denoted by the amplitude of the voltage, Vm, and its frequency by f, instantaneous voltage, V, at time, t, is
V = Vmsin␲ft.
● If C is the capacitance of a capacitor the charge on its plates is given by
Q = CV therefore Q = CVmsin␲ft.
● The current flowing at any instant, I, equals the rate at which charge is accumulating on the capacitor plates.

4 AC in inductor

4 AC in inductor

Current vector Current or voltage

+
e.m.f.
vector
–90°
ωt

0
90

180

270

360

the amplitude of the current is Im, and frequency f, instantaneous current, i, at time, t, is:
I = Imsin2␲ft.
If L is the inductance of a coil the changing current sets up a back electromotive force, E, in the coil of magnitude E = LdI = Ld(Imsin2␲ft) = dt dt
2␲fImcos2␲ft

● To

maintain the current the applied supply voltage must equal the back electromotive force.

–

supply e.m.f.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● If

current through indicator Current lags behind the e.m.f. by 90°
(maximum value depends back e.m.f. on L and frequency of supply)

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 156

156
ELECTRICITY
Key words capacitor current impedance induction coil phase potential difference resistance vector AC theory 2
1 Resistance and capacitor

2 Resistor and inductor

Impedence diagram

Impedence diagram

1 Resistor and capacitor an alternating potential difference (p.d.), V, is applied across a resistance, R, and a capacitor, C, connected in series the same current,
I, flows through each component so the reference vector will be that representing the current. The p.d. across the resistor is in phase with the current while the that across the capacitor lags by 90°.
● The resultant voltage, V= I͌(R2 + Xc2) where Xc is the reactance of C.
● The impedance, Z, of the circuit is
͌(R2 + Xc2). It is a measure of the opposition to the alternating current and is measured in ohms.
Z = V = ͌(R2 + Xc2)
● When

I

d

b

g a h f c

a reactance of capacitor =

j ωC e reactance = jωL f resistance = R
1
g impedence = (R2 + ω2L2) 2 h phase angle = tan–1 ωL
R

b resistance = R c impedence = [R2 + d phase angle = tan–1

1 ] ω2C2 (ωCR)

1
2

3 Inductor, capacitor, resistor

p

o

n

Current

2 Resistor and inductor
● Alternating p.d., V, is aplied across a resistance, R, and an induction coil, L, connected in series. The same current flows through each component so the reference vector will once again be that representing the current. The p.d. across the resistor is in phase with the current while the p.d. across the induction coil leads by 90°.
For this circuit the resultant voltage,
V = ͌(R2 + XL2) where XL is the reactance of L.
Z = V = ͌(R2 + XL2)

e

Impedence diagram i I

k

3 Inductor, capacitor, resistor © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● An

LCR circuit contains an induction coil, a capacitor and a resistor in series. The p.d. across the induction coil leads the current (reference) vector by 90° while that across the capacitor lags by 90°.
V = I͌[R2 + (XL – XC)2] and the impedance is given by
Z = V = ͌[R2 + (XL – XC)2]
I

Frequency j m

l

i reactance of L = jωL j j reactance of C = ωL k resistance = R j ωC
1
m impedence = R2 + ωL – ωC l total reactance = jωL –

2

1
2

q n capacitance on its own o inductor on its own p L and C in series (resistance in circuit comes from resistance of inductor)
1
1 q resonant frequency =
2π LC

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 157

157

R.C. network 1: AC response ELECTRICITY
Key words frequency high pass filter short-circuit 1 Crossover circuit high pass filter tweeter 1 Crossover circuit

low pass filter

input from amplifier

● More

woofer

2 Low pass filter

R
Vout

Vin

C

Output voltage

0

than one loudspeaker is needed to handle the full range of frequencies.
In practice a large loudspeaker, called a woofer, deals with low frequencies while a smaller loudspeaker, called a tweeter, deals with high frequencies.
Sometimes a third speaker may be present to deal with middle frequencies. ● The appropriate range of frequencies is directed to each speaker by a crossover circuit. The low pass filter passes low frequencies while blocking high frequencies. The high pass filter has the opposite effect.
● A common crossover frequency is 3 kHz. Frequencies above this go mostly to the tweeter while frequencies below this go mostly to the woofer.

2 Low pass filter
● In

100

500

1,000

3,000

10,000

Frequency (in Hz)

3 High pass filter
Vin

Vout

C
R

the low pass filter high frequencies in the input are short-circuited by the capacitor, C, and do not reach the output. R and C act as a potential divider across the input with C offering a much lower impedance to high frequencies than to low ones therefore there is very little high frequency voltage in the output.

3 High pass filter the high pass filter C blocks out the low frequencies but allows high frequencies to pass to the output.

Output voltage

0

100

500

1,000

3,000
Frequency (in Hz)

10,000

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● In

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 158

158
ELECTRICITY
Key words capacitor frequency resistance square wave waveform 1 Response of RC network to varying input frequency

R.C. network 2: AC response 1 Response of R.C. network to varying input frequency
R
Vout

Vin

C

● The

time constant, T, for an R.C. network is equal to the product of the capacitor (expressed in farads) and resistor (expressed in ohms). When a square wave is input to an R.C. network the waveform of the output is dependent on the frequency of the alternating current.
● When the frequency is much less than
1/T the capacitor has sufficient time to charge up and the output wave is very similar in shape to the input wave.
● When the frequency is much greater than 1/T the capacitor has insufficient time to charge up and the output wave is triangular in form and greatly smoothed. ● When the frequency is equal to 1/T the output waveform is triangular but not symmetrical.

1 output when f< — RC
<
6

0
1
> output when f> — RC
6

output when f =

1
6

— RC

where T = time constant

2 Spike generator
2 Spike generator the input is at +5V the capacitor becomes fully charged with positive charge to the left and negative charge to the right. When the input voltage drops to 0V the capacitor discharges
,
causing a negative spike as negative charge leaves it.
● When the input voltage jumps from 0V to 5V negative charge is attracted to
,
the left of the capacitor as it charges up and a positive spike occurs. As the capacitor becomes more charged the positive output falls.

C

● When

falling edge (input)

rising edge

Vin
Vin

Vout

+5

R
0

0

time

Vout
+5

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

positive spike

0 time negative spike
–5

*03 Electricity(103-159).qxd

12/11/08

3:43 PM

Page 159

159

Electricity in the car

ELECTRICITY
Key words

1 Wiring diagram for car a b c d e f g h i j

storage battery current when dynamo is charging the battery alternator (dynamo) current from dynamo or battery ignition key switch fuses headlights and sidelights ignition coil windscreen wiper motor d earth connection to chassis

–

+

e

f

accumulator battery current earth electrical energy

h

1 Wiring diagram for car
●A

car is supplied with electricity from a storage battery or accumulator. The car chassis is connected to the negative terminal so circuits run from the positive terminal through the electrical device to earth on the chassis. ● Electrical energy is used for the ignition system and for a variety of accessories including lighting and windshield wipers. When the engine is running it drives an alternator which recharges the accumulator.

+

A

–
+
–

a j c

b

g

f

2 Starter motor circuit

potential difference solenoid

n

h

i

2 Starter motor circuit

o

current of the order of 100 A is needed to drive the starter and thick wires are needed to carry such a current. To avoid having to run these wires to the ignition switch, the high current circuit is controlled by a low current circuit using a solenoid.
● When the low current circuit is completed by turning the ignition key, the solenoid throws a switch which completes the high current circuit causing the starter to turn over the engine until it starts running.
● Releasing the ignition key opens the low current circuit and reverses the action of the solenoid which, in turn, opens the high current circuit.
●A

m

k k battery l short thick wires m thin wires n ignition switch o starter solenoid p starter motor q small current r very large current

p

M l 3 Ignition circuit

r

l

s

v

t

q

x

3 Ignition circuit

u

y s t u v

ignition switch ignition coil spark plug parts of the distributor
(cam and rotor) w contacts x rotor arm y spark inside engine

w

v

a petrol engine, a mixture of petrol vapor and air is ignited inside a series of four (normally) cylinders using spark plugs.
● Current at a high potential difference is provided by an ignition coil. It passes through the spark plug causing a spark to jump across a gap at its base, igniting the gaseous mixture.
● The distributor and a series of high tension leads determine the sequence in which the spark plugs fire.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● In

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:48 PM

Page 160

160
ELECTRONICS

Circuit symbols 1

Key words cell conductor earth fluorescence fuse relay

Conductors crossing with no connection

Junctions of conductors

Battery of cells

Double junction of conductors Power supply

Aerial

Plug (male)

Earth

Socket (female)

Frame or chassis connection Signal lamp

Normally open switch

Filament lamp

Normally closed switch

Neon lamp

Relay coil

Tubular fluorescent lamp Relay contact

Components–symbols and function in circuits

Primary or secondary cell

Fuse

● Electronic

symbols are used in electric circuits in order to represent components. The use of these symbols is universal so a circuit can be read and understood by physicists who speak different languages.

cell

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

switch

socket female lamp

plug male fluorescent tube lamp

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:48 PM

Page 161

161

Circuit symbols 2

ELECTRONICS
Key words

Heater

Galvanometer

Fixed resistor

Microphone

amplifier capacitor cell electrolytic capacitor

galvanometer light-dependent resistor (LDR)

Components–symbols and function in circuits
● Electronic

Potential divider

Earphone

Capacitor

Loudspeaker

(Polarized) electrolytic capacitor symbols are used in electric circuits in order to represent components. The use of these symbols is universal so a circuit can be read and understood by physicists who speak different languages.

Electric bell

+

Inductor

cell

M

lamp

Motor

M switch Amplifier

Transformer with ferromagnetic core

Light dependent resistor
(LDR)

A

Ammeter

Photo-voltaic cell

V

motor

Voltmeter

two cells

microphone/tape recorder

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Inductor with ferromagnetic core

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:48 PM

Page 162

162
ELECTRONICS

Semiconductor components

Key words diode light-emitting diode (LED) thermistor thyristor

Circuit symbols 3

transistor zener diode

Semiconductor components ● Diodes

and transistors are formed of semiconductor materials such as silicon and germanium crystals. The material is treated in one of two ways.
Either an impurity such as arsenic is added, to give the material an excess of electrons, forming an n-type semiconductor, or an impurity such as boron is added to give the material fewer electrons (p-type semiconductor). ● A diode consists of an n-type layer fixed to a p-type layer.
● The connector from the p-type layer forms the anode and that from the ntype layer forms the cathode. When connected in a circuit in this way
(forward bias), charge carriers in the diode move to the junction between the layers and current flows. If the diode is connected the opposite way,
(reverse bias) either no current flows or, if a large voltage is applied, the diode breaks down.
● A bipolar transistor consists of three layers – either a layer of p-type material sandwiched between two ntype layers (n-p-n junction transistor) or a layer of n-type sandwiched between two p-type layers (p-n-p junction transistor). Each layer has a connector, they are called the base, the collector and the emitter.

p-n-p junction transistor

Light emitting diode
(l.e.d)

n-p-n junction transistor

Diode/rectifier

field effect transistor
(f.e.t) junction gate, n channel Zener diode

Light sensistive diode

Thyristor

Variability of components
The addition of variability to resistive, capacitative or inductive symbols is indicated as follows
Symbol

indicates a variability of value which may, or may not, be continuous

indicates that the component may be pre-set to a particular value

Variability of components

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●

The function of many electronic circuits depends on small changes caused by sensors which operate within certain known ranges, such as thermistors, whose resistance falls with increased temperature. In order for circuits to function correctly in response to signals from sensors, some components, such as resistors can be adjusted to particular values.

Description of symbol when placed across the component symbol

indicates that it has an inherent non-linear variability

The following examples illustrate the use of these symbols

Variable resistor Pre-set capacitor Resistor with inherent variability (eg thermistor *04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:48 PM

Page 163

163

Semiconductor diodes

ELECTRONICS
Key words

1 Diode anode anode cathode cell current diode

anode

filament light-emitting diode (LED) resistance 1 Diode cathode cathode

current V

forward bias Forward bias

potential difference reverse bias Reverse bias

2 LED flat edge new cathode

diode allows current to pass in one direction only. The end marked with a band is the cathode which should be connected to the cell’s negative terminal. The other end (anode) should be connected to the cell’s positive terminal.
● When anode and cathode are connected to a cell’s positive and negative terminals the diode is forward biased. Its resistance is very low and current flows through it.
Conventional current travels in the direction of the arrow in the diode symbol. ● When the diode is connected in the opposite orientation it is said to be reverse biased. It has a very high resistance and does not conduct.
● When a diode is forward biased it does not begin to conduct until the turn-on voltage (about 0.6 V for silicon diodes and 0.1 V for germanium diodes) is reached. A small increase in voltage then causes a large increase in current.
● Every diode has a maximum forward current (forward current rating) which should not be exceeded or the diode overheats and may be destroyed.
●A

2 LED light emitting diode (LED) is made from gallium arsenide phosphide.
LEDs look like tiny filament lamps and may emit red, yellow or green light when forward biased. They do not emit light when reverse biased.
● An LED should not be connected into a circuit without a series resistor to limit the current or it could be destroyed. ● LEDs are used as indicator or signal lamps in electronic equipment. They are smaller, more reliable, last longer, respond faster and need less current than filament lamps.

cathode

Forward bias

anode

Reverse bias

No light emitted © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:48 PM

Page 164

164
ELECTRONICS
Key words amplifier battery current transistor

Transistors
1 Bipolar transistor

1 Bipolar transistor bipolar transistor has three connections—the collector (C), the base (B) and the emitter (E).
● There are two main bipolar transistor types; the n-p-n and the p-n-p type.
● In the n-p-n type the base current enters by B and leaves by E. At the same time the collector current enters by C and leaves by E. The emitter current is a combination of the base and collector currents.
● When the switch is open the base current is zero. Neither lamp lights up indicating that the collector current is also zero although the battery is connected across the collector and emitter. ● When the switch is closed the base is connected to the positive terminal of the battery through the resistor. L2 lights up but not L1 showing that the collector current is much greater than the base current, which is too small to illuminate L1.
● If the base current is considered as the transistor’s input and the collector current its output, the transistor acts as an amplifier since the collector current is greater than the base current. The collector current tends to be 10 to 1000 times greater than the base current. The bipolar transistor is a current control device.

C (–)

C (+)

B
(–)

B
(+)

●A

E (+)

E (–) n-p-n type

p-n-p type

L1

L2
+
C
B

–

E

2 Field effect transistor

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●A

field effect transistor (FET) has three connections—the drain (D), the gate
(G) and the source (S).
● In an FET the input voltage at the gate controls the output current at the drain. The input current is usually negligible due to the high input resistance of the FET compared to a bipolar transistor.

2 Field effect transistor

D
G

S

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:48 PM

Page 165

165

Integrated circuits

ELECTRONICS
Key words

1 Integrated circuit

connection from ‘chip’ to pin

“chip”

plastic case

analog capacitor digital diode integrated circuit

logic gate microprocessor operational amplifier transistor

1 Integrated circuit integrated circuit consists of integrated rather than discrete electronic components. A single integrated circuit may contain thousands of diodes, resistors, transistors and small capacitors, all etched onto a small chip of silicon.

● An

metal pin

notch

2 Analog signal linear and analog integrated circuits signals are often electrical representations of physical quantities, such as sound, which change continuously and smoothly over a range of values between some minimum and maximum points.
● This type of integrated circuit includes many kinds of amplifier circuit including the operational amplifier or op amp.
● In

0.1 inch

small dot

pin 1

2 Analog signal
+

3 Digital signal ● Digital

0 time integrated circuits deal with signals which can have one of only two possible outputs; low (near 0 V) and high (near the supply voltage, typically
5 V).
● This type of integrated circuit includes logic gates, memories and microprocessors. –
3 Digital

‘low’

0 pulse time

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

signal

‘high’

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:48 PM

Page 166

166
ELECTRONICS
Key words logic gate truth table

Logic gates and their truth tables
1 AND

2 NAND

A

3 OR

A

A

A•B

1 Logic gates

B

input to a logic gate can have only one of two values. It can be low e.g. near 0 V and indicated by “0,” or it can be high e.g. close to the supply voltage of typically 5-6 V and indicated by “1.”
● A truth table for a logic gate indicates the output for all possible inputs.
● Different logic gates are different shapes and the type is sometimes written on them in circuit diagrams.

A•B

A+B

B

B

● The

2 Logic gates with truth tables © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● AND

gate—output is only high when both inputs are high, otherwise the output is low. A and B is written A.B.
● NAND (NOT AND) gate—logic output of any logic gate is reversed if the symbol is modified by adding a small circle to the base of the output.
Output is low when both inputs are high. For all other combinations of input output is high.
● OR gate—logic output is high if either or both of the inputs are low. A or B is written A+B.
● NOR (NOT OR) gate—logic output is the reverse of an OR gate.
● EXOR (exclusive OR) gate—output is high when either input is high but not when both are high.
● NEXOR (NOT exclusive OR) gate— logic output is the reverse of an exclusive OR gate.
● NOT gate—sometimes called an inverter since output is always the logical opposite to the input. Output is high when inputs are low, and low when inputs are high.
● NOT gate from NAND gate—the inputs of a NAND gate can be linked to form a gate which has the same logic as a NOT gate.
● NOT gate from NOR gate—the inputs of a NOR gate can be linked to form a
NOT gate.

B

A

Output

B

A

Output

B

A

Output

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

4 NOR

5 EXOR

A

6 NEXOR

A

A

A+B
B

AB+BA
B

AB+BA
B

B

A

Output

B

A

Output

B

A

Output

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

7 NOT

8 NOT
(from NAND)

A

A

A

9 NOT
(from NOR)
A

A

A

A

Output

A

Output

A

Output

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:48 PM

Page 167

167

NAND equivalents

ELECTRONICS
Key words

1 NOR gate

logic gate

A

B

C

D

E

Q

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

C

A

E
Q

B

Combinations of NAND gates D

of NAND logic gates can have the same logic as a single logic gate. ● The logic of a combination of gates can be followed by considering the output of each gate.
● When both inputs to a logic gate are linked it is sometime shown only as one input.
● Combinations

2 OR gate
A

B

C

D

Q

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1 NOR gate

Q
B

1

1

C

A

● The

logic of this combination of NAND gates is the same as a single NOR gate.

1

D

2 OR gate
● The

logic of this combination of NAND gates is the same as a single OR gate.

3 AND gate
● The

logic of this combination of NAND gates is the same as a single AND gate.

3 AND gate
A

B

C

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

4 Exclusive OR (EXOR) gate Q

1

C

A
B

● The

logic of this combination of NAND gates is the same as a single exclusive
OR gate.

Q

4 EXOR gate
B

C

D

E

F

Q

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

C

1

A

E
Q

B

D

F

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

A

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:48 PM

Page 168

168
ELECTRONICS
Key words logic gate

NOR equivalents
1 NAND gate
A

of NOR logic gates can have the same logic as a single logic gate. ● The logic of a combination of gates can be followed by considering the output of each gate.
● When both inputs to a logic gate are linked it is sometime shown only as one input.

D

E

Q

0

1

1

0

1

0

● Combinations

C

0

Combinations of NOR gates B
1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

● The

logic of this combination of NOR gates is the same as a single NAND gate. E

B

Q

D

2 AND gate
A

B

C

D

Q

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1 NAND gate

C

A

1

0

0

1

C

A

Q
B

D

2 AND gate
● The

logic of this combination of NOR gates is the same as a single AND gate.

3 OR gate
● The

logic of this combination of NOR gates is the same as a single OR gate.

3 OR gate

● The

logic of this combination of NOR gates is the same as a single exclusive
OR gate.

A

B

C

Q

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

4 Exclusive OR (EXOR) gate 1

0

1

C

A
B

Q

4 EXOR gate

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

A

B

C

D

E

F

Q

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

C

1

1

A

Q
D
B

F
E

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 169

169

CMOS chips showing pin connections 1 4001 quad 2-input NOR gate
+3to +15V

14

13

12

11

10

9

ELECTRONICS
Key words bistable Complementary
Metal Oxide
Semiconductor
chip (CMOS)

logic gate

8

CMOS chips
● CMOS

chips require supply voltage of
3–15 V and draw very low current but have a relatively slow switching speed.

1

2

3

4

5

6

1 4001 quad 2-input NOR gate 7

● Supply

2 4002 dual 4-input NOR gate
+3to +15V

14

NC

13

12

11

10

9

8

voltage is connected across pins 14 and 7 (pin 14 connected to positive terminal).
● The remaining pins are the inputs and outputs of four independent NOR gates. These could be connected to give the same logic as another single logic gate.

2 4002 dual 4-input NOR gate ● Supply

1

2

3

4

5

6

voltage is connected across pins 14 and 7; pins 6 and 8 do not connect to any component of the integrated circuit.
● The remaining pins are the inputs and outputs of two 4-input NOR gates.

7

3 4010 hex non-inverting buffer
+3to +15V but more than pin 1 voltage
NC

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

3 4010 hex non-inverting buffer ● Positive

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

terminal of the supply voltage is connected to pins 16 and 1; pin 8 is connected to earth; pin 13 does not connect to any component of the integrated circuit.
● The remaining pins are the inputs and outputs of six non-inverting buffers.

+3to +15V

4 4044 quad R/S flip-flop
(NAND logic)

+3to +15V

16

15

S

R4

Q1

R3

S3

Q3

Q2

14

S4

13

12

11

10

9

Q

S

R

S

Q

Q

S

R

R

Q

R

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Q4

NC

S1

R1

EN

R2

S2

8

R/S bistable is a switching circuit with two outputs. One is high when the other is low. The outputs are complementary (changing low output to high changes high output to low).
● Each state is stable (bistable). A state is retained or stored until the bistable is triggered when one output flips from
0 to 1 and the other flops from 1 to 0
(alternative name—flip-flop).
● An

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

4 4044 quad R/S flip-flop (NAND logic)

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 170

170
ELECTRONICS
Key words
Boolean algebra

Operators
● “+”

denotes OR
“•” denotes AND
“¯” denotes NOT.

Boolean algebra
1 Basic functions

0+A=A
1+A=1
A+A=A
A+A=1
OR function

AND function

1 Basic functions
● OR

function—when A is combined with 0 the output is always A no matter whether it is high or low. When
A is combined with 1 the output is always 1. When A is combined with itself the output is always the value of
A. When A is combined with not A the outcome is always 1.
● AND function—when A is combined with 0 the output is always 0 no matter whether it is high or low. When A is combined with 1 the output is always
A. When A is combined with itself the output is always the value of A. When
A is combined with not A the outcome is always 0.
● NOT function—NOT (NOT A) equals
A.
● Commutation—functions using OR operators and AND operators can be performed in any order.

2 Association
● Brackets

may be disregarded as operations may be performed in any order. A=A
NOT function

3 Distribution

A • (A + B) = A • B + A • C
(A + B) • (B + A) = A + B • C

4 De Morgan’s theorem

4 De Morgan’s theorem
© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

governing relations between pairs of logical operators when simplifying a long bar symbol.

Commutation

A + (B + C) = (A + B) + C
A • (B • C) = (A • B) • C

● An

● Rule

A+B=B+A
A • B=B •A

2 Association

3 Distribution operator is distributed over its terms (giving precedence to one operator over the other).

0•A=0
1•A=A
A•A+A
A•A=0

(A + B) = A • B
(A • B) = A + B

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 171

171

Combinational logic design 1
1 Burglar alarm

ELECTRONICS
Key words

2 Automatic night light
+5V

+5V a binary code light-dependent resistor (LDR) light-emitting diode (LED)

logic gate

1 Burglar alarm

b

light-dependent resistor (LDR) and the adjacent resistor act as a potential divider. In the dark the resistance of the LDR is high and both inputs to the NAND gate are high and the output is 0.
● When light shines on the LDR its resistance drops and that input to the
NAND gate becomes low. The result is an output of 1 which causes the buzzer to sound.
● The

c

0V

0V

a,b pull-up resistor – to keep input high when switch is open and no light is shining on the LDR
Note: CMOS inputs must not float c buzzer

2 Automatic night light
● During

3 2-bit decoder

4 2-bit encoder
+5V

B
F0

P

F1

B
0

F2

1

2

3
A

3 2-bit decoder and truth table F3
0V
Truth table

Truth table
F0 F 1

B

A

F2 F 3

0

1

2

3

B

A

P

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

X

X

0

decoder converts a binary input into a form which can be displayed.
The network of AND and NOT gates provide a different output for each different combination of inputs from A and B.

●A

4 2-bit encoder and truth table ● An

encoder converts an input into a binary output. Closing a switch causes the voltage across the wire to fall.
Closing each different combination of the switches produces a unique output from A and B.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

A

the day the LDR is illuminated and its resistance is low. The low input to the first NAND gate is inverted to give a high input to the second NAND gate. The high input to the second
NAND gate is inverted to give a low output so the LED is not lit.
● As it goes dark the resistance of the
LDR rises and gives a high input to the first NAND gate. This is inverted, giving a low input to the second inverting NAND gate. The resulting high output from the second NAND gate turns the LED on.

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 172

172
ELECTRONICS
Key words light-dependent resistor (LDR) logic gate resitance thermistor

Combinational logic design 2
1 Switch for electric motor

2 Fire alarm
+5V

1 Switch for electric motor
● With

the switch open, voltage across the NAND gate is high. This provides a low input to the NOT gate. The NOT gate provides a high output which activates the relay, completing the motor circuit.
● With the switch closed, voltage across the NAND gate is low. This provides a high input to the NOT gate. The NOT gate provides a low output which deactivates the relay, switching off the motor. buzzer

thermistor

+5V

2 Fire alarm resistance of a thermistor falls with increasing temperature.
● The resistor and thermistor act as potential dividers. At low temperatures the thermistor’s resistance is high, thus the input to the NAND gate is high. The NAND gate acts as an inverter so its output is low.
● If there is a fire the thermistor’s resistance falls. The input to the NAND gate becomes low, its output high and the buzzer is turned on.
● The

0V

0V

driver

motor

driver

4 Non-sequential traffic lights AB
R

3 Length detector
+5V

3 Length detector

Y

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

resistance of a light dependant resistor (LDR) falls with increasing brightness. ● When both LDRs are dark, voltage across them is high and inputs to the
NAND gate are both high. This produces a high output at the second
NAND gate, sounding the buzzer.
● If one LDR is moved towards a light its resistance falls, as does the voltage across it. When one input to the
NAND gate is low its output is high; output of the second NAND gate will be low and the buzzer will not sound.

G

A

● The

four possible inputs can be used to illuminate different combinations of lights. G

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1
0V

Y

0

l

R

0

4 Non-sequential traffic lights B

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 173

173

Sequential logic 1: the bistable 1 S-R flip-flop
S

Q

ELECTRONICS
Key words bistable latch logic gate truth table

S

Q
The bistable
● Bistables

Q´(Q)

R using NOR gates

Q

R

are used as latches, in counters, registers and memories.
● An R-S bistable has two inputs, R (for
RESET), and S (for SET) and two outputs Q and Q.

1 S-R flip-flop

using NAND gates

● Using

State

S

R Q Q

Set

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

?

?

Reset
Indeterminate

2 R-S flip-flop
S

Q

Q

R

truth table

S

Q

Q

R

NOR gates—An R-S bistable can be made from two NOR gates connected so that the output from each gate is fed back as the input of the other.
● Using NAND gates—An R-S bistable can be made from two similarly connected NAND gates.
● Truth table—when S is at logic 1 and R is at logic 0 the bistable is in one stable state in which Q is at logic 1 and Q is at logic 0. Even if R now becomes logic
1 the same state remains.
When R is at logic 1 and S is at logic 0 the bistable flips into its second stable state in which Q is at logic 0 and
Q is at logic 1. Even if S now becomes logic 1 the same state remains.
When S and R are both at logic 1, Q and Q can be at either logic 1 or 0 depending on the state before this input condition existed. The previous output state is retained.

2 Reset-set (R-S) flip-flop

State

S

truth table

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0 0

1

0 0

1

1

1

?

● The

circuit symbol for a Reset-set (RS) flip-flop. 1

0 ?

3 Circuit symbol

3 Circuit symbol

1

0

Indeterminate

0

0

Reset

logic of the inputs can be reversed using inverters.

R Q Q

0

Set

● The

using NOR gates

S

Q

R

Q

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

using NAND gates

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 174

174
ELECTRONICS
Key words bistable latch logic gate

Sequential logic 2: examples using the bistable 1 The latched burglar alarm
+5V

1 The latched burglar alarm many latches when the input goes low the output goes high. The output then stays high no matter what happens at the input i.e. it is latched to a high output. The output can only be reset to low by a reset switch.
● In this circuit the two NAND gates form an R-S bistable. Assuming that the inputs to the upper NAND gate are
1 and 1, the output will be 0 and the alarm does not sound.
● When the trip switch is closed the inputs to the upper NAND gate now become 0 and 1. The output is now 1 and the alarm rings.
● The inputs to the lower NAND gate become 1 and 1 giving an output of 0.
This feeds back to the upper NAND gate so the inputs are 0 and 0 and the output remains 1.
● If the trip switch is immediately opened the inputs to the upper NAND gate are 1 and 0 so the output remains at 1 and the alarm continues to ring.
● The alarm can only be switched off by closing the reset switch. When this switch is closed the inputs to the lower NAND gate become 1 and 0 and the output becomes 1. This output feeds back to the upper NAND gate changing its inputs to 1 and 1. The output becomes 0 and the alarm ceases to sound.
● In

trip

0V

re-set

2 Reversing an electric motor

driver

+5V

2 Reversing an electric motor © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● The

two NAND gates form an R-S bistable. When the set switch is closed one of the relays is activated and the motor starts to rotate in one direction, continuing to do so even if the set switch is opened.
● When the reset switch is closed the first relay is deactivated and the second relay is activated, which reverses the direction of the motor’s rotation. set

re-set

driver

0V

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 175

175

Clocked logic

ELECTRONICS
Key words

1 The clocked bistable
S

Q

pulse input bistable clocked logic square wave

1 The clocked bistable

Q
R
2 Timing diagram for clocked bistable clock input

Q output

● Clock

pulses are supplied by a pulse generator. This could be a mechanical switch turning a d.c. supply on and off or it could be a crystal-controlled oscillator which supplies a steady repetition frequency.
● Pulses should have a good square wave form i.e. they should have a fast rise and fall time. Any switches must be debounced.

2 Timing diagram for clocked bistable
● Each

time

3 Debouncing using logic gates
+5V
R
R1

Q

R2

(debounced output) R
S
S
0V
4 Circuit symbol for clocked flip-flop

S

Q

Clock
R

5 D-type flip-flop used as clocked bistable
R
Q

D

3 De-bouncing using logic gates ● More

than one pulse may result from using a mechanical to change the state of a bistable, due to the metal switch contacts not staying together at first but bouncing off each other.
● The effect of bounce contact is eliminated by using an R-S bistable in the debouncing circuit. When the switch is moved from R to S, the output Q remains at logic 0 even if bouncing occurs.

4 Circuit symbol for clocked flip-flop
● Circuit

symbol for an R-S bistable is modified to show a clocked flip-flop.

5 D-type flip-flop used as clocked bistable
● In

Clock
Q

Q
S

a D-type bistable one bit of data
(0 or 1) is input at D for processing by the bistable. Pulses are applied to the clock input to control exactly when D input is processed. S is the set input allowing Q to be set to 1. R is the reset input allowing Q to be set to 0.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Q output

time the pulse falls it causes the bistable to toggle. The first pulse leaves Q = 1 and Q = 0. During second clock pulse logic of outputs is reversed—Q = 0 and Q = 1. Toggling continues with each pulse input.

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 176

176
ELECTRONICS
Key words bistable clocked logic light-dependent resistor (LDR) logic gate

Examples of clocked logic 1 Sequential traffic lights
R
S
Q

1&2 Sequential traffic lights type of bistable is rising-edge triggered. The change in voltage as the clock pulse rises from logic 0 to logic 1 changes the output logic.
● As clock voltage rises, output at Q is logic 1 and the red light shines. While clock is at logic 1 yellow light stays off
(logic 1 is inverted to logic 0 by upper
NOR gate). Inputs to lower NOR gate are 1 and 0, giving output 0 and green light stays off.
● As clock voltage falls to 0, output at Q remains 1, red light stays shining, but logic 0 is inverted to 1 by upper NOR gate and the yellow light comes on.
Inputs to the lower NOR gate are now
1 and 1, giving output of 0 so green light stays off.
● When clock voltage rises to logic 1 again, output at Q becomes logic 0 and the red light goes off. The logic 1 is inverted to logic 0 by the upper
NOR gate and the yellow light goes off.
Inputs to lower NOR gate are now 0 and 0, giving output of 1, turning the green light on.

2
R

Red
Red and yellow
Green
Yellow

Clock

● This

R
Y
Y

G
G
3 Dual system traffic lights
S Q
S Q

S

Q

Clock

Clock

Clock

R Q

R Q

R Q

R

R

Y

Y

G

G

3 Dual system traffic lights
● Circuit

containing several clocked bistables and NOR gates provides a dual system of traffic lights. Sequences are off-set—as one set of lights changes from red to green the other changes from green to red.

4 Interval timer light shines on LDR1 its resistance falls and input to upper
NAND gate becomes logic 0. This is inverted to give output of logic 1 which sets the bistable. Output at Q is logic 1 and the counter starts.
● When the light moves from LDR1 to
LDR2, resistance of the former rises while that of the latter falls, resetting the bistable, giving an output of logic 0 at Q which stops the counter.

4 Interval timer
+v
100 Hz clock pulse input

10kΩ
10kΩ

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● When

S

Q

1
Clock

R

Q dual decade counter

1

2

Reset

Hold

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 177

177

Counting circuits 1

Key words

1 Binary up-counter
D
Q

S

R

C
Q

S

Clock

R

Q

R

Q

Q

S

Clock

Clock

R

Q

Counting circuits

D
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

C
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

B
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

A
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

3 Binary-down counter
D

Pulse number D
8
1
9
1
10
1
11
1
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1

C

C
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

B

B
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

counters consist of bistables connected so that they toggle when pulses to be counted are applied to their clock input.
● Counting is done in binary code using only 0 and 1. 0 and 1 correspond to the low and high states of binary output. ● Electronic

Q

2 Counting table for binary-up counter
Pulse number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

binary code bistable clocked logic

A

B
S

Clock

Q

ELECTRONICS

A
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1 Binary up-counter
● In

an up counter the count increases by one for each clock pulse.
● The Q output of each clocked bistable becomes the clock input of the next.

2 Counting table for binary-up counter
● The

total count at any time is given by the states of:
D
23
8

A

C
22
4

B
21
2

A
20
1

●A

Q

S
Clock

R

Q

S
Clock

R

Q

Q

S
Clock

Q

R

S

counter with four clocked bistables can count up to 1111 in binary (15 in base 10).

Q

Clock

Q

R

3 Binary-down counter

Q

● In

a down counter the count decreases by one for each clock pulse.

4 Dual decade counter binary counter

A
B
Clock
C

A
B
C

D

seven segment decoder and display

A
B
Clock
C

A
B
C

D

D

D

Reset

Reset

The output of a binary counter is a sequence of 0s and 1s representing a number. This is decoded and different combinations of segments are turned on and off to represent each number.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

●

4 Dual decade counter

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 178

178
ELECTRONICS
Key words battery binary code bistable clocked logic

light-dependent resistor (LDR)

Counting circuits 2
1 Switching machine off for 5 s in every 20 s
+
a

Reset

1 Switching machine off for
5 s in every 20s binary counter and timed bistables provide an output of 0 for 15 out of every 20 second period. This is inverted by the NOT gate which activates the relay, turning the motor on. ● For the remaining 5 seconds the output is 1. This is inverted by the
NOT gate and thus deactivates the relay turning the motor off.

S

A
B
C
D

S

Q

Clock

Q

R

c

b

a 1 Hz clock input b driver c relay

● The

M

2 Reversing action of food mixer every 5 s d Reset

A
B
C
D

+

Q

S

+

Clock

M
Q

R

2 Reversing action of food mixer every 5 s

d 1 Hz clock input

● This

type of circuit is sometimes used in food mixers. Activating the relay does not turn the motor on or off, but reverses the direction of the current and thus the direction in which the motor rotates.

Q

Clock

Q

R

+

+

3 Flashing a lamp

+

e

e 1 Hz clock input

A
B
Clock
C
D
Reset

3

3 Flashing a lamp
● The

output from a binary counter can be used to turn a lamp on and off a given number of times. When the switch is turned on in this circuit the lamp flashes 6 times.

4 Automatic light buoy
● Flashing

lamps have many possible applications including providing warnings such as buoys which mark the position of an underwater hazard.
The circuit can be modified using an
LDR so that the light only flashes when it is dark which preserves the battery.

4 Automatic light buoy f A
B
Clock
C
D
Reset

Adaptation so that light only comes on at night

(pull-up resistor not shown)

5 Batch counter
A
B
Clock
C

● Batches

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

g

f 1 Hz clock input g to clock input

5 Batch counter of articles can be counted either by depressing switches manually or having an arrangement in which a switch is triggered each time an article passes a sensor.

1HZ

Light is on for one second

D

h

A
B
C

Clock

i

D

Reset

Reset

Hold

j h number of articles in batch i number of batches l articles pass the LDR to operate clock
(pull-up resistor not shown) k conveyer belt motor

Q

S
S

Q

R

Q

M k *04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 179

179

Operational amplifiers 1
1 Schematic circuit of the 741 op-amp chip

ELECTRONICS
Key words

V+

capacitor operational amplifier transistor a c 1 Schematic circuit of the
741 op-amp chip
● Operational

b

V–

d

d

2 Circuit symbol for op-amp non-inverting input inverting input output off-set null

● There

is one output and two inputs; an inverting input (marked -) and a non-inverting input (marked +).
The – and + input signs should not be confused with the polarity of the power supplies.

2 Circuit symbol for op-amp
+Vs
–

3 Transfer characteristic
● The

+

V1

V0

–Vs

V2

3 Transfer characteristic
V2>V1
Saturation

V0/V
+Vs
A

(V2–V1)µV
B
Saturation
V2<V1

–Vs

polarity of a voltage applied at the inverting input is reversed at the output. A voltage applied at the noninverting input gives an amplified voltage of the same polarity.
● If V2 > V1 i.e. the non-inverting input is greater than the inverting input then
Vout is always positive.
● If V1 > V2 i.e. the inverting input is greater than the non-inverting input then Vout is always negative.
● If V1 = V2 then Vout = 0.
● An op-amp acts as a differential voltage amplifier. It amplifies the difference between V1 and V2.
● A and B show where saturation starts.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

a b c d amplifiers or op-amps have many uses including as high gain voltage amplifiers of both a.c. and d.c. and as switches.
● The 741 op-amp chip contains around
20 transistors together with resistors and capacitors all etched onto a silicon chip. It requires a dual power supply which gives equal positive and negative voltages; +Vs, 0 and –Vs where typically +Vs = +15 V and
–Vs = -15 V. The centre point of the power supply, 0 V is common to both
,
the input and output circuits.

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 180

180
ELECTRONICS
Key words amplifier impedance inverting amplifier

operational amplifier Operational amplifiers 2
1 Amplifier with negative feedback
Rf
Ri

P
–

1 Amplifier with negative feedback an op-amp is used as an amplifier the output is fed back to the inverting input. The voltage at the output is of opposite polarity to the one from which the feedback was taken, thus the output and the gain of the amplifier is reduced i.e. the feedback is negative.
● Although negative feedback reduces the gain of the amplifier it results in a more stable amplifier whose gain can be accurately predicted. The amplifier has a better frequency response and output distortion is reduced.
● When

+

Vi

Vo
Vo –Rf
=
Vi
Ri

2 Non-inverting amplifier
–
+

Rf
Vo

Vi
Ri

2 Non-inverting amplifier
● In

a non-inverting amplifier the input voltage is applied to the non-inverting input of the op-amp. The result is an output voltage of the same polarity as the input voltage.
● Negative feedback is obtained by feeding back to the inverting input a fraction of the output voltage developed across Ri in the potential divider formed by the resistors.

3 Voltage follower
●A

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

voltage follower is a special case of the non-inverting amplifier in which all of the output is fed back to the inverting input. The output voltage is equal to the input voltage but the circuit has an extremely high input impedance and low output impedance making it suitable as a buffer amplifier to match a high impedance source with a low impedance load.

4 Summing amplifier

0V

3 Voltage follower
–
+

Vo

Vi

0V

4 Summing amplifier
R1
l1
V1

l2

R2

● When

an op-amp is connected as a multi-input amplifier it can be used to add a number of voltages, either d.c. or a.c. This type of circuit is used as a mixer in audio applications to combine the outputs of microphones, electrical instruments and special effects.

Vo
R
= 1+ f
Vi
Ri

V2

l3 R3
V3

l
P

Vo = –Vi

Rf
Rf
R
R
V + fV + fV
R1 1 R2 2 R3 3
If Rf = R1 = R2 = R3
Vo = –

–

Then Vo = – (V1 + V2 + V3)

+

Vo

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 181

181

Operational amplifiers 3

ELECTRONICS
Key words

1 Simple integrating circuit

capacitor light-emitting diode (LED) operational amplifier

1µF

thermistor transistor waveform

1MΩ
–

VOUT

d

VIN = –3V (RC = 1s) the output is shown on a CRO at ‘d’

2 Output of the integrator
0

f

1

2

op-amp is the basis of a ramp generator for producing a voltage with a sawtooth waveform.
● When steady input voltage Vin is applied through resistor R, after time t (s) the output voltage Vout is
Vout = - (1/CR) ͐Vin dt where C is in ␮F and R is in M⍀. Since the inverting input is used, negative sign indicates that output voltage is negative if input voltage is positive and vice versa.
● An

+

VIN

1 Simple integrating circuit

3

4

5

t/s

0

2 Output of the integrator
–3

● If

V1/V
V0/V
+15 h +10

g

+5
0
0 e input voltage f output voltage

1

2

3

4

g saturation h ramp voltage

3 Low temperature alarm

t/s

3 Low temperature alarm

+15V

● An

thermister

V1
0V
R

–15V

5

V2

–
+

op-amp can act as a switch in a similar way to a transistor.
● The thermistor and the resistor R form a potential divider across the 15 V supply. The op-amp compares the voltage V1 at the potential divider junction with V2 which is 0 V
.
● If the temperature falls below a certain value (determined by setting R) the thermistor’s resistance becomes greater than that of R. There is a greater voltage drop across the thermistor than R thus V1 becomes negative. V2 > V1 which switches Vout from around -15 V to + 15 V lighting the LED.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

e

input voltage of -3 V is applied, output voltage rises by +3 V per second. If a power supply of ±15 V is used the output voltage will be close to 15 V after 5 seconds when the opamp becomes saturated. Input voltage is thus added up or integrated over time t to give a ramp voltage waveform whose slope is –Vin when CR=1s.
● To reset output voltage to zero when it reaches its maximum value a transistor can be connected across the capacitor to short circuit the capacitor causing the output voltage to fall to 0
V when it receives a reset pulse.

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 182

182
ELECTRONICS
Key words cathode ray oscilloscope differential equation feedback

operational amplifier Operational amplifiers 4
1 Solving the differential equation
CRO to show solution

+V

Differential equations
● The

rate of change of a variable, y, with respect to time, t, is given by dy dt.

Similarly, the rate of change of

–

dy dt –
+

with respect to time is given by

+

d2y dt2. ● Equations

of the form

ad2y + bdy = kx dt dt2

are described as differential equations and are solved by the process of integration. ● An op-amp is able to add up or integrate voltage over time and can therefore be used to solve differential equations. 1 Solving the differential equation the output of this amplifier is d2y dt2 the output of this amplifier is – dy dt 2 Producing oscillations
CRO to show solution

feedback to the first op-amp is to the inverting input thus a positive input provides an output which is negative. ● The feedback to the second op-amp is also to the inverting input thus the output is also inverted. Since the input is negative, the output is inverted and therefore is positive.
● The

y t 2 Producing oscillations

–

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

the output from the second opamp is negative, it is necessary to add a third op-amp which acts as an inverter to provide a positive output for display on a cathode ray oscilloscope. –

–

+

● Where

+

+

0V this amplifier inverts d2y to solve d2y = –ky dt2 dt2

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 183

183

Operational amplifiers 5

Key words

1 Wien network and oscillator
C

capacitor feedback frequency operational amplifier

R1

R1
–

Vi

R3 output Vo
R2

C2

R4

0V
Wien network
Wien oscillator

Op amp oscillator circuit

waves in the audio frequency range (20–20,000 Hz) can be generated by an op-amp using a Wien network circuit.
● To obtain oscillations the network is used with the non-inverting input of the op-amp giving an output to the
Wien network in phase with its input.
● Sine

2 Op-amp astable multivibrator
Voltage

R1

+Vs

V2

2 Op-amp astable multivibrator V1

V2

● An

0

–

Time
V1

Vo

V2

–Vs

+

R3
+Vs

C2

Vo
A

0

B
Time

R2

T1

T2

V2 > V1

V1 > V2

–Vs

0V
Op amp astable multivibrator

1 Wien network and oscillator op-amp voltage comparator in its saturated condition can work as an oscillator. ● Suppose output voltage V0 is initially positive. A fraction of V0, V2, is fed back to the non-inverting input. V0 is also fed back to the inverting input via resistor R1, causing V1 to rise as capacitor C1 is charged.
● When V1 becomes greater than V2, the op-amp switches into negative saturation and V0 is negative.
● Capacitor C1 now starts charging in the opposite direction causing V1 to fall rapidly until eventually becoming less than V2. The op-amp then switches into positive saturation and V0 is positive. This continues indefinitely at a frequency determined by the value of the capacitor.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

C2

op-amp can become an oscillator by feeding back the output to the input in such a way as to ensure that the feedback is in phase with the input
i.e. positive, and that it is sufficient to make good energy losses in the circuit so the amplified output consists of undamped electrical oscillations.
● The action of the oscillator is to supply its own input and convert d.c. from the power supply to a.c. The resulting
a.c. can have a variety of waveforms depending on the circuit.
● An

+

V1

oscillator waveform Op-amp as oscillator

C1

R2

ELECTRONICS

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 184

184

Key words alternating current (AC) current diode electrolytic capacitor

potential difference rectifier transformer a.c. rectification diode only allows current to flow in one direction, so diodes can rectify, or convert, alternating to direct current.

●A

1 Half-wave rectification

Rectifier circuits
1 Half-wave rectification c b

a

e

d

Time

d input-voltage e output-voltage

a a.c. mains b diode c load resistor

d input-voltage e output-voltage

2 Full-wave rectification

● The

negative half cycle of the a.c. is removed to give a varying d.c. Halfwave rectification is wasteful since half the electrical energy is lost as heat from the diode. Many loads require steadier d.c. than is produced by halfwave rectification.

e

d

Voltage

ELECTRONICS

c

c

a

d

b

a

d

e

e

2 Full-wave rectification

3 Smoothing

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Variations

in d.c. are smoothed by connecting a large electrolytic capacitor across the load. The capacitor charges as the current rises, and discharges as it falls. The capacitor smoothes the current by reducing the height of the current peaks while eliminating the points where current is zero. ● The amplitude of the ripple voltage is decreased if the value of the capacitor is increased A greater charge is held and the potential difference across the capacitor falls less when it supplies current. This amplitude also decreases when the output current drawn by the load decreases, because the potential difference across a capacitor is affected less the smaller the current drawn from it.

a b c d e

a.c. mains diode load resistor input-voltage output-voltage

b

center tap transformer bridge rectifier a c d e

a.c. mains load resistor input-voltage output-voltage

3 Smoothing

e

d

a

Voltage

the center tap transformer, current passes through the upper diode on the first half of the cycle and through the lower diode on the second.
● The bridge rectifier is a bridge of four diodes. Current passes through opposite pairs of diodes during each alternating current half cycle.
● The negative half cycle of a.c. becomes positive, resulting in a varying d.c. in which none of the a.c. is lost.
● In

g

c

e

d

Time

d input-voltage e output-voltage

e

h

a c d e g

a.c. mains load resistor input-voltage output-voltage smoothing capacitor

e output-voltage h capacitor charging i capacitor discharging

i

effect on smoothing on half-wave rectification e

h

e output-voltage h capacitor charging i capacitor discharging

i

effect on smoothing on full-wave rectification *04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 185

185

The microprocessor
1 Basic computer interconnections ELECTRONICS

2 Interconnection via a bus

Key words bus microprocessor

c

a

b

1 Basic computer interconnections ●A

computer consists of input devices, such as a keyboard; output devices, such as a visual display unit (VDU) and a printer; a central processing unit
(CPU) and memory. The CPU is connected to other parts of the system by three sets of wires called buses because they transport information.
● A clock generates timing pulses at frequencies of several megahertz which are used to synchronize the computer’s operations so that they take place at the correct time and in the correct sequence.

d

e
VDU (Visual Display Unit) memory printer keyboard Central Processing Unit (CPU)

g f the bus g wires of the bus

3 Use of a tristate
1

f

j

2 Interconnection via a bus

0

● The

Input Enable Output bang 0

h i j k k

i

Basic layout of tri-state device input output normal inverter
“enables” switch

n

Z

1

1

1 h Z

0

0
Bus wire cannot be both high and low at the same time

0

1

1

0

Circuit symbol of tri-state and truth table; Z means not connected

3 Use of a tristate

l

● To

l

a

m

c

m

e

a VDU (Visual Display Unit) c printer e Central Processing Unit (CPU) l tri-state m enable control
Connection to the bus via tristate buffers

o

one-way address bus carries signals from the CPU enabling it to access data in specific locations in the memory. ● The data bus allows two-way transfer of data between the CPU and other parts of the system.
● The control bus transmits timing and control signals to keep the different parts of the system working in step.

l tri-state n information bus o control bus

Addition of control bus to enable the buffers

prevent interference between those parts of the system that are not sending signals to the bus and those that are, all parts have a tristate gate in their output. Each gate is enabled or disabled by a control unit.
● When the tristate gate is enabled, the output is low or high and signals can be sent to, or received from the bus.
● When the tristate gate is disabled, the output has such a high impedance that it is effectively disconnected from the bus and can neither receive or send signals. It thus does not upset signals already passing along the bus.
● Components are connected to the bus via tristate buffers.
● A control bus is used to enable the buffers. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

a b c d e

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 186

186
ELECTRONICS
Key words amplitude analog digital waveform

Analog and digital signals 1 Analog signal
+

Information transmission
● Information

can be represented and transmitted electrically either as an analog or as a digital signal.

0

time

1 Analog signal analog signal represents a physical quantity which can vary continuously with time.
● The information carried by an analog signal is in the amplitude and waveform of the physical quantity.
● An

–
2 Digital signal
1
time
0

2 Digital signal digital signal consists of a sequence of binary code with 1 and 0 representing high and low voltages.
● Information in the signal is coded using the American Standard Code for
Information Interchange (ASCII), a code consisting of 8 digits or bits.
●A

3 Advantages of digital signal transmitted pulses

3 Advantages of digital signal weaken pulses plus noise

● Signals

weaken as they travel and require amplification. They also pick up stray voltages and currents which form noise, distorting the signal.
● Noise is amplified when analog signals are amplified.
● Digital signals can be regenerated as clean, noise free pulses.

regenerated pulses 4 Analog to digital conversion

4 Analog to digital conversion Voltage level 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Sample time 4
Voltage level

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

000
001
01 0
01 1
1 00
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1

5

● The

analog voltage is divided into a number of levels. Measurements are taken regularly to find the level. Each level is represented by a binary code. A three-bit code can represent 23 = 8 levels (0–7).
● The accuracy of the conversion increases with the number of voltage levels and the frequency of sampling.

3-bit code

Digital signal t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 000
01 1
1 00
1 0 1
1 1 0
01 0

6

3
2
1
0

t0

t1

t2 t3 Analog signal

t4

t5

*04 Electronics (160-187).qxd

12/11/08

3:49 PM

Page 187

187

ASCII code

ELECTRONICS

Hex

ASCII

Dec

Hex

ASCII

Dec

Hex

ASCII

000

00

NUL

043

2B

+

086

65

V

001

01

SOH

044

2C

,

087

66

W

002

02

STX

045

2D

–

088

67

X

003

03

ETX

046

2E

.

089

68

Y

004

04

EOT

047

2F

/

090

69

Z

005

05

ENQ

048

30

0

091

6A

[

006

06

ACK

049

31

1

092

6B

\

007

07

BEL

050

32

2

093

6C

]

008

08

BS

051

33

3

094

6D

^

009

09

HT

052

34

4

095

6E

_

010

0A

LF

053

35

5

096

6F

‘

011

0B

VT

054

36

6

097

70

a

012

0C

FF

055

37

7

098

71

b

013

0D

CR

056

38

8

099

72

c

014

0E

SO

057

39

9

100

73

d

015

0F

SI

058

3A

:

101

74

e

016

10

DLE

059

3B

;

102

75

f

017

11

DC1

060

3C

<

103

76

g

018

12

DC2

061

3D

=

104

77

h

019

13

DC3

062

3E

>

105

78

i

020

14

DC4

063

3F

?

106

79

j

021

15

NAK

064

40

@

107

7A

k

022

16

SYN

065

41

A

108

7B

l

023

17

ETB

066

42

B

109

7C

m

024

18

CAN

067

43

C

110

7D

n

025

19

EM

068

44

D

111

7E

o

026

1A

SUB

069

45

E

112

7F

p

027

1B

ESCAPE

070

46

F

113

56

q

028

1C

FS

071

47

G

114

57

r

029

1D

GS

072

48

H

115

58

s

030

1E

RS

073

49

I

116

59

t

031

1F

US

074

4A

J

117

5A

u

032

20

SPACE

075

4B

K

118

5B

v

033

21

!

076

4C

L

119

5C

w

034

22

”

077

4D

M

120

5D

x

035

23

#

078

4E

N

121

5E

y

036

24

$

079

4F

O

122

5F

z

037

25

%

080

50

P

123

60

{

038

26

&

081

51

Q

124

61

|

039

27

’

082

52

R

125

62

}

040

28

(

083

53

S

126

63

~

041

29

)

084

54

T

127

64

DEL

042

2A

*

085

55

U

Key words binary code bit ASCII code
● An

agreed code represents letters of the alphabet and other symbols.
● The American Standard Code for
Information Interchange (ASCII) is a code consisting of 8 digits or bits giving an eight-bit code which allows a maximum of 28 = 256 characters to be coded in binary. This provides sufficient different codes for all letters of the alphabet, both upper and lower case, numbers from 0 to 9 and a variety of punctuation marks and other symbols. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Dec

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 188

188

Key words

Function and scaling
1 Linear relationship

direct proportion inverse-square law radiation ●A

straight-line graph indicates that one variable is directly proportional to another. The mass of a piece of iron is directly proportional to its volume; doubling the volume doubles the mass. ● Since density = mass / volume, the gradient of the graph gives the density of iron; 31.6 / 4 = 7.9 kg m-3.

25

100

20

Mass (in kg)

1 Linear relationship

2 Square relationship

80

Area (in m2)

UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS

15

10

60

40

20

5

0

0
0

1

2

3

0

4

2
4
6
8
Length of edge (in m)

Volume (in m3)
● The

area of a square is equal to the product of its two sides (i.e., the area of a square is proportional to the square of its length).

3 Cubic relationship
70
60

3 Cubic relationship volume of a cube is equal to the product of its three sides (i.e., the volume of a cube is proportional to the cube of its length).

4 Similar figures

50
Volume (in m3)

● The

2L

40
L
30
20

● If

the linear dimensions of similar objects are in the ratio of 1:x then the ratio of their areas will be 1:x2. If the length of the larger figure is twice that of the smaller figure its area will be four times greater than the smaller figure. ● For similar 3-dimensional objects if the linear dimensions are in the ratio 1:x then the ratio of their volumes will be
1:x3.

10
0

0

1

2

4

5 Inverse-square relationship
10

B

A

● According

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

3

Length (in m)

5 Inverse-square relationship to the inverse-square law, the intensity of an effect is reduced in inverse proportion to the square of the distance from the source. This law is true for most types of radiations, including light, and fields.
● From the graph, it can be seen that light intensity 10 m from the light source is four times greater than the intensity at 20 m.

4 Similar figures

p

12m

6m

I

0.8

Intensity

2 Square relationship

10

0.6

0.4
1
–I
4
0.2
1
–I
9

0
0
4m2

16m2

10

20
30
Distance (in m)

1
—
16 I
40

1
—I
25
50

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 189

189

Motion in a straight line
1 Uniform and non-uniform motion

UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
Key words

Distance

Distance

acceleration direct proportion gravity terminal velocity

1 Uniform and non-uniform motion ● Distance

Time

traveled by a body in uniform motion is directly proportional to time. ● Distance traveled per unit time by a body in non-uniform motion may continually increase or decrease.

Time

2 Constant speed

2 Constant speed
● Speed

Speed

Distance

is the ratio distance:time. A body in uniform motion moves at a constant speed.

3 Constant acceleration
● The

Time

speed of a body moving with constant acceleration increases at a uniform rate. Acceleration is the ratio speed:time. The graph of speed against time is a straight line (speed is directly proportional to time).

Time

3 Constant acceleration

4 Falling object falling object is acted on by gravity pulling it downwards, and by air friction, opposing its movement.
● Gravity is initially dominant and the object’s speed increases. Air friction increases as the object moves faster, until it equals the force of gravity.
There is no net acceleration and the object continues falling at a constant speed—its terminal velocity.

Distance

Speed

Acceleration

●A

Time

Time

Time

5 Bouncing ball

Speed as ball rises

Speed

Time

Time

ball accelerates as it is pulled towards the ground by gravity; its speed rapidly falls to zero when it hits the ground. It leaves the ground moving at maximum speed in the opposite direction then slows as it reaches maximum height where it momentarily stops.
● Some energy is lost as heat to the ground each time this is repeated so the ball eventually stops bouncing.
● The

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

5 Bouncing ball
Speed as ball falls

4 Falling object

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 190

190
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
Key words velocity Instantaneous velocity 1
1 Position-time graph for a particle with a continuously changing velocity
50

40

1 Position–time graph for particle with continuously changing velocity of the particle’s velocity at point d.
● Velocity is the ratio of displacement
(change of position) to time; velocity in meters per second (ms-1) = displacement in meters (m) / time in seconds (s)

a
Position x (in m)

● Determination

d

30

20

● If

a particle’s velocity is calculated using the distance traveled over a period of time, the resulting figure is actually the average velocity over that time period. It may be that the body never actually travels at this velocity during the particular time period.

10

0
0

2 Considering the particle’s instantaneous velocity ●

The particle’s actual velocity at a particular point in time is called its instantaneous velocity. This can only be found by considering a very small change in displacement over a very short time period.

20

60

40

80

100

53

55

Time (in s)

2 Considering the particle’s instantaneous velocity
40

39 d Position x (in m)

38

37

36

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

35

34

33
45

47

49

51
Time (in s)

The marked area (a in the top diagram) is enlarged 10 times.

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 191

191

Instantaneous velocity 2

UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS

1 Gradient of position–time graph

Key words gradient tangent velocity 38.8

38.7

Position x (in m)

1 Gradient of position–time graph a

38.6

● Velocity

d

∆x

38.5 b ∆t

38.4

38.3

38.2
49.5
100 x magnification

50.5

50.0
Time (in s)

2 Tangent to position–time graph
38.8

is given by the gradient of a position–time graph.
● The Greek prefix delta, ⌬x, its lower case alternative ␦, or the letters D or d are used to denote a small change in a variable. ● ⌬x is thus a small change in displacement during ⌬t, a small change in time.
● Instantaneous velocity at a point in time can be obtained by finding the gradient of the curve at that point in time. ● If the scale of the graph is magnified, it can be seen that its gradient at point d is approximately equal to ⌬x/⌬t where
⌬x is the distance between points a and b, and ⌬t is the time interval between these points.

2 Tangent to position–time graph ●

38.7 tangent Position x (in m)

38.6

Provided ⌬x and ⌬t are small enough, the section of the curve approximates to a straight line and thus the gradient at d equals the tangent drawn at that point. d
38.5
point of tangency
38.4

38.2
49.5

50.0
Time (in s)

With 100 x magnification, the curve and its tangent are indistinguishable near the point of tangency d.

50.5

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

38.3

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 192

192
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
Key words acceleration gradient tangent velocity

Instantaneous velocity and acceleration
1 Average velocity

1 Average velocity velocity between points a and b = ⌬x / ⌬t

● Average

2 Instantaneous velocity velocity at point e is found by drawing the tangent to e, ced. ● Velocity is the gradient of this line
(32m / 60 s = 0.53 ms-1)
● Instantaneous

3 Instantaneous positive acceleration ● Acceleration

is the ratio of velocity to

Position x (in m)

40

b

30
∆x
20 a 10
∆t
0
0

10

20
Time (in s)

30

2 Instantaneous velocity

time. Acceleration in meters per

● The

e

Position x (in m)

40

32 m
30
c

20

60 s
10
0
0

20

40

60

80

Time (in s)

3 Instantaneous positive acceleration
70
60

Velocity (in m/s)

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

ms-2

d

50

second2 (ms2) = velocity in meters
(ms-1) / time in seconds (s)

acceleration of a body calculated from its change in velocity over a period of time gives the body’s average acceleration over that time period. It may be that the body never actually accelerates at this rate at any time during the time period.
● The actual acceleration at a particular point in time is called the instantaneous acceleration. It is found by considering a very small change in velocity over a very small period of time. ● Acceleration is given by the slope of a velocity–time graph. Instantaneous acceleration at a point in time is obtained by finding the gradient of the curve at a point in time.
Tangent of f gives slope h/i
Thus acceleration = 30 ms-1 / 2 s = 1.5

40

50
40

f h 30
20

i

10
0
0

10

20
Time (in s)

30

40

100

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 193

193

Addition and subtraction of vectors 1
1 Position specified by two coordinate numbers

2 Position specified by directed line segment or position vector

+4 a +4

+3

+3 b +2

–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0

+2

2

3

4

5

–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0

–1

D

1

2

3

4 5

–1
–2

–2 c –3

–3
–4

–4

3 Displacement vector and resultant

A

y

B

point can also be defined by a position vector. This is a straight line from the origin to the point.

Vectors A and B

3 Displacement vector and resultant A d2 b

displacement vector has both magnitude (length) and direction. It can be represented by an arrow. The sum, or resultant, or two vectors is found by drawing the vectors as two sides of a triangle. The resultant is obtained by drawing in the third side.

●A

A+B
B
0

2 Position specified by directed line segment or position vector
●A

∆d

d1

resultant vector a Cartesian axis the position of a point is given by two coordinate numbers or coordinates; one along the horizontal (often designated x) axis and one along the vertical (often designated y) axis. The x coordinate is always given first.
● The point where the axes intersect is called the origin. The x coordinate is positive to the right of the origin and negative to the left of the origin. The y coordinate is positive above the origin and negative below the origin.

C

d

Cartesian coordinates displacement vector position vector

● On

B

+1

1

Key words

1 Position specified by two coordinate numbers

A
+1

UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS

x
Showing the vector sum A + B

4 Subtraction of two vectors in a plane

4 Subtraction of two vectors in a plane

–b

b

a

–b a Vectors a and b

a

Drawn as vectors a and –b

a–b

Showing the sum a + (–b) = a – b

the arrow representing a vector reverses the direction of the vector but does not alter its magnitude. If the vector b is represented by an arrow pointing in one direction, the vector -b is represented by an arrow of equal length pointing in the opposite direction. © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

● Reversing

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 194

194
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
Key words vector Addition and subtraction of vectors 2
2 Components and vectors 1 Vector addition

1 Vector addition
● If

a swimmer attempts to cross a river both the force created by the swimming stroke and the flow of the water act on him. Each force can be represented by an arrow on a vector diagram. ● If the swimmer sets off perpendicular to the flow of the river he will arrive at a point on the opposite bank downstream from where he started. In order to arrive at a point on the opposite bank directly opposite where he started, he needs to swim at a suitable angle upstream.

A

Y θ X
Components of a vector:
X is the component of A in x direction Y is the component of A in y direction
Magnitude of X = A cos θ
Magnitude of Y = A sin θ

Swimming across a river with a current of mi/h (Vc)

12
/

Vc

Vc

c
Vw

Vb

Vw

a

Vb

2 Components and vectors θ ● Any

vector can be resolved into a pair of perpendicular vectors or component vectors. If the vector, A, makes an angle q with the horizontal then the component vectors are Acosq in the direction parallel to the horizontal and Asinq in the direction perpendicular to the horizontal.

3 Vectors in three dimensions b
If you swim with a velocity of 1 mi/h (Vw), your velocity will be
Vb relative to the bank

If you now swim upstream at the angle shown, your velocity will be 0.86 mi/h at right angles to the bank

3 Vectors in three dimensions

Finding a vector if components are known: a = 20 ms–1 in north direction b = 10 ms–1 in east direction
Resultant c = 22 ms–1 with θ = 64°

4 Further illustrations of components

● Motion

in 3-dimensions can be expressed as a combination of three vectors in directions perpendicular to each other.

4 Further illustrations of components A
B

E

F

The component of A along the line EF is B
R

R1
Q

● When

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

a vector moves parallel to or perpendicular to a line one or other of the component vectors is equal to zero since the angle is 0° in which case sin 0° = 0, or 90° in which case cos 0°

A
C

P

The component of A along the line
PQ is C

= 0.
R2

M

A

R3

N
The vector R has the three components
R1, R2 and R3

The component of A along the line
MN is zero

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 195

195

The international system of units: base units
Name of base SI unit

The length equal to 1,650,763.73 wavelengths in vacuum corresponding to the transition between the levels 2p10 and 5d5 of the krypton-86 atom.

Key words
SI

Definition

meter

UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS

1 International System of
Units: base units
● Scientific

kilogram

The unit of mass; it is equal to the mass of the international prototype of the kilogram.
(This prototype is in the custody of the Bureau
International des Poids et Mesures at Sèvres, France.)

second

The duration of 9,192,631,770 periods of radiation corresponding to the transition between the two hyperfine levels of the ground state of the cesium-133 atom.

ampere

That constant current which, if maintained in two straight parallel conductors of infinite length, of negligible circular cross-section, and placed 1 meter apart in vacuum, would produce between these conductors a force equal to
2 × 10–7 newton per meter of length.

kelvin

The unit of thermodynamic temperature is the fraction 273.16 of the thermodynamic temperature of the triple point of water.

candela

The luminous intensity, in a given direction, of a source that emits monochromatic radiation of frequency 540 × 1012 hertz that has a radiant intensity in that direction of 1/683 watt per steradian.

mole

quantities are measured using the SI system (Système
International d’Unités). There are seven base units—the meter, kilogram, second, ampere, Kelvin, candela and mole. All other SI units are derived from these.
● The name of each unit is represented by a symbol. Some units are named after famous scientists. In this case the name of the unit is written in lower case while the symbol for the unit is written as an upper case letter
● For example, thermodynamic temperature is measured in kelvins but the symbol for this unit is K; electrical current is measured in amperes but the symbol is A.
● The radian and the steradian are supplementary SI units used in angular measurement. The amount of substance of a system which contains as many elementary entities as there are atoms in 0.012 kilogram of carbon-12.

1

Note: When the mole is used, the elementary entities must be specified and may be atoms, molecules, ions, electrons, other particles, or specified groups of such particles.

Name of base
SI unit

Symbol for unit

length mass time electric current thermodynamic temperature luminous intensity amount of substance

meter kilogram second ampere kelvin candela mole

m kg s
A
K cd mol

Physical quantity

Name of supplementary SI unit

Symbol for unit

plane angle solid angle

radian steradian rad sr © Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Physical quantity

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 196

196
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
Key words
SI

The international system of units: derived units
Physical
quantity

●

Most units are derived from two or more of the seven base units.
● Some derived units are always expressed in terms of base units. For example: speed = distance expressed in meters divided by time expressed in seconds. The unit of speed is therefore

ms-1.

the meter per second or
Other derived units are named. For example: pressure = force expressed in newtons divided by area expressed in square meters. The unit of area is therefore the newton per square meter or Nm-2 (although this is same as the pascal or Pa).
● The same series of prefixes can be added to any unit to change its value by multiples of 10. For example, the prefix kilo indicates a factor of 103 or
1,000, therefore 1 kilometer =
1,000 meters. Similarly, the prefix micro indicates a factor of 10-6 therefore 1 microgram =
0.000 001 gram.
● In order to avoid confusion, the correct use of upper case and lower case for prefix symbols is important.
For example, m (milli) is the symbol representing 10-3 while M (mega) represents 106.
●

Symbol for unit

Unit expressed in termsof base

frequency

1 International System of
Units: derived units

Derived
SI unit hertz Hz

1Hz = 1s–1

force

newton

N

pressure and stress

pascal

Pa

1N = 1Kgms–2
1Pa = 1Nm–2

work, energy, heat

joule

J

power

watt

W

electric charge

coulomb

C

electrical potential

volt

V

electric resistance

ohm

Ω

electric conductance

siemens

S

1Ω = VA–1
1S = 1Ω–1

electric capacitance

farad

F

1F = CV–1

magnetic flux

weber

Wb

magnetic flux density

tesla

T

1Wb = 1Vs
1T = Wbm–2

inductance

henry

H

1H = WbA–1

luminous flux

lumen

lm

1lm = 1cdsr

illuminance

lux

lx

activity

becquerel

Bq

1lx = 1lm mm–2
1Bq = 1s–1

gray

Gy

1Gy = 1Jkg–1

sievert

Sv

1Sv = 1Jkg–1

1C = 1As
1V = 1JC–1 = 1WA–1

difference, electromotive force

(magnetic induction)

(of a radioactive source) absorbed dose
(of ionizing radiation) dose equivalent
(of ionizing radiation)

Factor by which the unit is
Multiplied

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

1J = 1Nm
1W = 1JS–1

Prefix

10–1
10–2
10–3
10–6
10–9
10–12
10–15
10–18

deci centi milli micro nano pico femto atto Symbol

Factor by which the unit is
Multiplied

Prefix

Symbol

d c m µ n p f a 101
102
103
106
109
1012
1015
1018

deca hecto kilo mega giga tera peta exa da h k
M
G
T
P
E

*05 Units-Measure (188-197).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 197

197

The international system of units: symbols and conventions Quantity

Symbol

Name of unit

breadth

b

height

h

thickness

d

radius

r

diameter

d

distance along path

s, L

wavelength

e

mean free path

l,e

radius of gyration

k

focal length

f

object distance

u

image distance

v

mass mass of molecule

●

meter

m

m

kilogram

kg

m

tonne

t

atomic mass unit

u

me mp neutron mass

mn

atomic mass

ma

relative atomic

Ar

—

mass relative molecular

SI

Symbol

l

proton mass

Key words

International System of
Units: some symbols and conventions length

electron mass

UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS

(no unit, purely
Mr

numerical)

amount of substance

n

mole

mol

molar mass

M

kilogram per mole

kg mole–1

concentration of

CB

mole per meter

The scientific community generally refers to certain quantities using specific symbols such as l for length, r for radius, f for focal length. Such lengths use the SI unit of measurement, the meter.
● Some quantities use non-SI units but are recognized for general use. For example, the atomic mass unit is 1/12 the mass of one atom of carbon-12
(approximately 1.66 x 10-27 kg, equivalent to the mass of a proton).
● The mole is defined as the amount of a substance which contains the same number of entities (for example atoms or molecules) as there are atoms in
0.012 kg of carbon-12. This number
(6.023 x 1023) is also known as
Avogadro’s number. A mole of a substance therefore is the amount of the substance which contains 6.023 x
1023 particles of that substance.
● The half-life of a radioactive substance
(T1⁄2) is the time taken for one half of the original quantity to decay. Half lives vary from fractions of seconds to millions of years.

mol m–3

mass

cubed mole per decimeter

mol dm–3

cubed
Time

t

second

period

T

radioactive

T1/2

minute

time constant

τ

,

t1/2

s min hour

h

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

solute B

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 198

198
KEY WORDS

Key words

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

absolute zero The lowest possible temperature. absorption The assimilation of radiation into a body with its partial or complete conversion into another form of energy. acceleration A measure of how a body’s velocity changes with time. accommodation The adjustment of the focus of the eye to form a sharp image on the retina. accumulator An electric battery that stores energy when an electric current from an external source causes a reversible chemical change. action at a distance Forces such as gravity and magnetism that can affect objects with which they are not in direct contact. The space through which the forces operate is called a field. adiabatic change A change that occurs without thermal transfer to a system. alpha particle A particle released during radioactive decay. alternating current (AC) A continuous electric current that varies in strength, regularly reversing its direction. amplifier An electronic device for increasing the strength of a varying electrical signal. amplitude The size of the maximum displacement from the equilibrium position of an oscillation or wave. amplitude modulation Used in radio transmissions: a wave motion that varies the amplitude of the carrier wave is added to carry the signal to a receiver. analog A continuous representation, of any kind, of a varying quantity. angle of incidence The angle between an incident ray striking a reflecting or a refracting surface and the normal at the point of incidence. anion An ion that has a negative charge. anode The positive electrode toward which negative particles, such as electrons or negative ions, are attracted. It is the electrode carrying the positive charge in a solution undergoing electrolysis. aperture The useful or effective diameter of a lens or curved mirror. aquifer Water-bearing rock. area A measure of the extent of a surface. asymptote A curve becoming a straight line at infinity. atom The smallest particle of an element that can exhibit that element’s properties. An atom has a small massive nucleus of protons and neutrons surrounded by a cloud of electrons. auditory nerve A nerve that conveys sound impulses to the brain. basal metabolic rate The minimum energy required to maintain life. battery Two or more electrical cells connected in series or parallel. beat The interference effect between two waves of almost, but not quite, identical frequency. binary code The representation of numbers in a positional system using the integers 0 and 1. biogas Combustible gas formed by decomposition of organic matter.

bistable An electronic circuit that can have one of two stable states. Bistables are often called flip-flops or latch circuits. bit Each digit of a number (0 or 1) in binary code is called a bit (from binary digit). black body A theoretical body that absorbs all the radiation, of whatever kind, that falls on it. It is also a perfect emitter of radiation. boiling point The temperature at which a liquid changes to the gas state. It depends on atmospheric pressure. bolometer An electrical instrument used in the measurement of heat radiation. It utilizes platinum’s characteristic change in resistance with temperature.
Boolean algebra A way of organizing logical operations
(AND, OR, NOT) into a system of symbolic logic. It is the basis of the electronic logic gates used in digital computers. bus A system of electrical connections or wires that carry related data or instructions between the various parts of a computer. Also known as a highway. capacitance A measure of the ability of an object to store electrical charge as its potential rises. capacitor A device, consisting of a pair of metal plates separated by an insulator (dielectric), that can store an electric charge. carrier wave The electromagnetic wave of regular frequency, emitted from a transmitter, on which a second wave is superimposed by altering either its magnitude
(amplitude) or the number of its cycles per second (its frequency). This superimposition on the plain wave is called modulation. Cartesian coordinates Any system of locating a point on a plane by specifying the distance along two axes (usually a horizontal X axis and a vertical Y axis), or a point in space by specifying the distance along three axes (X, Y, and Z). The axes intersect at the origin. cathode The negative electrode from which negative particles, such as electrons or negative ions, emerge. It is the electrode carrying the negative charge in a solution undergoing electrolysis. cathode ray oscilloscope An instrument used to display electrical signals on a phosphorescent screen. cation An ion having a positive charge, which is attracted by the negatively charged electrode, the cathode, during electrolysis. caustic curve A curve or surface caused when parallel light rays strike a concave mirror. The rays are reflected in such a way that they intersect to form a curve. cell A vessel, used either to produce electricity or to perform electrolysis, containing two electrodes surrounded by an electrolyte. Celsius A scale of temperature that has 100 divisions between the lower fixed point (the melting point of pure ice) and the upper fixed point (the boiling point of pure water). center of curvature Center of the sphere of which a mirror or lens forms a part. center of mass The point at which the whole of the mass of a body can be considered to be concentrated and to act for gravitational or other purposes. The center of mass is the same as the center of gravity. chain reaction A reaction in which one event leads to a second, and so on, often used to describe a nuclear reaction.

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 199

199
KEY WORDS

Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor chip
(CMOS) An electronic chip with very low power consumption that can operate on low-supply voltages. compression The result of applying force or pressure to a body so that it becomes smaller or shorter. concave Curving inward, like the interior of a sphere. A concave lens is thinner at its center than at its periphery and causes incoming light rays to diverge. A concave mirror is a converging mirror. condense The process by which a vapor becomes a liquid. condenser An apparatus in which a vapor is converted to a liquid. conduction (1) (electrical) The movement of free electrons from atom to atom in a metallic conductor that transfers electrical energy. (2) (thermal) The transfer of heat energy through a substance from a region of high temperature to low. Energy is transferred by the vibrations of adjacent molecules. conductor A material that is able to conduct heat and electricity. conservation of energy, law of In a closed system, energy remains constant. Energy can be neither created nor destroyed. control rod A rod which absorbs neutrons, used in a nuclear reactor to maintain the reaction at the correct level. convection The transfer of heat energy in fluids by motion of the fluid. convex Curving outward, like the outside of a sphere. A convex lens is thicker at its center than at its periphery. It causes rays to converge. A convex mirror causes rays to diverge, magnifying the image. cornea The transparent convex membrane covering the front of the eye. corona A luminous electrical discharge seen around the surface of a charged conductor which causes ionization of the surrounding air. corrosometer An application of the Wheatstone bridge, used to measure a material’s susceptibility to corrosion. couple Two equal and parallel forces that act together in opposite directions, tending to turn an object. critical angle The smallest angle of incidence of a light ray passing from a dense to a less dense material, at which light only just reappears.

current A flow of electric charges through a conductor. damping The reduction in amplitude of any oscillating or vibrating system as a result of energy dissipating through friction or in any other way. decibel (dB) A unit of comparison between an arbitrary standard power level and any other level. In sound levels, one decibel is about the smallest difference perceptible. demodulation The retrieval of the information content of a modulated carrier wave. Demodulation occurs in every radio receiver. density Mass per unit volume of a substance. In SI units, kg/m3. Nearly all materials change volume with changes in temperature, so density is a function of temperature. In the case of gases, it is also a function of pressure.
Dewar flask A flask designed to prevent its contents losing or gaining heat by conduction (the walls of the flask contain a vacuum), radiation (the walls are silvered), or convection (the contents are isolated so there can be no convection currents). diatonic scale A series of eight musical sounds or notes
(doh ray me fah soh lah te doh') where the frequency of doh' is twice that of doh. dielectric A substance having very low electrical conductivity, used as an insulator. In a capacitor, the air or insulating material between plates is the dielectric. differential equation An equation which contains derivatives of a function. diffraction Spreading or bending of waves that pass the edge of an obstacle or pass through a small opening. Light diffracted by a narrow slit produces a set of interference fringes. diffraction grating A piece of transparent film or glass printed or engraved with many thousands of closely spaced opaque parallel lines. digital The method of representing information as a sequence of discrete numbers. diode A component of an electrical circuit that allows current to pass in only one direction. diopter A measure of lens power. dipole (1) Two point charges, equal in magnitude but opposite in sign, separated by a small distance. (2) A molecule in which electrons in the bonds move toward the more electronegative atom. direct proportion The relationship between two variables which are a constant multiple of each other. dispersion The separation of a beam of mixed frequencies.
Shorter wavelengths are bent most. displacement vector The vector describing an object’s change of position. diverging lens Alternative name for concave lens. dynamo A machine that converts mechanical energy to electrical energy. earth (electrical) The electrical connection by a conductor between an electrical appliance and Earth. eddy current The electric current induced in a conductor cut by a changing magnetic field. efficiency The ratio of the energy output of a machine to the energy input. Thermal efficiency is the ratio of the work done to the heat supplied by the fuel. electrical energy The energy acquired from moving electric charges.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

charge (electric charge) The property of certain atomic and subatomic particles that causes forces of attraction and repulsion between them. The electron has the smallest unit of negative charge, the proton an equal amount of positive charge. chemical energy The energy stored in the bonds between atoms and molecules that is released during a chemical reaction. chirp A signal or pulse of radiation whose frequency changes with time. clocked logic Logic gates used in a circuit that generate pulses at precisely controlled intervals. cochlea Part of the inner ear. combustion The chemical term for burning, usually in oxygen. commutator A device used both to change the direction of current flowing in the armature coil of a DC motor and in a generator to convert AC/DC.

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 200

200
KEY WORDS

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

electric field (1) An area in which forces are exerted on electric charges. (2) (strength or intensity) A field produced around a charged object. Electric fields can be described as having lines of electric force or field lines. electricity The term used to describe the effects of electric charges. Moving charges cause electric current, stationary charges cause static electricity. electrode A conductor that allows current to flow through an electrolyte, gas, vacuum, dielectric, or semiconductor. electrolysis The process by which an electrolyte is decomposed when a direct current is passed through it between electrodes. electrolyte A substance that forms ions when molten or dissolved in a solvent and that carries an electric current during electrolysis. electrolytic capacitor Small capacitor with large capacitance values. Electrolytic capacitors must be connected correctly with respect to electrical polarity. electromagnet A magnet produced by the effect of a current flowing in a coil surrounding a soft-iron core. electromagnetic induction The production across a conductor, moving relative to a magnetic field, of an induced
e.m.f.
electromagnetic radiation Energy radiated through space in the form of oscillating electric and magnetic fields at right angles to each other and to the direction of propagation, at a speed of 3.00 x 108 m/s–1. electromagnetic spectrum The range of frequencies of electromagnetic radiation—gamma radiation, X-rays, ultraviolet, visible light, infrared, microwaves, and radio waves. electromagnetism The magnetic force produced by electricity, and the electric effects produced by magnetic fields. electromotive force (e.m.f.) The power of an electric cell to push electrons around a circuit. electron A basic subatomic particle. It is very light, has a negative charge, and orbits around the nucleus of an atom. electroscope A device used to detect if an object is charged and, if so, whether the charge is positive or negative. electrostatic precipitator Used to clean gas emissions of suspended solid particles. electrostatics The study of the effects of stationary electric charges. endoscope A medical instrument used to make internal examinations of the body without surgical intervention. energy The ability of a system to do work. There are two fundamental forms of energy: potential (due to position) and kinetic (due to motion). Other forms of energy—chemical, electrical, heat, light, mechanical, nuclear, sound—can be described in terms of the fundamental forms and are largely interchangeable. energy levels Bands of allowed energies, each representing many quantum states, that electrons can occupy in an atom. epicenter The point on Earth’s surface immediately above the focus of the seismic waves associated with an earthquake. equilibrium A state of stability where forces acting on a body cancel each other out.
Eustachian tube Tube connecting the middle ear with the pharynx. evaporation The process in which a liquid changes state to a vapor.

exothermic An exothermic reaction is a chemical reaction that releases heat to the surroundings.

expansion A physical process in which there is an increase of an object’s length, area, or volume. explosimeter An application of Wheatstone bridge used to measure the strength of an explosion. exponential A function that varies with the power of another quantity. exponential decay A property decaying by the same ratio in equal time intervals is said to undergo exponential decay. Fahrenheit scale A temperature scale where the melting point of ice is 32° and the boiling point of water is 212°. feedback The return to an amplifier as an input of a signal obtained from the output of the amplifier. fermentation Anaerobic respiration of organic substances. ferromagnetic A material, such as iron, steel, nickel, or cobalt, that can be made into a strong magnet. fiber optics A branch of optics concerned with the transmission of light along optical fibers. filament A thin high-resistance wire through which an electric current passes; in an electric light bulb the filament becomes white hot. fission A process during which a heavy atomic nucleus disintegrates into two lighter atoms that together have less mass than the total initial material. The mass lost is liberated as energy (E = mc2). fluorescence The emission of radiation from certain substances that have been irradiated by light or other radiations. flux The strength of a field (magnetic or electrical) in a given area. It is the product of the area and the part of the field strength that is at right angles to the area. focal length The distance from the center of a lens to its focal point. focus (principal focus or focal point) The point on the principal axis through which rays of light parallel to the principal axis are refracted. force Any influence that causes a resting body to move or that changes the momentum of a moving body. fossil fuel A fuel such as coal, petroleum, or natural gas formed by the decomposition of living organisms in prehistoric times. frequency The number of complete cycles of a periodic motion passing a point in a given time. frequency modulation A system of modulating a carrier wave used for transmissions in the very high frequency (VHF) and microwave bands. friction The force that tends to oppose motion between surfaces in contact. fundamental (harmonics) The component having the lowest frequency in a complex vibration (fundamental frequency or first harmonic). fuse An electrical safety device. It is a short length of low melting point wire, which breaks if excessive current flows in a circuit. fusion (nuclear) The process by which two or more light atomic nuclei join, forming a single heavier nucleus that is

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 201

201
KEY WORDS

induction coil A form of electrical transformer used to produce a high-voltage, low-current alternating current from a low-voltage source of direct current. inertia The tendency of a body to oppose a change in its motion. infinity A point that is so far away from an optical system that the light emitted by it falls in parallel rays. infrared Electromagnetic radiation with a greater wavelength than the red end of the visible spectrum. infrasound Very low frequency sound. insulation The process of inhibiting the flow of energy by placing nonconductors or insulators in its path. insulator A component that impedes the flow of energy. integrated circuit A complete electronic circuit on a silicon or other chip. interference The interaction between waves of the same frequency emitted from different sources. interference fringes The variation in disturbances produced by waves of the same frequency from different sources; they appear as alternate light and dark bands. internal combustion engine An engine in which energy is produced by the combustion of a gas-and-air mixture. internal energy A body’s total energy resulting from the relative motions and kinetic and potential energies of all its component particles. inverse-square law The intensity of radiation decreases with the square of the distance from its source. inverting amplifier An amplifier whose output is the inverse of its input. ion An electrically charged atom or group of atoms. ionizing radiation Any electromagnetic or particle radiation that causes ionization in a medium when passing through it. isotope Atoms of the same element having the same atomic number but containing different numbers of neutrons, giving different mass numbers.
Kelvin scale A temperature scale that has no negative values. Its lower fixed point is absolute zero.
Kepler’s laws (of planetary motion) (1) Each planetary orbit is an ellipse with the Sun at one focus. (2) A line from the Sun to the planet covers equal areas in equal times. (3)
The square of a planet’s orbital period is proportional to the cube of its mean distance from the Sun. laser A device that produces a narrow high energy beam of intense monochromatic light. latch An electronic circuit that can store a single binary digit
(bit) until the next clock pulse arrives. laws of reflection When an incident light ray is reflected at a surface it is reflected in the same plane as the incident ray and the normal. The angle of reflection equals the angle of incidence. lens A shaped piece of transparent material that bends light by refraction. lever A simple machine consisting of a rigid beam turning about a pivot. A force applied to the beam moves a load at another point on the beam. light-dependent resistor (LDR) An electronic device the resistance of which decreases when light falls on it. light-emitting diode (LED) A semiconductor junction that produces a cold light when a small electric current passes through it.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

lighter than the components. The mass lost is liberated as energy (E = mc2) galvanometer A sensitive instrument for measuring small electric currents. gamma radiation Very shortwave electromagnetic radiation emitted as a result of radioactive decay. gas law The equation PV = nRT, where P is the pressure,
V is the volume, n is the number of moles of gas present, T is the temperature measured in kelvin, and R is the universal gas constant.
Gauss’s law When a closed surface is in an electric field, the total electric flux at right angles to that surface is proportional to the sum of the electric charges within the surface. gear wheel A toothed wheel that transfers turning motion
(torque) from one shaft to another. generator A machine that converts mechanical energy to electrical energy. geothermal energy Power generated making use of the heat energy in rocks within Earth’s crust. global warming Certain gases (known as greenhouse gases), such as CO2 form a layer in Earth’s atmosphere.
Shortwave infrared rays from the Sun pass through this layer heating Earth, which radiates longer-wave infrared radiation.
This is trapped in Earth’s atmosphere, causing increased temperatures. gradient The slope of a tangent to a curve at a given point. gravitational field The area of space around a body in which its mass attracts another body. gravitational potential The change in potential energy for a unit mass that moves into an object’s gravitational field. gravity The effect of gravitational attraction between Earth
(or other heavenly body) and a body in its gravitational field. half-life A substance that decays exponentially by the same ratio in equal intervals of time. The constant ratio is the halflife.
Hall effect The production of a transverse voltage difference in a conductor, caused by the disturbance of the lines of electrical current flow, which occurs on the application of a magnetic field perpendicular to the direction of current flow. harmonic (overtone) The part of a complex vibration that is a simple multiple of the fundamental. heat pump A closed system containing a working fluid that transfers heat from an external source. helical motion Moving in a spiral. high pass filter An electronic device that allows frequencies above a certain level to pass with little hindrance. hydraulic jack A machine that uses a piston in a fluid filled cylinder to raise heavy weights over short distances. hydraulics The science that relates to the flow of fluids. hydroelectric plant A power station where the kinetic energy of falling water is converted to electrical energy. ignite To heat a mixture of gases to the temperature at which combustion occurs. impedance The total resistance to alternating current flow in a circuit. inductance The extent to which an element of a circuit forms a magnetic field when carrying an electric current. induction The change in a body’s electric or magnetic state caused by its nearness to a field.

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 202

202
KEY WORDS

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Lissajous figures Patterns formed on an oscilloscope screen when the electron beam is moved simultaneously by the electric fields of two sinusoidal voltages at right angles to each other. logic gate An electronic circuit that processes information coded in terms of voltage levels, usually representing “1” or
“0,” or “True” or “False.” longitudinal wave A wave motion the displacement of which is in the direction of its propagation.
Magnadur A material made from ferromagnetic compounds, used to make permanent magnets. magnet An iron-containing body with domains sufficiently well aligned to produce an external magnetic field and to experience a turning force (torque) when placed in another magnetic field. magnetic field A space in which a magnetic force can be detected by its effect on iron-containing bodies or on charged particles. magnetism The field of force caused by (1) the alignment of the magnetic moments of atoms in the same direction
(ferromagnetism); or (2) the movement of an electric charge
(electromagnetism).
magnification The comparison of the size of an object to the size of the image produced by an optical system. mass The measure of a body’s resistance to acceleration.
Mass, unlike weight, does not change when it is subjected to different gravitational forces. mechanical advantage A measure of the effectiveness of simple machines, such as the lever. melting point The temperature at which a pure solid changes state from solid to liquid at a certain pressure. microprocessor A computer’s central processor unit in a single integrated circuit chip. microwaves Electromagnetic radiation lying in the spectrum between radio waves and the infrared. moderator A material used in a nuclear reactor to slow fast neutrons so that they will undergo fission reactions. Graphite and heavy water are used as moderators. modulation The process of superimposing a signal carrying information onto a carrier wave in radio transmissions. molecule The smallest part of an element or chemical compound that can exist independently with all the properties of the element or compound. moment The turning effect of a force around a point. momentum A body’s momentum is the product of its mass and velocity. monochromatic light Electromagnetic radiation having only one wavelength and hence one color. mutual inductance The generation of an e.m.f. in one system of conductors as a result of changing magnetic flux in an adjacent system of conductors. neutral A conductor having neither negative nor positive electric charge. neutron One of the two major components of the atomic nucleus. The neutron has a mass very close to that of the proton but has no electric charge.
Newton’s laws of motion (1) A body will continue at rest or in a state of constant velocity unless acted on by an external force. (2) The rate of change of a body’s momentum is proportional to the force applied and is in the direction of the force. (3) Action and reaction are equal and opposite.

Nicol prism Used to obtain plane-polarized light. It consists of two crystals of calcite cemented together with Canada balsam. node A point on a standing wave where there is zero displacement. nonmetal An element that is not a metal. Non-metals readily form negative ions and are poor conductors of heat and electricity. normal A term meaning perpendicular to, or perpendicular to the tangent of a curve at a particular point. n-type Semiconductor material treated to contain an excess of negative charge carriers (electrons). nuclear energy (atomic energy) Energy released as a result of changes in the nuclei of atoms. Mass lost in these changes is converted to energy. nucleus The small (about 10–14 m diameter) core of an atom. nuclide A particular isotope of an element, identified by the number of protons and neutrons in the nucleus. objective lens The lens nearest to the object in an optical instrument. octave Interval between two frequencies which have the frequency ratio 2:1.
Ohm’s law The ratio of the current (I) in a metallic conductor at constant temperature to the potential difference
(V) between its ends is constant—the resistance (R) of the conductor. operational amplifier (op-amp) General-purpose voltage amplifiers. orbit The path of a heavenly body (or artificial satellite) circling another as a result of the attraction of gravity. oscillation A rapid backward-and-forward repetitive motion in a fluid or solid that behaves elastically. oscillator An electronic circuit that converts direct current electricity into an alternating current. ossicles Small bones in the middle ear. parabolic reflector A concave reflector, a section across which is a parabola. parallel Two or more electrical components connected between the same points in a circuit are said to be connected in parallel. pendulum An elongated body free to swing on a pivot, under the influence of gravity, about a horizontal axis. permittivity The electric flux density produced in a material that is excited by a source of e.m.f. pharynx A muscular tube which is part of the alimentary canal between the mouth and the gullet. phase The point in a cycle of any periodic function or periodic quantity reached at a specific time. photoconductive cell A passive semiconductor device the electrical resistance of which changes in proportion to the intensity of light falling on it. photon A packet of electromagnetic radiation that can be considered as either a particle or a wave. photovoltaic cell Photovoltaic cells, commonly known as solar cells, convert light energy to electrical energy. They consist of layers of p- and n-type silicon crystal. When light strikes the junction between the layers, electrons flow through the structure creating a potential difference. piston A round plate, attached to a rod, that moves within a cylinder in a pump or engine.

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 203

203

pivot (or fulcrum) The point of support about which a lever turns. plane A flat surface. polarization Of a radiated wave, being oriented in a predictable direction perpendicular to the direction of propagation. Polaroid Trade name for a transparent plastic sheet containing many minute double-refracting crystals with parallel axes, which produces plane-polarized light when ordinary light falls on it. position vector (directed line segment) It represents the displacement of a point from a reference point. potential difference The difference in electrical potential between two points on a circuit or in an electric field. potentiometer An instrument used to give an accurate measurement of e.m.f. or potential difference. power The rate of doing work or the rate at which energy is transferred. pressure The force acting per unit area. In a liquid at rest, pressure increases with depth and acts equally in all directions. primary colors Red, green, and bluish-violet. When light of these three colors is mixed, white light is formed. principal axis The line that passes through the central point of the lens. principle of superposition When a wave at its point of maximum positive amplitude meets another of equal amplitude at its point of minimum amplitude, the result is zero. If the maxima of two waves meet, the resulting wave is the sum of both waves. prism A block of transparent material with a triangular cross section. proton One of the basic particles of the atom, found in the nucleus with the neutron. It has a positive charge and is similar in mass to the neutron. p-type Semiconductor material treated to contain an excess of positive charge carriers (sometimes referred to as “holes”). pulley A simple machine for raising loads, consisting of a grooved wheel over which a rope or chain passes. pyrometer An instrument for measuring high temperatures. radiation The transmission of energy by the movement of waves and particles in all directions. It does not require a medium in which to travel. radioactivity The spontaneous disintegration of certain isotopes, accompanied by the emission of radiation. radio waves A form of electromagnetic radiation. radius A straight line joining the center of a circle to a point on its circumference. rarefaction The opposite of compression for longitudinal waves. Rayleigh criterion The criterion for the resolution of interference fringes, spectral lines, and images.
Rayleigh’s scattering law When electromagnetic radiation is reflected off atoms there is a change in phase but not frequency. rectifier A device allowing electric current to flow freely in one direction only. reflecting telescope A telescope that brings light rays to a focus using a mirror. reflection The process by which radiation incident on a surface does not penetrate the surface but bounces back.

refracting telescope A telescope that brings light to a focus using lenses. refraction The change of direction of electromagnetic radiation, such as light, on passing from one medium to another. refractive index The constant representing the amount of refraction occurring when electromagnetic radiation passes from one medium to another. relay (electrical) An electromechanical switch. resistance A measure of the extent to which a material can oppose the passage of an electric current. resolving power The potential an optical instrument has for producing distinguishable images. resonance The state of a body subjected to a periodic disturbance at a frequency close to or equal to the frequency at which it naturally vibrates or oscillates. respiration The process in living organisms by which chemical energy in food is liberated. resultant The single vector representing the sum of a set of vectors. retina The light-sensitive area of the eye consisting of rod and cone cells.
Richter scale A logarithmic scale used to indicate the magnitude of earthquakes. satellite A small body orbiting a larger one under the influence of gravity. scalar A quantity that has magnitude but not direction. secondary colors Magenta, cyan, and yellow. Each is formed from two different primary colors. seismic wave A shock wave produced by an earthquake or explosion. self inductance If the current in a circuit changes, the magnetic flux linked to the circuit changes and induces an
e.m.f. the direction of which opposes the change causing it. semiconductor Covalent crystals the resistance of which is between that of insulators and conductors. Current is carried by free electrons, leaving positively charged holes behind. short-circuit An electrical connection of negligible resistance that bypasses a part of an electrical circuit.
SI Système International (d’Unités): a system of coherent metric units used in science. simple harmonic motion Vibrational motion, in which acceleration toward a point is proportional to the distance from it. sine wave The projection on a plane surface of the graph of a point moving around a circle at uniform speed, and the graph of the function y = sin x or y = cos x. solar panel A grouping of solar cells used to collect energy from sunlight using the photovoltaic effect to create electricity by absorbing the Sun’s energy. solenoid A coil of insulated wire, cylindrical in shape, with its length longer than its diameter. sonar A system used to detect and locate objects using reflected sound waves. sonometer An apparatus that is used to study the vibrations of a wire or string. sound waves A series of alternate compressions and rarefactions (longitudinal waves) of a medium through which energy is transmitted. spectrograph An instrument that makes a photographic record, a spectrogram, of a spectrum used in analysis.

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

KEY WORDS

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 204

204
KEY WORDS

spectrum The arrangement of electromagnetic radiation

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

into its constituent wavelengths.

speed of electromagnetic waves All electromagnetic waves travel at a speed of 3 x 108 meters per second in a vacuum. spherical aberration The distorted image formed by a lens or mirror when rays striking a lens or a mirror at different distances from the center do not come to a focus at the same point. square wave An electrical waveform that alternates between a high and a low voltage, changing very suddenly from one to the other. stationary wave (or standing wave) The interference pattern formed by two waves of the same type that have the same frequency and amplitude and are traveling at the same time in opposite directions. strain A body’s temporary or permanent distortion when a stress is applied to it. stroboscope An instrument used to study vibrating or rotating objects. tangent A line or plane that touches a curve or surface. temperature A measure of the degree of heat of a system on a particular scale. tension A body in equilibrium is under tension if a force is tending to stretch it. terminal velocity The constant velocity acquired by a body falling freely through a fluid when acted on by a constant force or forces. thermal conductivity A measure of the ease with which a material conducts heat energy. thermal equilibrium The state of a body where no net heat flow occurs between it and its surroundings. thermal radiation The emission of infrared radiation. thermionic valve A glass or metal tube containing gas (or a vacuum) and two or more electrodes. The cathode is heated. thermistor (or thermal resistor) A semiconductor the resistance of which is very sensitive to temperature. thermocouple An instrument used for measuring temperature consisting of a pair of wires or semiconductors joined at each end. thermopile (or pile) An instrument consisting of a number of thermocouples connected in series. thyristor A semiconductor power switch. tidal energy Energy represented by the water moving under the influence of gravity, following the pull of the Sun and Moon and forming tides. torque The turning moment exerted by a force acting on an object at a distance from the axis of rotation and at a tangent to it. transformer A device that changes an alternating current of one voltage to an alternating current of another voltage by electromagnetic induction (mutual induction). transistor A semiconductor device that amplifies electric currents flowing through it. They usually consist of three layers of n-type and p-type semiconductors.

transverse wave Wave motions where the vibration or displacement is perpendicular to the direction of propagation. triple point The conditions of temperature and pressure at which the three phases of a substance—solid, liquid, and gas—are in equilibrium. truth table A table that shows all the possible inputs and outputs for a digital circuit in which logical operations take place. turbine A machine that extracts energy from a moving fluid.
The rotation of the turbine shaft can be used to generate electricity. ultrasound Sound waves with a higher frequency than that detectable by the human ear (above 20 kHz). ultraviolet light Electromagnetic radiation of shorter wavelengths than visible light, but of longer wavelength than
X-rays.
vacuum A region devoid of matter—in practice it is considered to be a region of very low pressure. valve A device controlling the passage of fluid in a pipe in one direction. van de Graaff A machine using electrostatics to produce a very high voltage. vapor Gas that is below the temperature at which it can be liquefied by pressure. vaporization The process of change of state of a solid or liquid to a vapor. vector A quantity that has both size and direction. velocity Speed in a specified direction, a vector quantity. virtual image An image produced by diverging rays that appears to be in a particular place but cannot be produced on a screen. virtual ray A ray that appears to come from a virtual image but does not actually exist. viscosity A measure of a fluid’s inability to flow. The more viscous a fluid, the less easily it flows. voltameter An electrolytic cell used to measure electric current. wave A way in which energy is transferred through a medium as a series of periodic oscillations. waveform The shape of a wave. wavelength The distance between two corresponding points on a wave. weight The force exerted on a body by Earth’s gravitational pull. Wheatstone bridge An apparatus for measuring electrical resistances. work The transfer of energy occurring when a force is applied to a body to cause it to move.
X-rays Electromagnetic radiation of a frequency between that of ultraviolet light and that of gamma rays.
Young’s double slit experiment Demonstrates light and dark patterns (Young’s fringes) caused by interference between two light sources. zener diode A simple semiconductor device used in voltage regulation. *Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 205

205
INTERNET RESOURCES

Internet resources
There is a lot of useful information on the internet.
Information on a particular topic may be available through a search engine such as Google
(http://www.google.com). Some of the Web sites that are found in this way may be very useful, others not. Below is a selection of Web sites related to the material covered by this book.
The publisher takes no responsibility for the information contained within these Web sites.
All the sites were accessible in March 2006.

A Walk Through Time
A history of time measurement from prehistoric days to the present from the National Institute of Standards and
Technology.
http://physics.nist.gov/GenInt/Time

Beginner’s Guide to Aerodynamics
An explanation of aerodynamics for beginners through interactive animations, equations, and text. Produced by
NASA’s Glenn Research Center. http://www.grc.nasa.gov/WWW/K-12/airplane/ bga.html

Constants and Equations Pages
A collection of constants and equations, including the periodic table, unit conversions, SI units, and mathematical symbols. http://www.tcaep.co.uk Cosmic Evolution from Big Bang to
Humankind
A Web site that traces the cosmic origin and evolution of matter and energy from the Big Bang to the present.

The ABCs of Nuclear Science
A brief introduction to nuclear science with experiments and a glossary from the Nuclear Science
Division, Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory. http://www.lbl.gov/abc/ About Physics
Includes links to a glossary, encyclopedia, experiments, periodic table, chemical structure archive, chemistry problems, and articles. http://physics.about.com Antimatter: Mirror of the Universe
A Web site that explains what antimatter is and where it is made. Produced by CERN.

http://www.tufts.edu/as/wright_center/ cosmic_evolution Eric Weisstein’s World of Physics
An online encyclopedia with excellent graphics; a good source for equations. http://scienceworld.wolfram.com/physics Exploring the Nature of Matter
A comprehensive Web site sponsored by the Thomas
Jefferson National Accelerator Facility. Contains information on current research as well as teacher and student resources, including a table of elements, glossary, hands-on-activities, and games and puzzles. http://www.jlab.org http://livefromcern.web.cern.ch/livefromcern/antimatter

Fear of Physics
Explores the history of nuclear weapons and the science behind them. http://www.atomicarchive.com A friendly, non-technical Web site for students, which includes a physics dictionary and covers 200 homework and exam questions. http://www.fearofphysics.com The Atoms Family

Inquiring Minds

Teaches the different forms of energy using the spooky
Addams Family theme.

Exploring particle physics and the physics of the universe with the Fermi National Accelerator Laboratory.

http://www.miamisci.org/af/sln

http://www.fnal.gov/pub/inquiring

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Atomicarchive.com

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 206

206
INTERNET RESOURCES

Introduction to Particle Physics

Physics Web

Information on accelerators, detectors, antimatter, the
Big Bang, dark matter, and the top quark from the
Rutherford Appleton Laboratory

A Web site aimed primarily at the professional physicist but including many current stories about the state of physics research as well as links to teaching and learning resources.

http://hepwww.rl.ac.uk/Pub/Phil/contents.html

http://physicsweb.org

NIST Reference on Constants, Units, and Uncertainty
The National Institute of Standards and Technology’s guide to fundamental physical constants, SI units, and uncertainty-of-measurement results.

Physics Zone
A resource for learning introductory level algebra-based physics. http://www.sciencejoywagon.com/physicszone

http://physics.nist.gov/cuu/Constants

Physlink.com: Physics and Astronomy Online
The Official String Theory Web Site
Patricia Schwarz explains theoretical particle physics in lay terms. http://www.superstringtheory.com Comprehensive physics and astronomy online education, research, and reference Web site; includes an
“Ask the Expert” resource. http://www.physlink.com Open Directory Project: Physics

ScienceMaster

A comprehensive listing of internet resources in the field of physics.

News, information, links, columns, and homework help in all major areas of science.

http://dmoz.org/science/physics

Physics Central
Links to information on experiments, physics in daily life, biography, history, and reference resources from the American Physical Society. http://www.physicscentral.org http://www.sciencemaster.com

Science News for Kids
Science Service Suggestions for hands-on activities, books, articles, Web resources, and other useful materials for students ages 9–13. http://www.sciencenewsforkids.org Physics Classroom
Online Tutorials for high-school students on a variety of basic physics concepts, including Newton’s laws; work, energy, and power; momentum and its conservation; and waves. http://www.physicsclassroom.com Physics.org
Links to information on experiments, physics in daily life, biography, history, and reference resources. http://www.physics.org Scientific American
The latest news in science. http://www.sciam.com The Soundry
Information on the perception, physics, and applications of sound, with a timeline of audio engineering. http://library.thinkquest.org/19537

Stephen Hawking’s Universe

A comprehensive list of “firsts” and discoveries in
Physics from the sixth century BCE to today.
© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Physics Timeline

Information on the history of the universe and unanswered questions in cosmology.

http://www.weburbia.com/pg/historia.htm

http://www.pbs.org/wnet/hawking

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 207

207
INDEX

Index of subject headings.

a absorption of light 83
AC electric motors 147–8
AC response 157–8
AC theory 155–6 addition of vectors 193–4 alternating current see AC amplifiers 179–83 analog signals 186
ASCII code 187 audio range 65

b base units 195 bistable, the 173–4
Boolean algebra 170

c capacitance and capacitors
111–12, 151 cars, electricity in 159 center of gravity 17 charging by induction 105 circuit symbols 160–2 circuits see counting circuits; integrated circuits; rectifier circuits clocked logic 175 examples of 176
CMOS chips 169 color 98 color coding 113 color mixing 99 combinational logic design 171–2 conduction, thermal 27–8 convection 31–2 counting circuits 177–8 current, electric 116–20; see also alternating current; direct current

DC electric motors 144 decibel ratings 67 derived units 196 diffraction 73–4 diffraction grating 75 digital signals 186 diodes 163 direct current see DC dispersion of light 84

e ear, human 64
Earth’s magnetic field 135–6 electric charge 103 electric current 116–20 magnetic fields due to 133–4 electric fields 114 and Gauss’s theorem 115 electric lighting 130 electric meters 122–3 electric motors 144, 147–8 electric power 129 generation of 39, 143 transmission of 149–50 electrical equipment in cars
159
electrolysis 131 electromagnetic induction
141–2
electromagnetic spectrum
80–1
electromagnets 139–40 electromotive force 126 electroscopes 104 electrostatic charge, problems created by 110 electrostatics, applications of 106–9 energy alternative sources of 42–4 changes in 33–4 and forces 18 lost from houses 36 non-renewable sources of 40 nuclear 45 production and distribution of 35

renewable sources of 41 solar 37 eye, human 93

f force pumps 23 forces addition of 12 and energy 18 in magnetic fields 137–8 nature of 11 turning effect 13 free-fall velocity 16 function and scaling 188

g
Gauss’s theorem 115 gravity 15 center of 17

h heat and temperature 25 and work 24 human ear 64 human eye 93
Huygen’s construction 47–8

i induction 105 electromagnetic 141–2 inductors 152 infrared 82 infrasound 66 instantaneous velocity 190–1 and acceleration 192 integrated circuits 165 interference of light beams 70–2 international system of units
195–7

l lasers 102 lenses 95–7 lift pumps 23

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Index

d

*Phys Postlims (198-208).qxd

12/11/08

2:20 PM

Page 208

208
INDEX

light absorption and scattering of 83 dispersion of 84 reflection and refraction of
85–92
velocity of 79 light beams, interference of 70–2 lighting, electric 130 logic see clocked logic; sequential logic logic design, combinational
171–2
logic gates 166

m machines 19–22 magnetic fields 132–6 forces in 137–8 meters, electrical 122–3 microprocessors 185 momentum 14 motion Newton’s laws of 8–10 in a straight line 189 musical notes 59 musical scales 63

n
NAND equivalents 167
Newton, Isaac first law of motion 8 second law of motion 9 third law of motion 10 noise, measurement of 67
NOR equivalents 168 nuclear energy 45

© Diagram Visual Information Ltd.

Ohm’s law 121 operational amplifiers
179–83
optical instruments 100–1

p polarization 77–8 power see electric power power stations 39 power transmission, electric
149–50
pumps 23

r radiation, thermal 29–30 radio 153
RC network 157–8 rectifier circuits 184 reflection 85–9 multiple 72 refraction 90–2 renewable energy sources
41
resistors 124–5 resolving power 76 resonance 62

s scales 63 scattering of light 83 seismic waves 57–8 semiconductor diodes
163
sequential logic 173–4 solar energy 37–8 sound, speed of 68–9 sound waves 53–5 stability 17 stationary waves 52 subtraction of vectors
193–4
Sun, the, energy from
37
superposition, principle of 49–51

t television 154 temperature 25 scales of 26 terminal velocity 16 thermal conduction 27–8 thermal radiation 29–30 transformer-induced EMFS 145–6 transients 151–2 transistors 164 truth tables 166 turning effect of force 13

u ultrasound 66 units, international system of 195–7

v vectors, addition and subtraction of 193–4 velocity free-fall 16 instantaneous 190–2 of light 79 of sound 68–9 terminal 16 vibrating columns of air 61 vibrating strings 60 vision, defects of 94

w water waves 56 waves 46 stationary 52 see also seismic waves; sound waves; water waves
Wheatstone network, applications of 127–8 work as distinct from heat 24